Category Archives: COINTELPRO terrorism

Dr. Eric Karlstrom: Four Estimates of the Size, Scope, Structure, Costs, and Personnel Requirements of ¨GOG´S NeW GESTAPO* (¨Global Organized Stalking Neuro-Warfare Groups´ Electronic Slavery, Torture, and PsyOp Operations¨)

Re-posted below, with the author’s permission, is Dr. Eric Karlstrom‘s recent analysis–originally posted at his website–of the current-day C/overt Op Phoenix-extended “domestic pacification” and electronic assault and slavery operations ongoing in the fallen United States of America, in Europe, in Australia, in New Zealand, in India, in Thailand–in countries around the globe!–all part of the New World Horror that’s been unfolding around us, which is literally torturing “Targeted Individuals” to death — while Mainstream Media–inclusive of once-respected outlets like The New York Times, NPR, PBS, and Democracy Now keeps the world medicated and somnolent with CIA/Mockingbird-run horrifically passive ignoring of reality and active lies, deception, distortion, and denial in reportage. 

Researcher, writer, and truth activist Dr. Karlstrom is an Emeritus Professor of Geography from California State University who reads, analyzes, and writes about current-day reality from a highly informed and widely-read perspective. His analyses may be found on his many websites (listed below), and on radio conversations and podcasts on Youtube. More on his background may be found here on his Bio page, where he writes;

“Since the corporate media now presents us mostly with “info-tainment) / propaganda rather than facts and the truth, it now seems incumbent upon citizens / researchers to discern the truth from many various sources and disseminate the facts to their fellow citizens.  As an educator (University Professor for 30 years), this is my goal.  It is my hope that, fortified with accurate information, the American citizens will have the wisdom and ability to implement the solution, articulated by Jefferson over 200 years ago:

“THE TWO ENEMIES OF THE PEOPLE ARE CRIMINALS AND GOVERNMENT, SO LET US TIE THE SECOND DOWN WITH THE CHAINS OF THE CONSTITUTION SO THE SECOND WILL NOT BECOME A LEGALIZED VERSION OF THE FIRST.”

I do this as a public service.  I do not have tax-exempt status, but I appreciate any contributions that will support my ongoing research / education efforts, maintaining and upgrading my websites, etc.  And / or, if you enjoy music, you might visit my website, http://www.erickarlstrom.com, and purchase some of my many Cds and / or movie.  Thank you!” 

In the detailed critique below, Dr. Karlstrom delineates the processes of targeting and electronic assault that is currently ongoing in the United States of America, spawned by the bogus War on Terrorism run by scam artists in US/UK Mil/Intel, and explains his acronym, GOG’s New GESTAPO.

GestapoFrom his abstract:

“The fact that there is only about a 1 in 20 million probability of being killed in a terrorist attack, about the same chance as being killed by your TV set, should alert Americans that the ¨War on Terrorism¨ is entirely fraudulent. However, sustained government propaganda spewed by the mainstream media keeps Americans in perpetual fear and ignorance and keeps America stuck at ¨Yellow Alert¨ – defined as ¨Significant Risk¨ of terror attack accompanied by no specific information.

Meanwhile, civilians designated as ¨adversaries,¨ ¨enemies,¨ ¨dissidents,¨ and ¨potential terrorist threats¨ are being covertly surveilled, harassed, tortured, terrorized, and killed in civil-military operations here termed,
GOG´S NeW GESTAPO (for Global Organized Gang Stalking Neuro-Warfare Groups´ Electronic Slavery, Torture, and PsyOps Operations). Citizens are the new enemy in this ¨Fourth Generation¨ World War. GOG´S NeW GESTAPO, commonly termed ¨organized gang stalking,¨ appears to be a critical component of this covert ¨unconventional warfare¨ that pits military special forces, law enforcement, private contractors, local businesses, and civilians, indeed, society as a whole, against targeted individuals and groups, both at home and abroad. Just like the electronic weapons now being secretly tested on this unfortunate 0.1% (?) of the population, GOG´S NeW GESTAPO is a scalable, ¨rheostatic¨ weapons system. Presumably, it can be ¨tuned down,¨ as at present, to covertly ¨neutralize¨ ¨enemies¨ not ¨ideologically assimilated¨ and test its many electronic weapons systems, or it can be ¨tuned up¨ to genocide entire populations.”

Further in his critique, he writes:

“(Of course, there is no difference between terrorism and counter-terrorism. Strip away the jargon and the United States military-intelligence is conducting terrorism against its own citizens; killing them softly, so to speak, using PsyOp and NLW (nonlethal weapons). GOG´S NeW GESTAPO operations are conducted with the cooperation and support of local DHS fusion centers, local police, the private-corporate sector, local businesses, the legal community, the press, as well as many members of the academic, psychiatric and medical community, etc. (Their numbers are difficult to estimate, but let´s say that some 5,000 are involved.)”

Please note, this critique addresses, among others, the “ZioNazi” faction of the perpetrators behind this New World Order assault on American and global populations. While many readers may instinctively flinch at indicting powerful conspirators of such infamy deriving from Jewish sectors of the population (because yes, we all have Jewish friends whom we love and respect), for reasons of fear of the much-flung-around “anti-Semitic” and racist label, Dr. Karlstrom offers background for his critiques from Talmudic and Kabbalistic sources as well as from the work of other analysts and writers–as he delineates also which faction of pseudo or “crypto” Jews he is referring to. In the process of exploring and finding the truth of our reality in this country and in the world today, this writer believes it is important to examine all viewpoints, analyses, and opinions, to indict whoever is responsible–and not be fobbed off from deeper analysis by facile and deceitful blanketings of political correctness, in particular wrongful usage of “anti-Semitic” labels. In this context, the words of ex-Illuminati banker Ronald Barnard in his recent whistleblowing interview with Irma Schiffers of De Vrije Media TV comes to mind; he recommends reading The Protocols of the Elders of Zion, to understand the depths of the depravity of attacks on humanity currently ongoing, “to push through and read it in full”. While TIs are only a part of humanity targeted for these assaults, for anyone unclear on how “Targeted Individuals” are being tortured today, please read the two most recent articles on this site, on Electronic Slavery and the Electronic Telepathy Cybernetic Secret Society, also read Omni’s long list of Targeting Injustices Endured.

With much gratitude to Dr. Eric Karlstrom for this thoughtful and necessary analysis. Please visit his websites http://www.gangstalkingmindcontrolcults.com, http://911nwo.com/, http://www.naturalclimatechange.us/, http://www.waterwatchalliance.us/, http://www.erickarlstrom.com/ for more. 

– Ramola D |12 June, 2017

***

Four Estimates of the Size, Scope, Structure, Costs, and Personnel Requirements of ¨GOG´S NeW GESTAPO* (¨Global Organized Stalking Neuro-Warfare Groups´ Electronic Slavery, Torture, and PsyOp Operations¨)

Dr. Eric T. Karlstrom, Emeritus Professor of Geography, CSUS, June 5, 2017

Epigraph quotes:

National Security is the largest institution in the world and also the most corrupt institution in the world in the sheer volume of plunder of America´s financial assets.

Cushman Cunningham, ¨Neocons Unmasked,¨ 2015

The use of mind hacking the greatest people of influence in a culture can accelerate the desired change of the whole. The process of finding the people of greatest influence in an organization is called ¨influence mapping.¨

…..In order to increase S.A.T.A.N.´s (Silent Assassination Through Adaptive Networks) kill capacity using behavior modification techniques; England and the United States use human subjects chosen from every social group around the world to converge on the best kill ratio statistics.

…. the CIA and DoD are testing maximum pain and torture to death weapons on random people all around the globe.

Dr. Robert Duncan, ¨Project Soul Catcher: Secrets of Cyber and Cybernetic Warfare Revealed, Volume Two,¨ 2010

(Re: President Reagan´s ¨Star Wars¨ black budget programs in the 1980s) All the talk about death rays and charged particle beams has been little more than an elaborate smokescreen to hide the fact that the US is developing a directed energy weapon that uses a high-powered microwave pulse.

Brodeur (From ¨Neocons Unmasked¨)

Beginning with the enactment of the heavily intrusive Patriot Act (2001) and creation of the colossal bureaucracy of the Department of Homeland Security (2002), which was granted virtually unlimited police powers, America had taken a whole series of giant steps towards Absolute Rule, as in such communist countries as the USSR, Red China, North Korea and so on. The DHS alone constituted the largest federal expansion in more than 50 years, which literally took over the nation´s entire law enforcement apparatus in a treasonous move to nationalize U.S. police.

This new DHS monstrosity absorbed 22 massive government agencies, including Immigration and Naturalization, the Border Patrol, U.S. Customs, the Coast Guard, FEMA, and numerous others. It kicked off with no fewer than 177,000 personnel on board, and grows bigger, costlier and more threatening by the year….. We are speaking of the communization or Sovietization of America…. In all truthfulness, the Department of Homeland Security should be re-named the American KGB, American Gestapo, or the crypto-Judaic Department of Homeland Subjugation. Then at least people would have a better idea of where they stand.

…. Here is how one writer described the National Defense Authorization Act (NDAA) of 2012: ¨This is one of the most tragic events I have written about… the horrendous bill that would turn all of America into a battlefield and subject American citizens to indefinite military detention without charge or trial has passed the Senate.¨

Hugh Akins, 2012, ¨Synagogue Rising: A Catholic Worldview of Anti-Christian Judaism and Counterrevolutionary Resistance¨

Abstract

The American ¨National Security¨-¨Anti-Terrorism¨ Complex is an enormous and highly profitable enterprise involving most sectors of society. Indeed, it is now one of the main engines of the economy. It is characterized by enormous waste of resources and duplication of effort (Shorrock, 2008; Priest and Arkin, 2011). The domestic ¨War on Terror¨ and ¨Global War on Terror¨ utilize secret, silent electronic weapons that are one distinctive feature of the ¨Revolution in Military Affairs¨ and Fourth Generation (4G), asymmetric warfare which comprise U.S. military doctrine and which deploy large segments of the domestic population as irregular forces.

The fact that there is only about a 1 in 20 million probability of being killed in a terrorist attack, about the same chance as being killed by your TV set, should alert Americans that the ¨War on Terrorism¨ is entirely fraudulent. However, sustained government propaganda spewed by the mainstream media keeps Americans in perpetual fear and ignorance and keeps America stuck at ¨Yellow Alert¨ – defined as ¨Significant Risk¨ of terror attack accompanied by no specific information.

Meanwhile, civilians designated as ¨adversaries,¨ ¨enemies,¨ ¨dissidents,¨ and ¨potential terrorist threats¨ are being covertly surveilled, harassed, tortured, terrorized, and killed in civil-military operations here termed,
GOG´S NeW GESTAPO (for Global Organized Gang Stalking Neuro-Warfare Groups´ Electronic Slavery, Torture, and PsyOps Operations). Citizens are the new enemy in this ¨Fourth Generation¨ World War. GOG´S NeW GESTAPO, commonly termed ¨organized gang stalking,¨ appears to be a critical component of this covert ¨unconventional warfare¨ that pits military special forces, law enforcement, private contractors, local businesses, and civilians, indeed, society as a whole, against targeted individuals and groups, both at home and abroad. Just like the electronic weapons now being secretly tested on this unfortunate 0.1% (?) of the population, GOG´S NeW GESTAPO is a scalable, ¨rheostatic¨ weapons system. Presumably, it can be ¨tuned down,¨ as at present, to covertly ¨neutralize¨ ¨enemies¨ not ¨ideologically assimilated¨ and test its many electronic weapons systems, or it can be ¨tuned up¨ to genocide entire populations.

Because this covert human-disposal and mind control system is highly profitable for the many segments of society that comprise the National Security Establishment, it is now ¨business as usual.¨ In other ways, as is demonstrated below, there are significant parallels between the United States today under GOG´S NeW GESTAPO and the Soviet Union during and after the Bolshevik Revolution. Indeed, the same international financial and revolutionary elite that orchestrated the Bolshevik Revolution a century ago now controls the United States. GOG´S NeW GESTAPO is designed to ensure the implementation of the fascist New World Order aka ¨Jewish Utopia¨/Jewish World Empire under the complete control of Judeo-Masonic-Satanists. Obviously, this situation has dire implications for the United States and the world.

I. Introduction

The following is my first approximation description of how the Global Organized Stalking Program (here named GOG´S NeW GESTAPO for ¨Global Organized Gang Stalking Neural Warfare-Groups´ Electronic Slavery, Torture, and PsyOp Operations¨) may function in America and around the world. GOG´S NeW GESTAPO has multiple functions, many of which are classified. Fundamentally, it is a command, control, communications, and computer war-weapons system capable of targeting and ¨neutralizing¨ individuals and groups designated as¨enemies,¨ ¨dissidents,¨ ¨non-combatants,¨ and/or so-called ¨terrorists,¨ designations that may be applied to anyone anywhere in the world at any time. The millions of designated ¨enemies¨/¨terrorists¨ and other unlucky souls who are ¨Targeted Individuals¨ (TIs) of GOG´S NeW GESTAPO are also utilized as non-consensual experimentees for testing classified military and neuro-weaponry, torture techniques, etc. GOG´S NeW GESTAPO is scalable and can be used to implement Martial Law and/or genocide against civilian populations.

Similar top-secret programs have been running since the 1950s in the United States; for example, the FBI´s COINTELPRO and the CIA´s MKULTRA, MHCHAOS, the Phoenix Program, etc. GOG´S NeW GESTAPO integrates technologies and methodologies derived from CIA´s top-secret mind-control experiments (MKULTRA; 1950´s to present) with psychological operations (PsyOp developed at the Tavistock Institute and affiliated institutions), top-secret electronic weaponry (electronic warfare/directed energy weapons (DEW)/nonlethal weapons (NLW), Remote Neural Monitoring and Manipulation (RNM) technologies, nano-technologies, robotics, and supercomputers. The fact that these for-profit civil-military operations are carried out by virtually all sectors of society helps to bestow a (false) legitimacy upon them even as it diffuses the blame for its myriad crimes against humanity.
According to Bryan Tew (see Tew interview on this website), this program functions very much like a MacDonald´s franchise in that it can be replicated, adapted and adopted by different users, including governments, governmental agencies, international agencies (such as the UN and NATO), corporations (such as Infragard and DynCorps), and very rich individuals- and for a variety of purposes. Different versions of GOG´S NeW GESTAPO that are operated by different users share many of the same command and control structures, technologies, and to some extent, personnel.

Arbitrarily, we can refer to the U.S. Government (military-intelligence-corporate complex)-run program as ¨GOG´S NeW GESTAPO Version 1.0,¨ the Israeli-Jewish-Mossad-sayanim-ADL-AIPAC-Mason-Mormon-led program as ¨GOG´S NeW GESTAPO Version 666.0,¨ and the British-MI5-MI6-run program as GOG´S NeW GESTAPO Version 2.0, etc. The fact that Jewish-Israeli and British groups control U.S. military-intelligence through funding, infiltration, past coups, think tanks, lobbyists, etc., however, ensures that U.S. corporate-military-intelligence plays a large supporting role in all versions of ¨GOG´S NeW GESTAPO.¨

My research and that of others indicates that GOG´S NeW GESTAPO is:

1) part of the Israeli-American-British-Corporate Terror Machine cum New World Order Global Military-Intelligence-Police State (MIPS).

2) the modern continuation of the CIA´s top-secret MKULTRA mind control, brain mapping, and psychotronic-brain hacking and weapons testing program. Today, this system comprises a secret neuro-warfare weapons system that can be deployed anywhere, anytime, against any target. What is often termed ¨research¨ is more accurately described as non-consensual testing and/or ¨disposal¨ of civilian ¨adversaries.¨

3) a vital component of the National Security Establishment´s fraudulent, multi-trillion dollar/year ¨Global War on Terrorism.¨ The phony ¨War on Terror¨ has been and is being used as pretext to:

a) prosecute a series of pre-scripted wars in the Middle East whose chief beneficiaries are Israel and the international banking and corporate sector, (the ¨Corporatocracy).
b) destabilize an additional 134 sovereign nations using Fourth Generation Warfare (4GW, aka ¨Irregular Warfare¨) conducted by US SOCOM (Special Operations Forces).
c) target, torture, and terrorize individuals and groups at home and abroad who have been placed on terrorism watch lists and/or who are otherwise designated as internal or external enemies and/or test subjects.

4) coordinated and spear-headed globally by the CIA/NSA/DoD/DIA ¨cryptocracy¨ (¨rule by secrecy¨) and their corporate surrogates, and by the Department of Homeland Security and the FBI´s Joint Terrorism Task Force fusion centers in cooperation with the military, other federal agencies, corporate contractors, police, business, and civilian sectors of society.

5) part of the U.S. military´s ongoing implementation of their doctrine of Fourth Generation Warfare (4GW), also known as Unconventional Warfare/Irregular Warfare/Asymmetrical Warfare/Civil-Military Operations/Military Operations Other Than War/¨Peace Operations¨/Psychological Warfare/Political Warfare/Information Warfare/Low-Intensity Conflict/Effects-Based Operations/Network Centric Warfare. To these official military terms, I would add the terms; ¨neuro-warfare¨ and ¨non-consensual testing of military technologies on civilian subjects.¨ These covert war-by-other-means operations involve all branches of the U.S. military and specifically target individuals and groups designated as ¨potential terrorist threats,¨ ¨adversaries,¨ ¨non-combatants,¨ etc., as well as those selected for neuro-experimentation and/or weapons testing purposes.

6) based on the integration, coordination, and deployment of all sectors of the military with other federal agencies, police, private sector corporations, and large segments of the civilian population. Global organized stalking operations (GOG´S NeW GESTAPO) are carried out by ¨the Interagency¨ in America and by the ¨Multinational Force¨ in the rest of the world. In this manner, GOG´S NeW GESTAPO is a system designed to: a) diffuse blame and guilt amongst an unwieldy and disproportionately large segment of the civilian population and 2) create a new, growth sector of the economy that, in part, replaces the outmoded ¨war on communism.¨

7) dependent on the integrated use of high-tech stealth weapons, including directed energy weapons (DEW) aka ¨nonlethal weapons¨ (NLW), PsyOp (psychological operations), advanced GPS and GIS technology, remote neural manipulation/monitoring (RNM), computer-to-brain interface (CBI) and transcranial stimulation technology, nano-technology and robotics, and extremely advanced supercomputers. These operations are most effective when used in combination and when ¨TIs¨ and the community at large do not know that this targeting is occurring or understand the reasons for it.

8) a primary means by which government and private sector scientists conduct research and development of bio-nano-technology (smart dust) and bio-nano-robotics implants, etc. designed to control the human body and mind. TIs function as the human test subjects needed to test these weapons systems.

9) the modern version of earlier top-secret U.S. military, intelligence, and police programs that covertly targeted civilian ¨dissidents¨ and internal enemies. These include the FBI´s COINTELPRO (Counterintelligence Program, 1950s – 1970s), the CIA´s Phoenix and CHAOS programs in the late 60s, and the U.S. military´s Operation Garden Plot, Cable Splicer I, II, and III (1960s and 70s), and REX ´84 (1984 onward). Whereas COINTELPRO and CHAOS programs ¨neutralized¨/targeted domestic enemies, Garden Plot and Cable Splicer both targeted/¨neutralized¨ internal enemies and were preparations to impose Martial Law on the population as a whole. MKULTRA and related military and intelligence mind control programs developed techniques that can be used for a multiplicity of purposes, including the creation of assassins (Manchurian Candidates) and the neutralization of domestic enemies. (See my article: ¨Mind Control: History and Applications¨ on this website.)

These once top-secret programs are now well documented. Like GOG´S NeW GESTAPO, these previous programs targeted, neutralized, and killed American citizens ¨extra-judicially,¨ that is, illegally. The Phoenix Program, developed by the CIA and executed by the US military during the Vietnam War in the late 1960´s, was designed to ¨neutralize¨ (kill) the VCI (Viet Cong Infrastructure), that is, Vietnamese civilians thought to support the Viet Cong. This program was also secret but was partly exposed by the ¨My Lai Massacre¨ incident.
GOG´S NeW GESTAPO functions as a ¨global Phoenix Program¨ and also incorporates elements, techniques and methods developed and used by the East German Stasi police, the Soviet Cheka and KGB, the Nazi Gestapo, and similar ¨national security¨ forces in other totalitarian dictatorships.

10) is characterized by a series of protocols by which it can be recognized. These include:

a) The program is executed via coordination of numerous different agencies and personnel, termed the ¨Interagency¨ in the United States and the ¨Multinational Force¨ elsewhere in the world.
b) The use of Psychological Operations (PsyOp), including mind control and psychological destruction of targeted individuals and groups through use of coordinated ¨psy-acts¨and ¨psy-attacks¨ by ¨perps¨ (perpetrators), street theatre, gas lighting, workplace mobbing, etc.
c) Use of directed energy weapons (DEW; Electronic Warfare (EW)) for surveillance, attack, and monitoring. This includes remote neural manipulation and monitoring (RNM) and may involve implanted devices and computer-to-brain interface (CBI) technology used to control, monitor, modify, hinder, and manipulate the behavior of targeted individuals (TIs).
d) Use of implants, nano-technology, EEG ¨brain fingerprints,¨ and robotics.
e) Teams of professional psychologists (so-called ¨hive mind teams¨) work as subcontractors for the Pentagon/CIA/DIA/NSA and use supercomputers to ¨map¨ and control TI´s thoughts, perceptions, emotional, and nervous system responses, etc.
f) ¨Mercenary Stalking Cells¨ execute ¨psy-attacks¨ on TIs.
g) Use of ¨Satanic scripts¨ and/or the occult in various aspects of the program.

11) deemed by its developers to be an essential component of the fascist-totalitarian New World Order-One World Government-One World Religion system now being constructed.

12) perhaps the PRIMARY REASON why the NSA and other intelligence agencies go to extraordinary lengths to collect all manner of information and data about all aspects of everyone´s life.

13) unconstitutional, illegal, immoral, and criminal in all its aspects. The program degrades all who are involved in it. Even as it methodically and slowly tortures and physically and psychologically traumatizes its targets, it criminalizes, debases, and ¨satanizes¨ not only those who carry it out but also the portion of society that condones it.

14) a more accurate and descriptive term than ¨organized gang stalking¨ because it identifies the perpetrators, purposes, and high-tech weaponry utilized in this covert war system.
Targeting of individuals by GOG´S NeW GESTAPO results in their psychological and physical destruction (the East German term was ¨Zerzetzung¨ or ¨decomposition¨) through the covert and relentless application of hostile scripts (street theatre or ¨psy-attacks¨) and trauma-based ¨no-touch¨ torture via PsyOp, DEW, EW, and RMN. In combination, these ¨invisible¨ attacks result in the isolation and slow, soft, and silent murder of mind control victims (TIs). TIs typically die untimely deaths in these ¨terminal experiments.¨

Author, Gloria Naylor, wrote a brilliant fictionalized account of her first year of targeting in her book, ¨1996¨ (2005). She exposed many of the techniques and technologies deployed against her as well as the identities of her torturers. After some twenty years of sustained targeting, harassment, torture and physical and psychological trauma, Naylor died of heart failure (probably electronically-induced) in 2016. It is the opinion of this writer that over the 20-year period of her targeting, thousands of individuals were involved in her tracking, harassment, torture, terminal experimentation, and ultimately, murder. Estimates provided in this article suggest that many millions of perpetrators are involved in the systematic torture and murder of millions of other ¨TIs¨ worldwide in GOG´S NeW GESTAPO.

The U.S. Constitution and Declaration of Independence stipulate that government is servant to the people. All American politicians, soldiers and police swear an oath to protect and defend the U.S. Constitution. Government officials who treat American citizens as ¨the enemy¨ and who participate in the systematic torture and murder of their fellow citizens are guilty of the highest form of treason. In a nation governed by the rule of law, all criminal gang stalking ¨perpetraitors,¨ including the highest operatives responsible, would be tried, court marshalled, and punished for their complicity in these programs. Perhaps by restoring the rule of law, we can legally and now, legitimately, fill America´s 800+ FEMA internment camps with the criminal cabal now running the United States of America and their many minions. Otherwise, this covert ¨civil war¨ will result in genocide and/or the destruction of society.

The size and scope of GOG´S NeW GESTAPO is ample proof that America has been overthrown by enemies, both foreign and domestic. Using GOG´s NeW GESTAPO, these criminal elites (identified here as Judeo-Masonic-Satanist-psychopaths) will be empowered to overthrow any and all functioning governments, institutions, groups, and individuals.

Thus, I strongly disagree with the British Lord who stated:

¨Treason doth never prospereth. Why? Because if treason prospereth, none dare call it treason.¨

No. Treason, when discovered and proven, MUST be punished to the full extent of the law. While many participants in GOG´S NeW GESTAPO are merely ¨useful idiots¨ who have been duped into believing they are helping to fight ¨terrorism,¨ the architects and controllers of this system do understand the scope and nature of the horrors they are committing. These people have names and addresses. They are committing treason against the American people and the U.S. Constitution and crimes against humanity. It is imperative that we prosecute these psychopaths to the full extent of the law for their crimes against America, the American people, the U.S. Constitution, and humanity.

I. FOUR SCENARIO-SNAPSHOTS THAT ESTIMATE THE OPERATING PROCEDURES OF GLOBAL ORGANIZED GANG STALKING OPERATIONS (GOG´S NeW GESTAPO).

The complexity, size and scope of GOG´S NeW GESTAPO is mind-boggling. And yet this program is being conducted and even sanctioned by the majority of the population on the basis of lies, fraud, and financial incentives (bribery). GOG´S NeW GESTAPO apparently dwarfs previous top-secret U.S.G. programs such as the Manhattan Project, MKULTRA, CHAOS, COINTELPRO, Garden Plot, etc.

No doubt my scenarios will fall short of describing and encompassing the program in its entirety and my estimates of the number of people involved and costs of the program could be way off. Nonetheless, I offer these estimates as a first approximation and I welcome efforts by other researchers to help establish more accurate scenarios and numerical approximations.

Insights and information incorporated into the following scenarios is derived primarily from Rich (2011), Thomas (2011), Naylor (2005), a youtube interview with Bryan Tew (posted on this website), and my own research and experience.

II. Scenario-Snapshot #1: ¨Operation John Doe:¨ GOG´S GESTAPO (Version 1.0): The Targeting of An Innocent Civilian in ¨Smalltown,¨ USA

Scenario #1 begins with the local Terrorism Liaison Officer (TLO) of the Saguache County, Colorado police department, whose job is to collect and process all Suspicious Activity Reports (SARs) generated by local Neighborhood Watch and police/fire fighter/first responder volunteer groups in the county. One small town in Saguache County is Crestone/Baca, with a population of 1500.

In October, 2010, Neighborhood Watch member and Volunteer fireman, Fred Jones, submits a SAR to the TLO which states that a local resident, John Doe, was seen walking two unleashed dogs in the woods on U.S. Forest Service land. While no laws prohibit walking dogs without leashes on Forest Service land, Jones filled out an SAR, adding that one of Doe´s dogs was earlier seen chasing a deer in the Baca neighborhood. Jones reasoned that two unleashed dogs in the woods could create the potential threat that one or both dogs would again chase a deer.

Upon receiving the SAR, and spurred by the need to meet Department of Homeland Security ´potential terrorist activity´ quotas, the TLO forwards the SAR to the Colorado Department of Homeland Security (DHS) Fusion Liaison Officer (FLO), who, in turn, is a part of the larger Statewide Integrated Intelligence System (SIIS). At the Colorado DHS fusion center, teams of analysts, including both federal employees and private contractors, review the massive electronic NSA ¨data base¨ (metadata) to determine if Doe has been involved in other types of suspicious activity. The data base reveals that Doe attended several political protests over the past 30 years and authored several articles critical of U.S. government policy that are posted online. While his record includes several parking and speeding tickets, there is no evidence of any criminal activity. Nonetheless, Doe´s file is reviewed by fifteen analysts, each of whom make notations on the file regarding any and all potentially suspicious activities.

A brief conference (10 minutes) ensues at the Fusion Center in which the FLO and FBI, CIA, and Infragard intelligence officers determine that Doe is to be added to the DHS Terrorist Watch List. Doe is not informed of this meeting nor of the alleged offenses he is charged with. So it is not possible for him to defend himself in the proceedings, either by himself or through legal representation. Because he has no criminal record, Doe´s inclusion on the list is considered ¨extra-legal.¨ But DHS quotas have not been met, so the panel determines that Doe presents a ¨potential terrorist threat.¨ He is put on the ¨terrorism watch list¨ for surveillance for a five year period, after which time, his case is to be reviewed. A check mark placed next to Doe´s name indicates Presidential Directive (5240-1-R) is to be applied. This Directive stipulates that individuals under government surveillance may also be used as non-consensual test subjects. Thus, Doe is now enrolled as a test subject in multiple experimental programs, including measuring the bioeffects of DEW weapons and RNM (Remote Neural Monitoring and Remote Neural Manipulation) on human subjects. Doe´s targeting by the ¨Interagency¨ now begins.

As a result of this and other selection mechanisms, some 2 million Americans are on the DHS ¨Terrorism Watch List¨ and are designated as ¨TIs.¨ The list is classified due to ¨national security concerns.¨ Hence, these individuals are not informed they are on the list and that they are TIs. Nor can they find out. (We may multiply this number by a factor of 10 to estimate the number of TIs globally at 20 million.)

All four branches of the U.S. military and hundreds of private contracting agencies, typically headed by ex-CIA, ex-FBI, ex-NSA, and ex-DIA employees, have representatives at the nation´s 76+ fusion centers. Each name on the Terrorism Watch List is assigned to a particular service branch and a private contracting agency and/or ¨mind research¨ subcontractor. In Doe´s case, the ¨lead agencies¨ are the U.S. Air Force and Infragard, who will work collaboratively to manage his ¨stalking protocols.¨ ¨Hive Mind¨ (psychology) teams at Northern Arizona University will coordinate Doe´s ¨brain monitoring experiments,¨ including RNM, using state-of-the-art supercomputers, which some consider to be ¨conscious¨ ¨artificial life,¨ with their own intellect, will, and emotions. Doe´s case, like all cases, is also referred to US SOCOM (US Special Operations Command).

Doe is now the target of a full-scale civil-military operation termed ¨Operation John Doe.¨ He will be tracked and surveilled 24/7 and will become the target of countless scripted ¨set-ups¨/scripts/hostile ¨psy-acts¨ and ¨psy-attacks¨ designed to create a perpetually hostile atmosphere and to force him to make responses that will be measured in real time and downloaded onto the supercomputer. Eventually, all these responses will be digitally correlated to form a digital simulation of Doe´s ¨soul¨ and ¨personality.¨ I.e., his will, intellect, and emotions will be mapped, replicated, and captured by the supercomputer.

During Doe´s first three years of targeting, he is not aware that all aspects of his life are being covertly surveilled, studied, and recorded, and that he is being profiled by teams of military, academic, and private sector psychologists/psychiatrists. These teams are termed PsyOp Task Forces, Tactical PsyOp Teams, Tactical PsyOp Detachments, Psychological Operations Groups, Tactical Product Detachments, PsyOp Assessment Teams, and academic ¨Hive Mind Teams,¨ etc.

Three years into ¨Operation John Doe,¨ the US Air Force and Infragard´s PsyOp teams have devised a strategy of stalking tactics designed specifically for Doe that will deliver painful ¨messages¨ to him via street theatre, gas lighting, workplace mobbing, etc. Doe´s friends, family, and co-workers are also targeted to receive negative messages (via defamation, concocted rumors, etc.) about Doe. These are messages, termed ¨products,¨ are designed to separate Doe from his entire support structure so that he will isolate himself and therefore be easier to monitor and manipulate. The leader of academic ¨hive mind team¨ is the ¨clone¨ (a psychiatrist or psychologist who injects his thoughts directly into Doe´s brain via transcranial stimulation, v2k (voice to skull synthetic telepathy), etc. This is accomplished via supercomputer, which sends a steady stream of electromagnetic energy which is relayed to Doe´s brain via towers, satellites and mobile platforms. A carrier frequency, specifically tuned to Doe´s unique EEG (electro-encephalogram) ¨brainprint¨ and incorporated into the supercomputer´s electromagnetic energy signal, sends the clones´ thoughts directly to Doe´s brain.

¨Psy-attacks¨ and ¨psy-acts¨ devised by the PsyOp teams are carried out by legions of ¨street perps.¨ Again, their purpose is to create a perpetually hostile environment for Doe in order to degrade and destroy all aspects of his/her life and break his/her will to resist, as per standard Psychological Warfare and Army Field Manual procedures. In combination, the PsyOp, directed energy attacks, and RNM are designed to eventually cause Doe to psychologically shut down, become dysfunctional in society, kill himself, and/or commit violent or insane acts that will result in his incarceration or being committed to a mental institution. Stated purpose of these civil-military operations is to ¨degrade, debase, deny, destroy, decompose,¨ etc. all aspects of the target´s life. This objective is facilitated by controlling ALL the channels of communication in Doe´s life (including all personal contacts, phone and email messages, and even internal thoughts via RNM).

The head psychologist of the TPOT (Tactical PsyOp Team) shares the teams´ assessments and recommended tactical strategies with the local field commander of the C4ISR ¨war room.¨ C4ISR stands for Command, Control, Communications, Computer, Intelligence, Surveillance, Reconaissance. The C4ISR which may be stationary, mobile, or virtual-digital. The commander implements the battle plan using his capability to continually locate the target through a) input from ¨spotters¨ on the ground, b) signals emitted from the target´s cell phones, c) implanted devices in the target´s/perp´s bodies, and/or d) satellite recognition of the TI´s EEG ¨brain fingerprint.¨ The commander´s C4ISR work station utilizes advanced GIS (Geographic Information Systems) technology in combination with satellite based GIG (Geographic Information Grid) information to continually update digital maps that show the locations of all TIs and perps in the ¨battlespace¨ in real time. Using these computer-generated maps and his computer-communications radio, the commander has the ability to coordinate all ¨psy-attacks¨ using available personnel (¨perpetrators¨).

…. After three years of experiencing bizarre and invariably hostile and/or unpleasant incidents (¨psy-attacks¨) carried out by thousands of strangers (the ¨perps¨), Doe realizes that he is being systematically tracked and harassed. In PsyOp lingo, he has become ¨sensitized¨ to stimuli devised and presented to him by GOG´S NeW GESTAPO.
All six phases of the GOG´S NeW GESTAPO system have now been activated against him: 1) selection, 2) surveillance, 3) defamation, 4) stalking, 5) electronic attack, and 6) monitoring.

Doe´s targeting, like that of all TIs, is executed by individuals who are organized in a military-style, hierarchical command structure that involves the coordination of numerous sectors of society, including civilian, police, local business, and military personnel.

In this scenario, it is estimated that ¨Operation John Doe¨ involves the following personnel components:

1) Twenty-five military and civilian personnel blanket Doe´s small community with 2R (¨receive and repeat¨) false rumors such as ¨Doe is a pedophile, has been incarcerated for numerous sex offenses with children,¨ or is a ¨white supremacist,¨ etc.). This is the defamation phase of targeting. The ratio of “2R¨ false-rumor specialists to TIs in the ¨battlespace¨ is about 2 to 1.

2) Two hundred ¨surveillance role players¨ (aka ¨perps¨) are each equipped with i-phone or i-pad apps that permit quick recognition of the target via photos as well as direct communication with the C4ISR commander. Perps assume the various roles of ¨spotter,¨ ¨data collector,¨ ¨actor,¨ ¨drive-by or walk-by perp,¨etc. Because Crestone/Baca has a small population (1500), perps are recruited from other areas and imported into the neighborhood to carry out these operations. There are currently 15 TIs in Crestone/Baca; these ¨perps¨ are on call to execute ¨psy-acts¨ against all of these targets. The ratio of ¨psy-actor¨ perps to TIs is about 13 to 1.

3) In order to maintain 24/7 coverage, 3 C4ISR commanders and 3 ¨Hive Mind¨ Team leaders (aka ¨clones¨) work 8 hour shifts and pass off their target/victims to other teams. Commanders X, Y, and Z are Air Force officers and they coordinate all activities in real time through computer link-ups with the Geographic Information Grid (GIG). Again, the commanders can ¨see¨ the locations of all ¨nodes¨ (TIs and perps in the area) via computer-generated GIS (Geographic Information Systems) maps that integrates data from the satellite-based Geographic Information Grid (GIG). The GIG tracks Tis and perps through their cell phone signals, their physical or nano-tech implants, and/or their EEG ¨brain fingerprints,¨ and local spotters (¨perps¨) reports. In this manner, commanders coordinate various attack-message-delivery strategies for TI Doe. The same information is shared with ¨Hive Mind¨ Team leaders whose neuro-warfare (RNM) programs are also coordinated by military commanders.

4) Over the next three year period, Commanders X, Y, and Z, the three Hive Mind Teams, comprised of of 3 or 4 individuals, as coupled with the (¨conscious?¨) supercomputer, record all operational events (attacks, responses to those attacks, etc.) against the TIs in Crestone/Baca. During each event, the commander maintains direct contact with as many ¨nodes¨ as possible in order to adjust to real-time TI responses in the field. In this manner, the C4ISR commander can change orders to street perps as he deems necessary to maximize the effectiveness of the operation. Details of these operations are recorded in real-time on computer hard drive and can be analyzed subsequently in the state fusion center, Washington DC fusion centers, FBI JTTF centers, and at the Utah data base center. Again, ¨psy-acts¨(PsyOp) are designed to create a continually hostile environment that will drive the TIs into solitude, fear, apprehension, etc. in order to effect trauma-based mind control-RNM programs on the victims.

The fifteen TIs in Crestone/Baca are in different phases of the targeting protocols. Currently, 50% of the Tis are only being physically stalked and 50% are being stalked and attacked via electronic weapons. Half of the latter group are test subjects for the calibration and tuning of the various directed energy weapons (DEW) systems and for the monitoring of their biological responses (bioeffects) to DEW attacks. The other half of this second subgroup of Targets are subjects whose brains are being mapped, manipulated, and monitored by remote neural monitoring-brain-to-computer interface technologies. Real-time recordings of their neurological, emotional, and nervous system responses to the various attacks is sent to research laboratories at some 114 participating universities throughout the United States and 100 cooperating corporations. Estimates for the number of personnel involved in the RNM research aspects of Operation John Doe is 400, including researchers and their support staff.

5) John Doe travelled extensively, in part, to escape the harassment he experienced in Crestone/Baca…. However, GOG´S NeW GESTAPO allows for this, and as Doe travels and when he arrives in new places, his case is ¨handed off¨ to local C4ISR commanders and perp networks. His location is continuously monitored and tracked via GIG and his targeting continues in the areas he travels to. In remote areas, where there is a paucity of perpetrators to call on, GOG´S NeW GESTAPO must temporarily suspend operations. However, as the system is refined and developed, these problems are rectified.

Progress Report on Operation John Doe:

After 20 years of sustained targeting harassment, and mind/brain/nervous system testing, mapping, manipulation, and torture, Doe has lost his friends, family, and livelihood. He dies of electronically-induced heart failure… some 20 years before he would have otherwise.

Doe´s assets are then seized by the legal branch of GOG´S GESTAPO to be included in black budget slush funds to continue the program. Five lawyers and 20 support staff are involved in sequestering Doe´s assets.
From the military viewpoint, Operation John Doe was a success. John Doe, ¨potential terrorist threat¨ and ¨adversary,¨ has been neutralized. The military U.S. Air Force now moves Doe from the ¨active Operation¨ column to the ¨successful kill¨ column. Such military successes help guarantee future military funding.

Scientific aspects of the Operation, however, were only partly successful. Whereas testing the bio-effects of DEW yielded important and positive results. In addition, nano-technology, nano-robotics experiments on Doe´s body and mind also yielded positive results. However, Doe´s mind, will, and emotions (collectively, the ¨soul¨) were not completely mapped and replicated via supercomputer. This is because Doe spent much of his time was spent ¨off Grid,¨ so to speak, hiking in the woods, listening to music, taking unscheduled trips, multi-tasking, and engaging in un-pre-planned (spontaneous) activities, etc. The ¨psy-attacks¨ failed to drive Doe into complete isolation and Doe was able to repeatedly break the electromagnetic connection between the ¨clone,¨ the supercomputer, and his brain. Hence, the scientific teams will need to acquire other subjects to complete their brain mapping-monitoring weapon system.

Government analysts and accountants at the General Accounting Office (GAO) justify the expenditures for the operation on the basis of the fact that although Doe´s 20-year targeting operation cost $40 million ($2 million/year), the government saved about $20 thousand in uncollected social security benefits.
Total expenditures and personnel involved in Operation John Doe:

Total costs of John Doe´s targeting and RNM experimentation include $40 million, or $2 million/year. Extrapolating to the U.S. as a whole (multiplying by 3 million), we can estimate the cost GOG´S NeW GESTAPO at $6 trillion/year, which seems much too high. If we divide this figure by 15 (the number of TIs in Crestone/Baca handled by the same personnel, we derive the slightly more reasonable figure of $400 billion per year.
Assuming the various personnel teams continue working for the entire 20 years of Doe´s targeting (a very conservative estimate), 732 personnel were actively involved in Operation John Doe. However, as these individuals could also track and process the other 14 TIs in Crestone/Baca, this number is reduced by dividing by 15, yielding 49 perps to one TI. Scaling this number up to cover the personnel requirements to handle all 3,000,000 American TIs, we arrive at the figure of 9.8 million perpetrators.

However, because Doe travelled more than most TIs, we can estimate that the cost of his targeting, in dollars and in personnel were several times higher than they otherwise would have been. In this scenario, we discount these unusual factors.

III. Scenario-Snapshot #2: ¨Operation Jane Doe:¨ ¨GOG´S NeW GESTAPO (Version 666.0)¨ In Cleveland, Ohio

Again, GOG´S NeW GESTAPO is a system that can be replicated and adopted by different governments, agencies, groups, and individuals. This second scenario features GOG´S NeW GESTAPO Version 666.0 as is run mainly by Israel, the Israeli Mossad, Jewish lobby groups such as the ADL and AIPAC, Jewish ¨sayanim¨ (secret agents), businesses, etc.
Version 666 here refers to Biblical prophecy, for this is the number of the Antichrist, who is also identified as GOG. (See Part X below for an explanation for the use of this term). Jewish groups have perhaps the greatest means, motive, and opportunity to carry out GOG´S NeW GESTAPO, for the New World Order being created is, in fact, the Jewish Utopia/Universal Jewish Empire that has long been sought by the leadership of this tribal-religious group. (This is well documented on this website under the subheading, ¨The Controllers¨).

A few statements from Akins (2012) should suffice to make this point:

1) ¨Citing remarks by Senator Jack Tenney, Congressman Rarick continued exposing the ADL (Anti-Defamation League) for what it is: ¨The ADL has become the world´s most powerful Gestapo; the brain center of a vast spy network and the intelligence unit of a myriad of Jewish organizations. Their secret agents spy on American citizens. Extensive files and dossiers are compoled on those whom they dislike…. Throughout their multitudinous controls of the media…. They are capable of destroying reputations and silencing all rebuttal. Our imagination is staggered by its apparent control of the avenues of communication. (Congressman John Rarick, ¨The ADL Gestapo,¨ U.S. Congressional Record, 1971.)

2) The Israeli lobby has been described as ¨beyond dangerous¨ (Ambassador Edward Peck, in ¨Spy Trade: How Israel´s Lobby Undermines America´s Economy (2008)). This lobby is unlike any other. It has no equal in all of Washington, probabl no equal in the entire world. Not only is it the most powerful of lobbies; it is ¨above the law. The lobby´s illegal and sometimes treasonous behavior…. (is) only possible because of their ability to corrupt U.S. politics at every level of government.¨ (Michael Scheuer, Forward to Grant Smith´s ¨Spy Trade¨).

3) Former Congressman James Traficant of Ohio is well versed on the AIPAC-Israel control of America. AIPAC (America-Israel Political Action Committee), he says, is ¨the single most powerful lobby in the world. So powerful that Washington politicians carefully weigh each and every vote they cast based on the approval of this lobby. Yes, a foreign lobby has that much clout, power and control over American leaders and thus, the American people. AIPAC has become so overpowering that they have risen above government investigations and mainstream media scrutiny. So powerful that the following statement was NEVER reported in America´s newspapers, magazines, or electronic media:

4) (Then Israel Prime Minister, Ariel Sharon, stated, regarding 9/11): ¨Every time we do something you tell me that America will do this and America will do that. I want to tell you something very clear: don´t worry about American pressure on Israel. We, the Jewish people, control America, and the Americans know it.¨
These short quotes should suffice to make the point. Israel and World Jewry control America. Oh, and they worship Satan! And their goal is to conquer the world for their master, the Holy Serpent (Marrs, 2016). That said, let´s visit our second scenario:

Jane Doe was born in the Washington, DC area in 1962 and was ¨enrolled¨ as an experimentee in the CIA´s MKULTRA program at 2 years of age. She was selected based on the fact that her father was in military-intelligence in the U.S. Army and was a Freemason. As recompense, her parents were awarded $50,000 and her father´s career was ¨expedited¨/¨fast-tracked.¨ (Many hundreds of thousands of other MKULTRA (and related mind control programs) experimentees are still alive and are typically selected for inclusion in GOG´S NeW GESTAPO programs. Hundreds of thousands of MKULTRA victims have died prematurely as a result of the torture/trauma-based mind control programming they were subjected to as children.)

As an MKULTRA victim and experimentee, Jane Doe was shuttled to a cooperating hospital in the Washington, D.C. area three or four times a week when she was a child between the ages of 2 and 6. Her trauma-based mind control programming involved physical rape and other forms of torture. As intended, the trauma programming caused Multiple Personality Disorder (MPD, today referred to as Dissociative Identity Disorder, or DID). Jane´s 150+ sub-alter personalities were assigned names and skills as per standard MKULTRA procedures. Amnesia barriers placed between the sub-alter personalities remained in place throughout her adult life, so Jane never realized that she was an MKULTRA victim/experimentee. Her programming allowed her handlers to use ¨triggers¨ (words, colors, sounds, etc.) that would cause Jane to ¨switch¨ from her core personality to any one of her 150+ sub-alter personalities. This was also accomplished using RHIC-EDOM (Radio Hypnotic Intra-Cerebral Control and Electronic Dissolution of Memory) and other techniques. In this way, Jane Doe, the autonomous human being, was converted into Jane Doe, the weapons platform for U.S. military-intelligence.

However, Jane was dis-enrolled from MKULTRA at the age of 13 for various reasons. The Church Senate Committee hearings were then in the process of exposing a multitude of illegal CIA operations, including MKULTRA, and MKULTRA projects were commensurately scaled back at that time. Thereafter, Jane was allowed to live a fairly normal life; and became a wife, mother, and legal assistant. She divorced at age 39 and remained single thereafter.
Jane Doe was placed in GOG´S NeW GESTAPO (Remote Neural Monitoring and Manipulation Section) in 2002, immediately after passage of the USA Patriot Act. The CIA ¨handed her case off¨ to Mossad, Israel´s top spy agency, as per routine intelligence agency policies. Since the 2002 initiation of Operation Jane Doe, Jane has been the victim/target of ongoing stalking, harassment, physical and psychological torture via PsyOp and DEW, and RNM experimentation and manipulation conducted by GOG´S NeW GESTAPO Version 666.

In this scenario, as Naylor´s book, ¨1996¨ (2005) aptly portrays the gang stalking operations being used against her as been controlled primarily by Jews. GOG´S New GESTAPO Version 666, then, is under the direct control of the elite global power structure that rules America and the world through finance. The ¨King of the Jews,¨ in this regard, has long been the Rothschild Dynasty. This explains why GOG´S NeW GESTAPO is a primarily Jewish operation.

In GOG´S NeW GESTAPO Version 666.0, perps include mostly Jews and their extensive networks of ¨sayanim¨ (Jewish secret agents), and other aspects of the program are carried out by the ADL and AIPAC, Mossad, Jewish psychologists, and rank-and-file Jews hoping to receive their ¨portion of the world to come,¨ the Jewish Utopia. Innumerable Jewish-front groups, including Masons, Satanists, Mormons, Jehovah´s Witnesses, New Age cults, and innumerable Jewish-owned corporate subcontractors and private mercenary stalking cells, are also involved.

While GOG´S NeW GESTAPO Version 666.0 is capable of operating completely independently from other versions such as GOG´S NeW GESTAPO Version 1.0, the same command and control structure, weapons, and advanced technologies are employed in each version. In practice, the Jewish-Masonic-run version 666 of GOG´S NeW GESTAPO shares about 50% of personnel and 90% war and neuro-weapons technologies with the U.S. Government (military-intelligence)-run program, ¨GOG´S NeW GESTAPO Version 1.0.¨ These overlapping and complex relationships are managed via supercomputer. However, because Jewish groups control U.S. military-intelligence-corporate sectors, U.S. military-intelligence plays a supporting role in ¨GOG´S NeW GESTAPO Version 666.¨

Generally speaking, the U.S. government and Pentagon-CIA black budget funds cover expenses of most versions of GOG´S NeW GESTAPO and the costs of the various different versions is about the same.

Progress Report on Operation Jane Doe:

Because Jane lived in a much larger city (Cleveland, Ohio) than John Doe (Crestone/Baca, Colorado), she was unable to escape the continual stalking, harassment, humiliation and torture inflicted by mercenary stalking cells as well as the continuous brain entrainment (termed ¨brain entertainment¨ by the Hive Mind Teams) carried out by GOG´S NeW GESTAPO Version 666.

Thus, Operation Jane Doe was a complete success, from the target neutralization, military weapon´s testing, and mind-science experiment aspects of the program. This success is characterized as follows:

1) ¨Influence mapping¨ and PsyOp-DEW targeting of Jane´s immediate family and friends caused her to become completely estranged from her son and two daughters and her entire support system.

2) As a result of sustained harassment, humiliation, etc., Jane retreated to the complete isolation of her home, where her electronic trauma, pain, and RMN were incrementally increased until she experienced both physical and psychological breakdowns.

3) She was diagnosed with ¨delusional disorder¨ and schizophrenia¨ and committed to a psychiatric hospital in June, 2016, where she committed suicide in May, 2017.

4) Suicide resolved the ¨disposal¨ problem of a former MKULTRA test subject.

5) Jane´s targeting yielded useful measures of the bio-effects of extreme pain from several different directed energy weapons systems.

6) Jane´s will, intellect, and emotions (collectively, the ¨soul¨) were successfully mapped, digitally simulated, and downloaded onto the supercomputer.

7) Jewish operators of GOG´S NeW GESTAPO Version 666: Operation Jane Doe threw an office party in which they consumed several bottles of champaign in celebration of Jane Doe´s suicide.

IV. Scenario-Snapshot #3: GOG´S NeW GESTAPO Version 1.0 in Hobokan, USA

We can get another glimpse of the structure and functioning of GOG´S NeW GESTAPO, by examining its operations in the city of Hobokan; population, one million people. Scenario-Snapshot 3 estimates the personnel structure and costs required to manage all GOG´S NeW GESTAPO operations in this average American city.

As in Scenarios 1 and 2, domestic enemy, ¨potential terrorist threats,¨ TIs, and mind control victims are selected at America´s 76+ DHS fusion centers by individuals such as the Terrorism Liaison Officers (TLO), Fusion Liaison Officers (FLO), and FBI Terrorist Task Force personnel. Selections are made based on CIA criteria, information supplied by NSA metadata, and SAR reports submitted by local police, citizen-vigilante groups, etc.

Again, we accept journalist George Webb´s assertion that about 2 million Americans are on the Terrorism Watch List. However, if we arbitrarily ¨round this number up¨ slightly to 3 million, we will have about 3 million TIs, which amounts to about one percent of the American population being targeted by GOG´S NeW GESTAPO.

Extrapolating, we can estimate that one in a thousand Hobokan residents, or 1000 civilians, are ¨Targeted Individuals.¨ Again, using a ratio of 3 commanders for every 25 TIs, some 120 military ¨field commanders¨ are required to operate the C4ISR command and control stationary, mobile, or virtual ¨war rooms¨ in Hobokan. Military personnel from the four main military branches and/or US SOCOM coordinate the organized stalking, street theatre, mobbing, ¨psy-attacks,¨etc. as well as the electronic surveillance, attacks, ands monitoring, etc. Again, commanders manage about 25 targets and all available ¨perps¨ (perpetrators) and ¨mercenary stalking cells¨ from their mobile ¨war rooms,¨ the C4ISR stations. Perps include full-time and part-time professionals, volunteers, cultists, covens, ex-criminals, criminals, ex-drug addicts and alcoholics and drug addicts and alcoholics, etc. These individuals and cells comprise the ¨nodes¨ on the C4ISR computer screens deployed by the field commanders. Again, street ¨perps¨ are commanded and coordinated through their cell phone apps and ipads and possibly by other mechanisms of communication such as mind control via RHIC (Radio Hypnotic Intra-Cerebral Control) or other methods.

About 40 Tactical Psyop Teams, each comprised of 12 military and civilian professionals, profile and develop ¨psy-attack¨ and ¨psy-act¨ strategies that involve ¨delivery¨ of ¨messages¨ and ¨triggers¨ to the ¨targets.¨ Again, each team of 12 is responsible for about 25 TIs. (Total personnel: 300 psychologists). On-the-ground operatives, both military and civilian, prepare the ¨battlespace¨ (your city) so that the devised messages can be easily transmitted to the TIs. (Reflecting a 2:1 ratio, this adds up to 2000 ¨battlespace preparers¨ in Hobokan.) And again, teams of military-civilian 2R (¨receive and repeat¨) specialists spread fabricated, derogatory rumors about the TIs amongst the neighbors, friends, and family of the TIs in order to defame, discredit, and isolate the TIs. Since there is 2 to 1 ratio of ¨2R¨ specialists to TIs, there are 2000 ¨2R¨ specialists in Hobokan. Personnel described thus far include military-intelligence, subcontractors, and civilians.

Then, assuming there is about a 50:1 ratio of street perps to TIs, as in Scenario 1, there are perhaps 50,000 active street perps from the civilian sector who are utilized to carry out the ¨psy-acts¨ and ¨psy-attacks.¨ This group includes Neighborhood Watch volunteers, ex-military and police-vigilante-volunteers, full time and part time government employees, employees of private contractors such as Infragard, and innumerable ¨mercenary¨ and ¨non-mercenary¨ stalking cells comprised of satanists, covens, occultists, members of religious groups, cults, criminals and ex-criminals, the underemployed, etc.

Again, the commanders use real-time computer radios and satellite information from the geographical information grid (GIG) to maintain TIs´ locations at all times on their C4ISR computer screens. They coordinate the actions of street perps in like manner to execute the psychological operations. Again, individual operations are specifically designed for each TI, based on his/her unique psychological characteristics, in such a way as to create a perpetually hostile environment and to ¨break the TI´s will to resist. The TI is the designated enemy in this is ¨war by other means.¨

In order to maintain ¨full-spectrum dominance¨ of the entire planet, the U.S. military must be ready and able to conduct all types of warfare, anywhere and anytime. Indeed, since most nations of the world are already conquered through military and/or restrictive economic measures, it is essential now, in order to maintain present levels of military spending, to expand the ¨battlespace¨ to the entire world, and to redefine the ¨enemy¨ to include individuals and groups anywhere in the world. Without enemies, of course, enormous military expenditures cannot be sustained.

So in¨4G¨ ¨asymmetrical war,¨ the military has found a way to create perpetual enemies and defeat them. The formula is tried and true and was perfected during the Phoenix Program in Vietnam in the late 1960s, for example. First, individuals or groups are designated as enemies, ¨terrorists,¨ etc. by intelligence agencies, and then the military attacks them. If the enemies don´t surrender, the military continues by attacking using¨ counter-terrorism¨ (aka ¨counter-insurgency¨) measures.

(Of course, there is no difference between terrorism and counter-terrorism. Strip away the jargon and the United States military-intelligence is conducting terrorism against its own citizens; killing them softly, so to speak, using PsyOp and NLW (nonlethal weapons). GOG´S NeW GESTAPO operations are conducted with the cooperation and support of local DHS fusion centers, local police, the private-corporate sector, local businesses, the legal community, the press, as well as many members of the academic, psychiatric and medical community, etc. (Their numbers are difficult to estimate, but let´s say that some 5,000 are involved.)

Field commanders coordinate the collection and dissemination of experimental ¨neurological¨ data on the emotional states, thoughts, etc. of the TI´s as well as their physiological and psychological responses to electronic attacks from directed energy weapons (DEW). DEW include microwave, radiofrequency, millimeter wave, acoustic, and lasers as well as brain manipulations using remote neural manipulation (RNM), etc. These mind control programs add several additional layers of (academic and corporate) personnel, including both researchers and their support staff. Assuming a ratio of 25 researchers and support staff to each TI, we here estimate that 25,000 individuals associated with academic and corporate research projects are associated with GOG´S GESTAPO in Hoboken.
Operation Hobokan:

In sum, in order to execute this invisible, top-secret program designed to: 1) discredit-defame-neutralize and/or 2) hack into and reconfigure the brains of about 1000 TIs designated as ¨adversaries,¨ ¨terrorists,¨ non-combatants,¨ etc. in the city of Hobokan:

1) Approximately 84,300 individuals have been enlisted, coordinated, and deployed. Extrapolating to the United States as a whole, we multiply by 300 and derive an estimate of 25.3 million citizen-spy perps.

2) Additionally, we have created a covert citizen-military army of over 15 million secret soldiers in the process. This secret army can be deployed in the future to put down any possible insurrections.

3) Total costs of targeting of the 1,000 Hoboken ¨civilian enemies¨ (TIs) is here estimated at between $200 million and $2 billion. If we extrapolate these costs to America as a whole (multiply these figures by 300), we get between $60 and $600 billion.

Recall that under the East German Stasi (Secret Police) regime, one in 6 civilians were enlisted as citizen spies to help maintain ¨national security.¨ And recall also that a 2003 Boston Globe story reported that DHS hopes to enlist 1 in 3 Americans as citizen spy-collaborators in order to ¨protect the homeland.¨ That would amount to over 100 million citizen spies in America.

Priest and Arkin (2011) document that the ¨New American Security State¨ is characterized by incredible duplication of effort and waste of money. Thus, it is possible that my figures, as outrageous as they seem, may actually radically UNDERESTIMATE the number of people involved and the amount of money spent on GOG´S NeW GESTAPO.

As caveat, many, perhaps most, individual ¨perps¨ involved may not understand the true scope and purposes of GOG´S NeW GESTAPO. With the exception of satanic groups that may relish inflicting pain on others, most ¨perps¨ are probably simply ¨useful idiots¨ who have been coopted by lies and financial incentives and/or are just ¨following orders.¨

V. Scenario-Snapshot #4: GOG´S NeW GESTAPO Versions 1.0 through … in America and the World

To recap, the following sectors of society formulate and implement GOG´S NeW GESTAPO, these ¨Global Organized Gang Stalking Neuro Warfare-Groups´ Electronic Surveillance, Torture, and PsyOp Operations:¨

1. Think tanks such as CFR (Council on Foreign Relations) and RAND Corporation generally set the policies that are to be implemented by military and intelligence agencies in cooperation with the three official branches of government. These think tanks essentially serve the international financial and corporate sector, led by the Rothschild Dynasty. (The estimated fraction of total think tank personnel devoted to GOG´S NeW GESTAPO = 5%. Total personnel = 10,000; human resources devoted to GOG´S NeW GESTAPO = 500. Total expenditures guesstimated at $3 billion/year with expenditures devoted to GOG´S NeW GESTAPO estimated at $150 million.

2. The CIA/NSA/FBI/DIA/DHS/Mossad/MI6/MI5 (collectively known as the ¨cryptocracy¨ or ¨rule by secrecy¨) work cooperatively and in secret to develop and implement GOG´S NeW GESTAPO. They set the criteria for the selection of the individuals and groups that will be targeted. In terms of the yearly budget and number of personnel in these groups devoted to projects directly or indirectly related to GOG´S NeW GESTAPO, these can be estimated at hundreds of billions of dollars+ (for example, $200 billion/year) and 4 million persons.

3. DHS alone has over one quarter million employees and a budget of $60 billion/year. A 2003 article in the Boston Globe stated that DHS hopes to enlist 100 million American civilians, or nearly a third of the U.S. population, as ¨citizen-spies¨. In terms of personnel and budget, NSA may have the highest numbers of all. Percentage of man-hours devoted to GOG´S NeW GESTAPO = 2%. Percentage of total budget devoted to GOG´S NeW GESTAPO = $2 billion. Personnel devoted to GOG´S GESTAPO = 2% of 4,000,000 = 20,000.

4. Military/US SOCOM Personnel: Military and Special Operations Forces personnel include:

a) C4ISR Field Commanders,
b) Tactical PsyOp Team, PsyOp Task Force, Psychological Operations Group, PsyOp organizations, Tactical PsyOp Detachments, PsyOp Assessment Teams, Tactical Product Development Detachment,
c) US SOCOM teams
d) Electronic Warfare technicians (microwave, acoustic, laser, millimeter wave, radar, satellite, etc.)
e) Global Information Grid technical support teams, corporate and military
The number of military personnel involved is here conservatively estimated at 5 million worldwide. Yearly expenditures are estimated at $50 billion (although again, much of this funding may derive from off-books ¨black-budget¨ sources.

5. Private Contractors: Shorrock (2008) estimates that some 50 to 70% of military-intelligence work, including, of course, research and development of high tech weapons systems and actual implementation of GOG´S NeW GESTAPO, is now carried out by many 100s, even thousands, of private subcontractors. Some of the most prominent of these include Raytheon, Northrup Grumman, Bechtel, SAIC, BAE Systems, ManTech International, General Dynamics, Booz Allen Hamilton, The Analysis Corporation (TAC), Westinghouse Electric, Kama Corporation, Ashland Oil, RAND Corporation, Kellogg Brown & Root (KBR), Halliburton, Lockheed Martin, Boeing, the Defense Logistics Agency, SI International, MTC Technologies, Inc., CACI, Blackwater, Titan, Essex Corporation, Armed Forces Communications Electronics Association (AFCEA), AT&T, Global Crossing, UUNet, and E-Systems.

We can guesstimate the number of individuals directly or indirectly involved with this program at well over 5 million. And the yearly budget may be estimated at approximately 1/5 of the annual military budget of $800 billion…. or $160 billion/year. (Although, presumably much of the program is paid through the off-books ¨black budget¨ and many of the programs serve multiple purposes.)

6. University ¨Scientific¨ Research: The CIA´s MKULTRA mind control project had 149 sub-projects and thousands of actual programs. This current version is the continuation of MKULTRA and is termed GOG´S NeW GESTAPO here and MONARCH by Thomas (2011). This program has undoubtedly expanded to include many hundreds of sub-projects and millions of actual operations. The number of scientists and their support staff who are involved in these government-related subcontracts is here estimated at one million with the total value of contracts estimated at approximately $10 billion/year.

7. Civilian Personnel: (including street actors, data collectors, spotters, TI location reporters, community and religious teams (mercenary stalking cells), 2R (receive and repeat) rumor purveyors, etc.,

a) Full-time professional government surveillance role players¨ (street perps)
b) Part-time professional government surveillance role players (street perps)
c) Volunteers (Neighborhood Watch, retired military, volunteer police, fire, first responders)
d) Active police personnel (Terror Liaison Officers)
e) Other police, fire-fighter, ambulance, and first responder teams

Whereas DHS stated in 2003 it wanted to recruit approximately one third of all Americans as citizen spies, we here estimate the number at a more conservative 50 million individuals and $40 billion/year.

Total guesstimate thus far in Scenario-Snapshot #4 yields over 66 million individuals and over $465 billion/year as involved in these programs…. in America alone. To extend the program to all cooperating nations requires that these numbers are multiplied by at least a factor 10….. Yikes!….. So, now we are talking 660 million people and 4.65 trillion U.S. dollars annually, much of which is probably funded by the United States government. Of course, the international bankers, Federal Reserve, City of London, etc. can print money as they need it. (Perhaps not coincidentally, these outrageously high figures could help explain why the Pentagon is currently over $6 trillion in debt!)

On The Plus Side?:

The ¨good news,¨´ from an economist´s perspective, might be that the National Security Establishment now comprises one of the dominant growth sectors of the American economy. And from the perspective of the ruling elite who have been described as a ¨break-away civilization¨ intent upon world conquest (Jewish Utopia), these programs are deemed essential to eliminate all ideological opposition. The program might also be justified on the basis of the fact that scientists will learn how to download the human brain-nervous system onto silicon chips, and in the process, discover secrets that could ensure some rich people´s future immortality. This latter prospect could be also related to the much-anticipated ¨singularity¨ event, in which computers will supposedly to take over the world in the next few decades, according to Ray Kurzweil and other Jewish ¨visionaries.¨

VI. Summary of Scenario Guesstimates

Scenario-Snapshots #1 and #2 (¨Operations John Doe and Jane Doe¨): About 50 perps are required for each TI. Assuming 1% of the US population are TIs, the system can function with about 10 million perps. Total costs of Operations John and Jane Doe over a 20 year period were $40 million, or $2 million per year. However, since the various teams are equipped to handle about 20 TIs simultaneously, this figure amounts to about $100,000 per TI per year. Extrapolating to the U.S. as a whole (multiplying by 3 million), total expenditures for GOG´S NeW GESTAPO in America alone are estimated at $300 billion/year. (If this estimate is remotely close, a considerable portion of this expenditure must come from ¨black budget¨ military-intelligence sources such as profits from illicit drugs, sex and child trafficking, etc.)

Scenario-Snapshot #3
: (Snapshot of Hoboken) Assumptions: 1000 TIs, Estimated: 84,000 ¨perps,¨ (For America as a whole, by extrapolation: 3 million TIs and 24.4 million perpetrators).

Estimated costs to neutralize ¨potential terrorist threats¨ in Hoboken are $200 million to $2 billion; estimated for America as a whole: $60 to 600 billion spent/year. Over 25 million civil-military warriors committed to GOG´S NeW GESTAPO.

Scenario-Snapshot #4: For the US as a whole, an estimated 66 million people and $465 billion/year are committed to the program. By multiplying this figure by 10 we can estimate the total human and financial resources devoted to GOG´S NeW GESTAPO at 660 million people and $4.65 trillion.
Thus, estimates in the four scenarios of the total personnel involved in the U.S. range from 9.2 million to 66 million persons and $60 to 600 billion/year.

These Figures May Seem Prepostereous…. But…

Consider These Facts:

1) The US military budget is about $800 billion/year. The US military is currently involved in 5 or 6 ¨hot 3 wars¨ and US SOCOM (US Special Operations Command) is currently involved in ¨irregular wars¨/4GW/destabilization in 134 other nations.

2) Over the past 7 or 8 decades, military-intelligence activities have included:

A) Top-secret development of weapons of mass destruction such as the Manhattan Project, in which 30,000 personnel kept classified secrets during the entire project.
B) Top-secret mind control projects including Projects Bluebird, Artichoke, MKULTRA, MKOFTEN, MKNAOMI and a host of others. Facts and scope of MKULTRA would have been lost forever had not numerous boxes of files miraculously escaped the official shredder in 1973.
C) Earlier programs to neutralize/destroy domestic enemies, include: the Phoenix Program, MHCHAOS, the FBI´s COINTELPRO, Operation Garden Plot and REX ´84, Cable Splicer I-III.
D) A sordid history of performing harmful and fatal ¨experiments¨ on non-consenting citizens during the Cold War. (The Clinton Administration admitted the figure was around half a million. Certainly, it is much higher.)

3) The American military-íntelligence and political elite have been trying to move the nations toward ¨one world government¨ since the end of World War II, according to Fletcher Prouty (¨The Secret Team: The CIA and Its Allies in Control of the United States and the World,¨ 2008.)

4) The sordid and well-documented history of the ¨Chosen People´s¨ secret and yet incredibly violent drive for world conquest includes the orchestration of all major wars and depressions of the last three hundred years,

5) The importance of GOG´S NeW GESTAPO in the fulfillment of the long-term goal of ushering the New Fascist World Order/Judeo-Masonic-Satanic-One World Empire aka the ¨Jewish Utopia.¨

VIII. Conclusions

To recap: Organized stalking-civil-military operations (GOG´S NeW GESTAPO) are directed by the ¨cryptocracy¨ (DoD, CIA, and DIA, DHS, NSA, and FBI, etc.) on behalf of the U.S. government and other participating governments, international agencies, corporations, and individuals. Money drives the whole National Security Establishment system, of which GOG´S NeW GESTAPO is an important component. The U.S. government and allied ¨public-private partnerships¨ as per UN Agenda 21, serve the interests of the international financial elite (Wall Street, City of London, ¨the corporatocracy,¨etc.).

Primary goals of GOG´S NeW GESTAPO are to:

a) covertly neutralize/destroy internal enemies of the state (read New World Order), both foreign and domestic, designated as ¨potential terrorist threats,¨ ¨non-combatants,¨ ¨adversaries,¨ etc. The program inflicts secret, no-touch torture via psychological operations (PsyOp) and nonlethal weapons (NLW) on targeted civilians in order to isolate and neutralize those individuals and groups considered ¨not ideologically assimilated¨ and capable of influencing public opinion and/or inspiring or leading opposition movements. In addition to ¨extra-judicial targets¨ (those with no criminal records), targets may be selected based on previous criminal activities (judicial targets), or may be ¨targets of opportunity,¨ or ¨lucrative targets.¨ Targets may also be selected based on having histories of drug and/or alcohol abuse or based on the motivation of revenge. Presumably, many are foreign political and military targets, including politicians, military personnel, and targets of influence and importance in those nations.

b) provide (unwitting and non-consensual) test subjects (TIs and TAs, targeted individuals and targeted audiences) for secret research and development of directed energy weapons/electronic weapons/psychotronic weapons/mind control and remote neural manipulation/monitoring (RNM) technologies. Many ¨targeted individuals¨ are non-consenting subjects of ´terminal experiments´ conducted by U.S. military-intelligence in cooperation with some 114 universities, hospitals, clinics, etc., and many corporations.) This aspect of the program is the continuation of the CIA´s top-secret MKULTRA mind control programs and involves application of state-of-the-art as well as trauma-based mind control technologies.

c) One may also speculate that another goal of this program is to form and develop a secret New World Order (United Nations?) civilian-military-police-corporate army that could be deployed to quell insurrections if and when Martial Law is imposed or under other ¨emergency¨ conditions.

IX. Message to Targeted Individuals

Welcome to hell. You have been selected as ¨enemy-non-combatant¨ and/or non-consensual experimentee of the New World Order and are now targeted by GOG´S NeW GESTAPO. Your Constitutional rights no longer apply and you are being attacked by an invisible system that regards itself as above the laws of God and man. (One may get a sense of how this functions by watching the movie, ¨The Skulls,¨ a fictionalized treatment of Yale´s Skull and Bones Secret Society).

As a ¨targeted individual¨ (TI), your life is now subsumed by a nether world of lies and spies, PsyOps, and high-tech soft-, silent-, and slow-kill murder weapons (nonlethal weapons). You are now being subjected to interminable ¨set-ups¨ (¨psy-attacks¨) instigated by ¨mercenary stalking cells¨ which are designed by clever psychologists/psychiatrists to destroy your life. GOG´s NeW GESTAPO wants to isolate you from your support structure and henceforth, you will find it difficult to distinguish friend from foe and will probably find it difficult to succeed at anything.

You have been placed in one of the most diabolically evil programs in history by perhaps the most evil government in human history which now appears ¨hell bent¨ on world conquest for its masters. That´s the really bad news… and it is terrible indeed.

The good news is that knowledge is power. The more we can learn about this insidious program, and the more we share this information with others, the better are our chances to survive personally and collectively and hopefully, to ¨neutralize¨ GOG´S NeW GESTAPO by exposing it. Nothing comes from nothing. This diabolical program reflects the diabolical ambitions of our criminal ruling elite who are amply identified on this website. Thus, we must make every effort to expose these people and bring them to justice. In 1926, Maj.-Gen. Count Cherep-Spiridovich articulated a strategy to bring down the ¨Hidden Hand,¨ which he identified, as I have, as the Jews/aka Judeo-Masonic-Satanists/the ¨Synagogue of Satan.¨ His solution is to bring any one of ¨the 300¨ (aka Learned Elders of Zion and the ¨Committee of 300¨) to trial for just one of their myriad crimes. In honest proceedings, their whole criminal syndicate would be exposed for the world to see.

By contrast, most of the ¨perps¨ we encounter on a day-to-day basis are probably merely ¨useful idiots¨ with little or no understanding of GOG´s NeW GESTAPO as a whole. So please try not to let them push your buttons. Most of them are probably just dupes and many of them believe they are helping to ¨get the bad guy.¨

If you have solid religious beliefs, and particularly if you are Christian, it is probably advisable to continue to grow in your faith in the goodness of God, Jesus Christ, the Trinity, the creation, and human nature. It would seem that, in their own perverted way, through the wicked teachings of their holy books, the Talmud and Kabbalah, our (Jewish and Masonic) leaders are using the Bible as a geo-political road map and we have entered the last days predicted in the Bible.

X. On the New Acronym- GOG´S New GESTAPO* For ¨Global Organized Gang Stalking Groups´ Neuro-Warfare- Electronic Surveillance, Targeting and PsyOp Operations¨

ETK note: I have made several attempts to devise an apt acronym for the odious global program that we commonly refer to as ¨Organized Gang Stalking.¨ This most recent iteration, GOG´S NeW GESTAPO, is appealing because, in my opinion:

1) the name, ¨Global Organized Gang Stalking Groups´ Neuro-Warfare-Electronic Surveillance, Torture and PsyOp Operations,¨ describes the nature of the program, and

2) the acronym, GOG´S NeW GESTAPO, reveals the identity of the main authors and sponsors of the program, who are principally Jews and Nazis. This power elite is also well described by the term, ¨Zionazis.¨ Gog, of course, is a Biblical term that refers to the Antichrist in the last days, whereas GESTAPO was the draconian Nazi secret police of Hitler´s Germany during the Second World War.

A power elite consisting of Jews and Nazis? Huh? These are strange bedfellows indeed. And yet, Cambridge-educated author, Christopher Story, in his book, ¨The New Underworld Order,¨ also concludes that ¨Zionazis¨ are behind the ¨Geo-Masonic¨ New UnderWorld Order.¨ To understand this apparent riddle, we need to recall that the Bavarian Illuminati, a very powerful Jewish German secret society, developed a plan for world conquest in 1776, which they have been implementing ever since through their secret societies, including Freemasonry. May 1, 1776, also marked the birth of the Rothschild Dynasty, as selected by the so-called ¨Learned Elders of Zion¨ (the Sanhedrin) to lead World Jewry in their historic mission of world conquest in order to establish their Universal Jewish World Empire or ¨Jewish Utopia.¨ It is a matter of record that many, many of the top Illuminati agentur who have subsequently guided the nations have been German Jews. That story requires another entire article, or perhaps several….

GOG: Biblically, Gog is the Antichrist and Magog is the land where Gog originates. Magog is now identified by some authors as the ancient, pagan kingdom of Khazaria, located south of Russia in the Causcuses. Pastor, author, and former Air Force officer, Texe Marrs, in ¨The Destroyer; the Antichrist is At Hand¨ (2016), concludes: ¨The Antichrist will be a Jew and his religion a form of Kabbalistic Judaism.¨

Marrs and others demonstrate through modern DNA studies that the modern Jewish ¨race¨ is comprised of about 95% Khazarians of Turkish-Mongolian stock, who converted to Judaism in the 8th through 10th centuries. The Khazars were conquered by Czarist Russia in about 1020 AD, at which time they migrated from Khazaria into what is now Poland, Germany, Latvia, Czechoslovakia and other nearby countries. DNA studies now prove that the ¨Jews,¨ including the modern ¨Israelis,¨ are, in fact, the descendants of these Khazars. Patrick Henry´s book, ¨The Matrix of Gog,¨ confirms that almost all modern Jews are of Khazarian and Turkish DNA and that these ¨Jews¨ will fulfill the Bible´s prophecies regarding Gog and Magog.¨

Ezekial 38 is a Biblical reference to Gog and Magog:

¨Son of man, set thy face against Gog, the land of Magog, the chief prince of Meshech and Tubal, and prophecy against him. And say, Thus saith the Lord God; Behold, I am against Thee, O Gog, the chief prince of Meshech and Tubal…¨

Marrs and others affirm that the Jewish ¨Messiah¨ is the Christian Antichrist and that the Jewish people as a whole may be their own Messiah. The 1888 letter of Jew, Baruch Levy, to Karl Marx underscores this latter point:

¨The governments of people will pass with the formation of the universal republic effortlessly into the hands of the Israelites… Then the personal property of the rulers will be suppressed by the rulers of the Jewish race, who will everywhere govern…. Then the promise of the Talmud will be fulfilled, and when the time of the Messiah has come, the Jews will have the goods of all the peoples of the world in their possession.

…. The Jewish people as a whole shall be their own Messiah…. Its Kingdom over the universe is obtained through the suppression of frontiers…. In this new organization of mankind, the Sons of Israel, who at present are scattered over the entire earth´s surface, will all be of the same race and of the same traditional culture without, however, forming another nationality… successful in laying upon the masses of workers a permanent leadership by Jews.¨

Marrs (2016) summarizes:

¨Gog and Magog, then, are Jews (converts from ancient Khazaria) who first conquer the ¨mountains of Israel¨ and then go on to ¨deceive the nations which are in the four quarters of the earth.¨ Here we see prophesied a militant, reinvigorated land of Israel- today´s nation of Israel, complete with nuclear bombs and other high tech armaments- amply supplied and supported by its global allies- the United States, Europe, and others- deceiving the nations throughout the earth. Through this deceit, Gog and Magog are able to gather them together to battle ¨the Camp of the Saints.¨ This is the remnant of God, the very elect who are not deceived, the people known everywhere as Christians.

This is the momentous, last days battle of planet earth, pitting the evil and mighty Gog and Magog and all their alli1es against the few who are in the Camp of the Saints and the beloved city. (The Saints are citizens of heavenly, not earthly, Jerusalem). This battle culminates in the destruction of the combined forces of evil as fire comes down from God out of heaven. Then the devil is cast into the lake of fire and brimstone (hell) where he shall be tormented forever and ever.¨

Why should we care about Biblical prophecy? Among other reasons, it appears that our Jewish ruling elite themselves believe in Biblical prophecy, or more accurately, they believe in their Talmudic and Kabbalistic perversions of Bible prophecy. And history reveals that they have been working for millennia to bring these prophesies to fruition!

GESTAPO: GESTAPO, of course, refers to the Secret Police of the Nazi Regime in Germany under Hitler. Thomas (2011) employs a metaphor from mythology to describe the totalitarianism of the Nazis.

¨In Greek mythology, King Minos received a gift from the gods, a perfect white bull. Instead of sacrificing the animal to the gods, as agreed, he substituted an inferior one, and usurped for himself that which came from the gods. Poseidon placed a curse upon the land and Minos´ wife gave birth to a monster, the body of a man and the head of a bull…. Minos creates the monster by usurping power for himself and placing himself above the law. Minos created fascism, the Minotaur nightmare that survives on human sacrifice, the beast that feasts on human flesh- dictatorship. The hero, Theseus slays the beast, destroys fascism and the tyrant, and frees the land from its curse.

What face has the Minotaur assumed in the twentieth century that we would recognize? Nazi Germany personifies the technological totalitarian state and serves as a model. The subjugation of the Weimar Republic began with the creation of private militias, which were used as a springboard to infiltrate the German military, and finally the police forces. The Reichstag fire (like 9/11) was an excuse to seize power and kill those that might stop them. The Night of the Long Knives refers to the creation of hit lists of enemies, and the hunting down and execution of hundreds of internal political rivals, opponents, and potential threats. Once Hitler had crossed the Rubicon of mass assassination, he publically declared his actions above the law. This was the moment of the birth of the Minotaur in the twentieth century. The pseudoscience of eugenics and the dogma of German racial superiority and the theoretical subhuman level of other races was the rationale for wars of annihilation.

Alexis de Tocqueville… perhaps the greatest historian of the age…. Identified the US and Russia as the two emerging world powers and, in effect, predicted the Cold War 120 years before it began. Tocqueville wrote about how the Minotaur would manifest itself in this country (America)… The racial dogma would be replaced by super patriotism and religion. If such a dictatorship, a new Minotaur, should arise here, how would we recognized its form? If the US intelligence services are using state-of-the-art microwave weapons to commit war crimes and are actively subverting the constitutional authority of the Republic and foreign governments, it is logical that a previous pattern of behavior or similar crimes would have been exhibited by these personalities and organizations and by their forbears.¨

(ETK: These patterns were established decades ago with the FBI´s COINTELPRO, the CIA´s MKUTLRA, CHAOS, and the Phoenix Program, the U.S. military´s Operation Garden Plot, Cable Splicer, REX ´84, etc. etc.)

For all these reasons, I believe this new term, GOG´S NeW GESTAPO, may be the best acronym to describe this diabolical program. We TIs might derive a ray of hope from the story of the Minotaur too. For the hero, Theseus, found a way to slay the Minotaur and save the kingdom. Perhaps that´s our job. Indeed, we have nothing to lose and everything to gain by wielding the power of perhaps the greatest of all weapons…. the truth.

XI. Post-Script

America has had a war economy, propped up by the ¨military-industrial complex,¨ since World War II. Today, having discarded the shibboleth-boogey man of communism, our intelligence agencies have adopted another shibboleth ¨boogey man;¨ ¨terrorism.¨ The purportedly endless ¨War on Terrorism¨ is our new national-organizing principle. But today, the ¨military-industrial complex¨ has morphed into a yet larger Behemouth, the ¨military-industrial-petroleum-academic-media-telecom-hollywood-homeland security complex¨ (Turse, 2008).

(Of course, to be glib and cynical, we do need some way to keep the American economy going now that the industrial, manufacturing, and farming sectors have been decimated and outsourced. So, perhaps TIs can console themselves with the realization that our participation in GOG´s NeW GESTAPO is helping to support our national economy.)
The atrocious news here, of course, is that our nation is now basically cannibalizing and destroying itself. We are now living through a ¨second civil war,¨ a ¨silent holocaust,¨ that is imposed from above in which most sectors of society are waging war upon disenfranchised individuals and groups designated as ¨enemy.¨ In the process, American citizens are being transformed into psychopaths, hateful monsters, and ¨useful idiots.¨ Indeed, we have been and are being ¨Satanized.¨

The symbol of the Oroboros, that of a snake eating its own tail, is quite appropriate here and seems to represent America and its roll in the world today. And there is a greater significance to this symbol. Historically, the Oroboros is an image both of Satan AND his ¨Chosen People.¨ The symbol of the Oroboros, according to Marrs and others, is also used by occultists of various Judaic cults, including Theosophists, Masons, New Age groups, etc., to represent the 3,000 year quest of the Jewish people to encircle the world and crush it in order to bring in their Jewish Utopia; Satan´s kingdom on earth.

In ¨Holy Serpent of the Jews: The Rabbis´ Secret Plan for Satan to Crush Their Enemies and Vault the Jews to Global Dominion¨ (2016), Marrs proves from the rabbi´s own writings that the Jewish people actually worship the ¨Holy Serpent,¨ aka Satan. This tribe has long been referred to as the ¨people of the Serpent¨ and their religion, Judaism, as the ¨Serpent cult.¨

Before Hitler there was Hertzl, the Jewish father of Zionism. Long before the toxic notion of German racial superiority was the far greater and more toxic belief in Jewish supremacy. And, of course, the serpent, aka Satan, Moloch, etc., now, as ever, demands human sacrifice. And he and his minions get great pleasure from torture and in winning new souls for their eternal kingdom, Hell.

As revealed in Lina´s ¨Under the Sign of the Scorpion¨ (1999), Jewish Bolshevik revolutionary and first Prime Minister of the U.S.S.R., Vladimir Ulyanov (aka Lenin), stated:

¨May 90 percent of the Russian people perish if 10 percent will experience the world revolution,¨ and
¨The people must be taught to hate. We shall begin with the young. The children will be taught to hate their parents. We can and must write a new language which sows hatred, detestation and similar feelings among the masses against those who do not agree with us,¨ and

¨Dictatorship is a state of intensive warfare,¨ and

¨We must utilize all possible cunning and illegal methods, deny and conceal the truth.¨
Lina (1999) states that (Ulyonov/Lenin)… ¨introduced logocracy (power through the use of barefaced lies), which became a political weapon.¨

Aren´t these very same hateful notions being applied in the United States of America today and in the New World Order´s GOG´S NeW GESTAPO? Certainly, Lenin´s (Ulyanov´s) statements accurately reflect the ¨logocracy¨ (of lies and ¨Jewish fables¨) that now controls the United States under Jewish rule.

People must understand that the Bolshevik Revolution was a revolution designed and carried out by World Jewry aka Judeo-Masonic-Satanists aka the ¨Synagogue of Satan.¨ We need to remember that, as Aleksandr Solzhenitsyn documents in ¨The Gulag Archipelago,¨ the Jew-controlled Soviet government is responsible for the brutal murder and torture of some 66 million white Christians, at least! We need to understand that ¨Satan´s Chosen People,¨ the Jews, are now implementing similar goals in America and throughout the world.

Under the subheading ¨Lenin´s Terror,¨ Lina (2002) states:

¨In 1975, a collection of documents was published in Moscow, ¨Lenin and the Cheka,¨ which explains that Lenin had adopted the terror methods of Maximilien ¨de¨ Robespierre (a leader of the French Revolution)… The Vice Chairman of the Cheka, Martyn Lacis (actually Janis Sudrabs, a Latvian Jew) wrote the following in his book ¨The Cheka´s Struggle Against the Counter-Revolution¨ (Moscow, 1921, p. 8): ¨We Israelites must buid the society of the future on the basis of constant fear.¨ Lenin wrote a letter in 1918, in which he commented upon the critical nature of the situation. It is apparent that Lenin managed to mobilise 1,400,000 Jews, the majority of whom worked for the Cheka. They were given free rein.

Here are some examples of Lenin´s ¨mild¨ telegrams in 1918: ¨A troika of dictators should be established and mass-terror should be begun at once… Full speed to the mass arrests. Execute weapons owners! Begin the mass deportation of the Mensheviks and other suspects.¨ The executions should be increased! (Collected Works, Vol. 35, p. 275.)

….. Lists of those shot and otherwise executed were published in the Cheka´s weekly newspaper. In this way it can be proved that 1.7 million people were executed during the period 1918-1919. A river of blood flowed through Russia. The Cheka had to employ body counters. According to official Soviet reports from May 1922, 1,695,904 people were executed from January, 1921 to April 1922. Among these victims were bishops, professors, doctors, officers, policemen, gendarmes, lawyers, civil servants, journalists, writers, artists, nurses, workers and farmers…. Their crime was ¨anti-social thinking.¨

Here it must be pointed out that the Cheka was under the control of the Jews, according to documents now available. Much of this was known already in 1925. The researcher Larseh wrote in his book ¨The Blood-Lust of Bolshevism¨ (Wurttemberg, p. 45) that 50 percent of the Cheka consisted of Jews with Jewish names. 25 percent were Jews who had taken Russian names. All the chiefs were Jews.

Lenin was well informed about all those serious crim ¨Put more force into the terror…. Shoot every tenth person, place all the suspects in concentration camps.¨… Lenin incarcerated people without any sentence.
Lenin and his accomplices did not arrest just anyone. They executed those most active in society, the independent thinkers. Lenin gave orders to kill as many students as possible in several towns…. The role of Russian intellectuals in society was taken over by the Jews.

The terror was co-ordinated by the Chekist functionary Joseph Unschlicht. The Jewish Chekists flavoured murder with various torture methods. In his documentary, ¨The Russia We Lost,¨ the director Stanislav Govorukhin told how the priesthood in Kherson were crucified. The archbishop Andronnikov in Perm was tortured: his eyes were poked out, his ears and nose were cut off.

Compare these crimes with the Old Testament account of King David´s massacre of the entire civilian population of an enemy (¨thus did he unto all the cities of the children of Ammon.¨) He ¨cut them with saws and with harrows of iron¨ and ¨made them pass through the brikkiln.¨ … The Jewish extremists´ serious crimes in Russia were committed in the true spirit of the Old Testament (King James´ Bible):

– The god of the Israelites demands the mass murder of gentiles (i.e., goyim = non-Jews), including women and children (Deuteronomy, 20:16)
– Yahweh wishes to spread terror among the Gentiles (Deuteronomy, 2:25).
– Yahweh demands the destruction of other religions (Deuteronomy 7:5).
– The Jews may divide the prey of a great spoil (Isaiah, 33:23)
– The Jews may make Gentiles their slaves (Isaiah, 14:2).
– Those refusing to serve the Jews shall perish and be utterly wasted (Isaiah, 60:12)
– Gentiles shall be forced to eat their own flesh (Isaiah, 49: 26).,

….. In Deuteronomy 20:10-17 we are informed that all other nations must work for the Jews if they come into the Jews´ dominion. If they resist, they must be killed and their property robbed. All goyim must be exterminated where the Jews already live. In Deuteronomy 7:16 (King James Bible), one can read the following: ¨And thou shalt consume all the people that the LORD thy god shall deliver thee; thine eye shall have no pity on them.¨

…. As can be seen, Judaism is an extremely racist doctrine. This is confirmed time after time in both the Talmud and the Torah. ¨Humanity is blessed soley for the sake of the Jews.¨ (Talmud, Jebamot 63a.) ¨All Jews are born the children of kings.¨ (Shabbat 67a.) ¨The Jews are more agreeable to God than the angels. (Chullin 91b.)… ¨Only the Jews are called human, the goyim are called animals.¨ (Baba Batra 114b,Jebamot 61a, Keritot 6b and 7a).

Returning to the Bolshevik terror…. In the beginning of the 1920s there were already 70,000 prisoners in 300 concentration camps, according to ¨The Russian Revolution¨ by Richard Pipes at Harvard University, though in reality there were probably many more. It was in this manner that Lenin built his GULAG archipelago.

….. Lenin´s primary goal was to exterminate the most intelligent part of the Russian population. When the giants are gone, the dwarves may revel. The Chekists usually invented the charges against the intellectuals…. Lenin began the persecution of intellectuals immediately after his rise to power. He made them starve to death or forced them to emigrate, or jailed or murdered them. Thus he gave orders to murder hundreds of thousands of intellectuals…. In this way, Lenin drained the country of its finest minds. Eventually, Lenin managed to purge Russia almost entirely of educated, wise and free-thinking people. The worst began to rule the best of those who were still left. What had been regarded as wrong for centuries now became a virtue…. And Russia was turned into a bandit state.

….. The great author Mkhail Bulgakov… stated… ¨All has been forbidden. I am crushed, persecuted and totally alone,¨ he wrote in a letter to Gorky. 13 of Bulgakov´s 15 critics were Jews.

…. The Bolsheviks began manipulating history precisely as it suited them in order to hide their crimes. They presented their ¨history¨ precisely as they wished the world to perceive it. That was why the greatest threat to Communism, which was entirely based on lies and fear, were tose who bravely dared to speak the truth. Speaking the truth was regarded as anti-Soviet agitation and punished accordingly. During the Glasnost period 1986-1991, such truthfulness pierced the very ¨heart¨ of Communism and destroyed it.

Does this hellish environment not sound a lot like the hellish environment that has been created for America today? And for ¨TIs in particular?

There is a good reason why these words and ideas are considered ¨politically incorrect¨ ¨hate speech.¨ The reason is that our Jew-controlled American ¨totalitarian democracy,¨ just like the Jew-controlled Communist system of the Soviet Union, cannot withstand the light of truth. Thus, our Jew-own government-propaganda system must criminalize any and expressions of the truth and criticism, just as they did during their criminal Soviet regime.

I believe it is imperative for TIs and people of good conscience everywhere to understand this larger historical-spiritual picture. It should now come as no surprise that former intelligence officer, Julianne McKinney, observed that one particular religious group is vastly over-represented amongst organized stalking perpetrator groups, whereas TIs generally tend to belong to other religious groups, particularly Christians. Indeed, for millennia, Jews have worked collectively to destroy their enemies, that is, all non-Jews, and have reserved their most intense hatred for Christians and Christianity. Today, their system of ¨sayanim¨ (Jewish secret agents) blankets the world and is supported by rank and file Jews everywhere. The New Testament provides numerous examples in which Jews were involved in the organized stalking of Jesus and the Apostles. Indeed, it appears that this kind of stalking is basically a Jewish phenomena that is now refined and augmented by high technology!

Once we understand that the intelligence agencies (the ¨cryptocracy¨), the corporatocracy, the United Nations, Masonry, Mormonism, Jehovah´s Witnesses, many New Age cults, and major sectors of mainstream Christianity, the Christian Zionists, all function as surrogate fronts for the ¨serpent cult/World Jewry…¨ And once we understand the incredible power of the (Jewish) purse, that Jewish international bankers print money out of thin air, and that usury and ¨funding controls everything,¨ as per the Protocols of the Learned Elders of Zion,¨ only then can we begin to grasp the true dimensions of our present challenge.

Akins (2012) puts our modern dilemma in its proper historical context, in my opinion, when he states:

¨Jewish Masterplanners were behind the five most destructive revolutions of the past 500 years…. These were the revolutions in England of 1688, in America of 1775-76, in France of 1789, in Russia of 1917, and in Rome with the Second Vatican Council of 1962-65….. There are strong indications of yet another universal revolt underway… What is the Final Phase revolution? Our best research has it that it´s characterized by an international coalition of well-organized… forces deployed on a multiplicity of fronts and all converging as a single mass-mobilization for the construction of the New Tower of Babel…. Crypto-Judaic Totalitarianism and the Universal Satanic Republic…. In a word, their ultimate objective is Jewish World Domination.

…. As we saw in the chapter on 9/11 and the phony War on Terror, Israel was behind all four fronts of that momentous event in our nation´s history: 1) The actual terror attacks themselves, 2) the subsequent cover-up, 3) and both ¨the U.S.-led military invasions overseas¨ and 4) the ¨domestic security state apparatus.¨

And let us not forget that the ¨neoconservative¨ faction that has formulated the main foreign and domestic policies of the Clinton, Bush II, Obama and now, the Trump Administrations is mostly comprised of Jews and dual Israel-American citizens. Their intellectual and spiritual ¨godfather¨ is Leo Strauss, the German Jewish-Nazi University of Chicago professor! His main mentors, in turn, were crypto-Jew Nicolo Machiavelli, author of ¨The Prince,¨ and the German Jewish philosophers Hegel, Frederich Nietche, and the Nazi, Carl Schmidt.

Thus, the term ¨Zionazi¨ seems to be an apt description of our psychopathic, criminal leadership and that GOG´S NeW GESTAPO (Global Organized Gang Stalking Neuro-Warfare Groups´ Electronic Slavery, Torture, and PsyOp Operations) is an accurate description of their criminal global organized gang stalking system.

As for the duped and complicit ¨useful idiots´ who comprise most of our neighbors, friends, and family, our job is to try to wake them from their deep slumber before the kind of mass killings of Russia of a century ago are visited upon America and the entire world.

XII. A Ray of Hope

As a retired geography professor, I maintain five websites: gangstalkingmindcontrolcults.com, 911nwo.com, naturalclimatechange.org, sanluisvalleywaterwatch.com, and erickarlstrom.com. Three of these websites, including 911nwo.com, gangstalkingmindcontrolcults.com, and naturalclimatechange.org disprove lies and propaganda which are foundational to the establishment of the New World Order. So there can be little doubt just how and why I was originally included on the ¨Terrorism Watch List.¨ I would be considered one of the ¨extra-judicial¨ variety of TIs.

Finally, I´d like to share the lyrics of a song written by Phillip P. Bliss around the time of the American Civil War (1860´s). While these lyrics indicate how far we have fallen as a nation, they also add a measure of hope and may articulate a viable counter-strategy to GOG´S NeW GESTAPO. The song is entitled
¨Let the Lower Lights Be Burning:¨

1) Brightly beams our Father´s mercy, From his lighthouse evermore.
But to us he gives the keeping, Of the lights along the shore.

Chorus: Let the lower lights be burning, Send a gleam across the wave.
Some poor fainting, struggling seaman, You may rescue, you may save.

2) Dark the night of sin has settled, Loud the angry bellows roar.
Eager eyes are watching longing, For the lights along the shore.

Chorus: Let the lower lights be burning, Send a gleam across the wave.
Some poor fainting, struggling seaman, You may rescue, you may save.

3) Trim your feeble lamp my brother, Some poor sailor tempest tossed.
Trying now to reach the harbor, In the darkness may be lost.

Chorus: Let the lower lights be burning, Send a gleam across the wave.
Some poor fainting, struggling seaman, You may rescue, you may save.

References

Akins, H., 2012, Synagogue Rising: A Catholic Worldview of Anti-Christian Judaism and Counterrevolutionary Resistance, Catholic Action Resource Center, Orlando, FL, 729 pp.
Cunningham, C., 2015, Conspiracy Facts: Neocons Unmasked, Critical Thinking Institute, Fort Myers, FL, 355 pp.
Duncan, R., 2010, Project Soul Catcher: Volume Two; Secrets of Cyber and Cybernetic Warfare Revealed, Higher Order Thinkers Publishing, Boise, Idaho, 306 pp.
Lina, J., 1999e, Under the Sign of the Scorpion, Referent Publishing, Stockholm, 446 pp.
Marrs, T., 2016, The Destroyer: The Antichrist is At Hand, RiverCrest Publishing, Austin, TX, 192 pp.
_____, 2016, Holy Serpent of the Jews: The Rabbis´ Plan For Satan to Crush Their Enemies and Vault the Jews to Global Dominion,¨ RiverCrest Publishing, Austin, TX, 224 pp.
Naylor, G., 2005, 1996,
Piper, M.C., 2015, The New Babylon: Those Who Reign Supreme, The Rothschild Empire: The Modern-Day Pharisees and the Historical, Religious, and Economic Origins of the New World Order, American Free Press, Washington, D.C., 266 pp.
Priest, D. and Arkin, W.M., 2011, Top Secret America: The Rise of the New American Security State, Little, Brown, and Company, New York, 296 pp.
Prouty, F., 2008, The Secret Team: The CIA and Its Allies in Control of the United States and the World, Skyhorse Publishing, New York, 572 pp.
Rich, M. M., 2011, New World War: Revolutionary Methods for Political Control, Lulu.com, 416 pp.
Shorrock, T., 2008, Spies For Hire; The Secret World of Intelligence Outsourcing, Simon and Schuster, New York, 439 pp.
Spiridovich, Maj.-Gen. Count Cherep-Spiridovich, 1926, The Secret World Government Or ¨The Hidden Hand:¨ The Unrevealed In History, 100 ¨Historical Mysteries¨ Explained, The Book Tree, Escondido, CA, 203 pp.
Solszhenitsyn, A., 1999, The Gulag Archipelago, Harper and Row Publishers, New York, 660 pp.
Thomas, M.G., 2011, Monarch: The New Phoenix Program, 267 pp.
Turse, N., 2008, The Complex; How the Millitary Invades Our Everyday Lives, faber and faber, London, 290 pp.

 

Techno Crime Fighters Forum: Notifying the World in 2017 of Widespread EMF/Neuro-Tech Crimes Against Humanity

Please drop in at Youtube and subscribe to World Beyond Belief/pineconeutopia to stay tuned to the weekly Techno Crime Fighters Forum shows, which are broadcast live on Google Hangout at 11 am, Eastern Standard Time every Thursday morning.

Featuring NSA Whistleblower and retired Intelligence Analyst Karen Stewart, High-Energy ex-CERN Physicist and Systems Analyst Dr. Katherine Horton, Pastor and Family Therapist Dr. Millicent Black, and this Writer & Independent Journalist (Ramola D), the purpose of this show is to offer open conversation on issues related to the global and criminal EMF/Neuro-tech targeting that is ongoing worldwide (under cover of “Surveillance”), particularly on issues related to exposing, addressing, and resolving these 21st-Century crimes.

Members of an international Joint Investigation team along with Melanie Vritschan, the Founder and President of ICATOR, International Coalition Against Electronic Torture and Robotization of Living Beings, this team hopes to go where no corrupt investigator in our many so-called Intelligence agencies bothers to go (plausibly being complicit), to inform and notify local communities, to assist reporting victims of covert EMF/Neurotech torture, to work with all other investigators of integrity, to notify public officials and “authorities” worldwide, to help start court cases, and otherwise help and support today’s Holocaust victims of these Electronic and Neurological Concentration Camps worldwide.

Global Tsunami Email Campaign to Save Humanity

Crime1To this end, Dr. Katherine Horton, with Ms. Karen Stewart, and a small, dedicated group of activists recently launched a brilliantly thought-out and carefully-scheduled Global Tsunami Email Campaign to Save Humanity, whose intent is Burning Down the House of Crime by mobilizing concerned citizens worldwide to join in to send notifications of these extreme human rights violations to all public officials in every US state and every country in the world. This is a 2-month long campaign ending on 1st June 2017, and has already made waves around the world and nation as the collective wave of emails has rippled across half the world this April.

Note to the world: If you care about your kids or grand-kids or elderly parents or your own self, peers, and colleagues being bio-robotized and transhumanized–a horrific fate which by the way is currently underway, as any “Targeted Individual,” automatically aware, by reason of the technology being used on him/her, will have you know–you may like to join us in sending out emails. We need people to wake up! Neuro Surveillance and stealth application of Directed-Energy Weapon torture methods, courtesy our darkest Covert Ops and Covert Agencies, is not some nebulous paranoia of a flaccid, militarized Future, but is already here. And has been around, and in the works, via Clandestine and compartmentalized Secrecy-contrived black-budget programs for more than 4 decades.

memo1Truths we conveyed earlier this year to Mr. President via our joint Memorandum to President Trump on Domestic US Torture Programs Running Under Cover of Surveillance signed by high numbers of highly educated, accomplished, and outspoken Americans and civilians worldwide from a variety of respected professions, including medicine, engineering, law, journalism, writing, psychology, neuroscience. And endorsed similarly in Ms. Karen Stewart’s impassioned appeal to the nation this past year in her statement of discovery and disclosure, Synopsis of the Silent Holocaust Taking Place In the United States.

This, as well as information on collecting evidence and writing affidavits for upcoming court cases, as well as discussions around Freedom Watch and Judicial Watch‘s founder and General Counsel Larry Klayman commenting on President Trump’s recent, encouraging statements of concern on “Surveillance” in his video (Klayman Agrees With President Trump: Mass NSA/CIA Surveillance of American Citizens Needs to Be Legally Snuffed Out), can be found on this episode’s video. Includes a special appeal from this journalist and this team to all alternative True-Media of truth, fearlessness, and integrity: This is no time to be operating on fear! Please watch, share widely! 

Excerpted from the above video, in a bombshell moment of disclosure from Karen Stewart on the part played by well-known Defense Contractor Lockheed Martin in organizing stalking harassment networks in 47 states of the United States of America, please see the brief clip below:

Related:

Open Season on Targets: Blacklisted Individuals, Extreme Abuse in Targeting, Secretive Lab-Rat Exploitation, & Massive Establishment Cover-Up

Dr. Katherine Horton to All Americans with Integrity: Global Nazi Extermination Program Underway–Why You Need to Help Rescue Electronic Concentration Camp Victims Now!

Global Tsunami Email Campaign to Save Humanity: Urgent National Security and International Terrorism Alert!

NSA Whistleblower Karen Stewart Says Intel Community Now Full of People More Dangerous to Freedom than ISIS

Defense Contractor Lockheed Martin Implicated in Covert Microwave Weaponry Assaults on “Targeted Individuals”

Victim of Neuro-Experimentation Rohinie Bisesar Reports Abuse in the Canadian Jail System (includes many Canadian/American Neuro Holocaust survivor testimonies)

Increased Attention Worldwide to the Reality of Covert & Inhumane Electronic Assault on Innocents

–Ramola D/5/5/2017

Interview with Paul Baird/Surveillance Issues: “Bogus National Security Laws Have Enabled Big Brother to Monitor Everyone and Harass Many”

by Ramola D/Posted 3/1/2017

The truth is, we in the Western democracies are no freer than our counterparts elsewhere in the world. In fact, serfs in feudal England or slaves in ancient Egypt served masters no more evil than some of those we deal with today. The only difference is that the ruling classes today hide their crimes and attitudes better. They can’t drag “do-gooders” out of bed at 2:00 am and have them thrown into some hellhole to be tortured to death. Here, in a “democracy”, they have to use satellite spying and harassment technologies, media feedback, political maneuvering, conspiracy, etc. As a result, none will be questioned, let alone caught and punished. Instead, while opponents are silenced and discredited, “their” attitudes permeate society, drawing others to accept that invasions of privacy, drugs, corruption and all manner of criminal conduct are to go unquestioned, as an acceptable part of life. Their delusions and our apathy must be challenged.  Paul Baird, Surveillance Issues

paul_baird_top1Paul Baird, B.Ec., LLb, is a Privacy and Human Rights Campaigner from Australia with a background in Law and Economics, who has worked for the Australian Tax Office, ANZ Bank, the State Chamber of Commerce, and Roads and Traffic Authority amongst other responsible positions. In 1990/’91, he wrote the novel “In the Year 2252,” widely distributed in draft form and covertly banned. The full story behind all responses and retaliation to his futuristic science-fiction novel which critiqued elitist crime may be found on the Case Study page of his website, Surveillance Issues, where he discusses covert electronic surveillance, monitoring, and assault technologies.

Covert Electronic Assaults Protect Organized Elitist Crime

Ramola D: Paul, first thanks so much for agreeing to do this interview. Your website is rather iconic in that it’s one of the oldest, most authoritative, reliable, and revealing about these covert programs of high tech remote brain surveillance and directed-energy weapon use on civilians—that appear to have been going on now for more than 3 decades, perhaps earlier even.

Interestingly, people from around the world—including the USA—can relate to what you describe: the programs of covert targeting, uber-surveillance, CO-INTELPRO, and 24/7 assault with undisclosed energy weapons and neuroweapons are very similar. Marshall Thomas names it the New Monarch program, many relate it to the gradual unrolling of a rather sinister high-tech New World Order. Even more sinister than what’s being revealed to those of us being targeted, it seems.

You state quite unequivocally that these covert assaults are being run by governments on citizens to protect organized crime.

“The US Patriot Act, for example, protects governments and connected criminals from criticism and/or detection and prosecution. Under this act, anyone whistleblowing or fighting the system on a major concern is arbitrarily deemed to be unpatriotic (when it’s the criminals they criticise who betray us). They can then be listed (by a senior politician or at the request, through them, of a connected criminal) as a security risk and harassed covertly; using secret technologies….This leaves them neutralised and possibly even silenced on the issue they originally raised. This, along with various research aspects, is the purpose of the exercise.” Surveillance Issues

Can you tell us more about that assessment of what has been and still is going on globally with these programs—just as much in Australia as in the UK or US or India or Canada? (And many other places, worldwide.)

Paul Baird: Thank you, Ramola. Yes, I’m afraid this sort of thing goes back as far as the end of World War II and the military/NASA/CIA employment of Nazi scientists through Project Paperclip. I recall an autobiography by a man named Kaufmann that was from the ’70s, I think. There are also victims on my help files who are quite old now and they say this has been going on for most of their lives.

Anyway, we’ve seen MK ULTRA and other programs exposed, and Ed Snowden was recently allowed to blow the whistle on mass surveillance (I suggest that was to condition the public to the surveillance state). However, The “New Monarch Project” you refer to remains relatively unknown and hidden. With over 5,000 devices covered by The Inventions Secrecy Act, 20,000 satellites in play and countless supercomputers, there may well be, as you say, worse to come.

The NSL thing seems to have fizzled out but the monitors have no interest in curbing terrorism, but rather use it as an excuse to oppress their detractors: writers, activists, whistleblowers and such. As fomer CIA director John Brennan boasted: “The CIA controls terrorism”. That then justifies the alterations to the Constitution and other law, which limit human/democratic rights, and excuse the covert oppression of the innocent by the guilty, who abuse their power/position/celebrity.

Lucrative elitist crime like trafficking (drugs, weapons, humans), as well as pedophile networks, false flag operations, and more are hidden/protected as true critics are attacked with weapons that could wipe out terrorism and crime in the right hands.

Ramola D: National Security as excuse, you’ve noted, for increased surveillance and repression, is actually a means to hide crime.

“…bogus National Security laws are also an obvious attempt to hide military/agency crimes that the public should know about.”

In other words, you are saying these laws have been made just to protect ongoing crimes while pretending to care about the safety of citizens and the nation. Could you expand on that?

From Surveillance Issues:

For example, the US government just passed the National Defense Authorisation Act, 2012, giving the President (and others) the power to target and silence anyone questioning State corruption. When this is done openly in other countries, the US is the first to condemn such evil, yet when they are guilty of the same, they do it in secret and no-one dares to criticise lest they join the ranks of those they persecute. So much for gov’t of the people, for the people, and by the people. The criminals who do such things abuse their authority, betray our trust, and secretly mock the democratic ideals they publicly support. They don’t serve us, they simply help themselves and their criminal associates. By using stealth, they can feign ignorance and hide their true nature from most.

For example: In the USA, over 300,000 NSL’s (National Security Letters) have already been issued. These allow the agency-targeting of innocent civilians whose objections to corruption/crime in high places have been deliberately skewed or misinterpreted as a threat to powerful people. Once placed in a program, people can be abused and experimented on, from a distance (using satellites/high tech.). This effectively silences and discredits them while providing agency researchers with guinea pigs for experiments in control, brain function, dreams, health, robotics, and much more. Post 9/11, $750 billion per year has been spent on satellite weapons used for human experimentation/targeting. Most of this has found its way from gov’t coffers to about 80 defense contractors who are also culpable for the crimes against humanity that are addressed on this site.

Paul Baird: Criminals try to hire their own kind, exclusively. That’s the same for a bank robbery, running a TV propaganda campaign, or a country. All entering public life or key roles are surveillance- vetted. Where blackmail, bribery, and fear don’t work, the person is usually rejected or worse. Those remaining have non-official cover.

The worst group are the MSM.  William Colby, ex-CIA Director, said: “The CIA controls everyone of significance in the major media”. That sums up the core of the problem with relaying the truth on many important matters. The control of the flow of information and public perception is crucial to their plans.

Ramola D: Your website, www.surveillanceissues.com, pretty extensively details what happened with the sci-fi novel you wrote—which met with some quite extraordinary agent acclaim and sounds like it might have become a bestseller had you continued with publication—which apparently excited the ire of criminals in high places who unleashed this high-tech targeting on you. Do you want to address a bit how long it’s been going on, and why you think it continues? (Not in any way to have you try to find reasons for this obvious atrocity and crime—which bears no excuse–but to hear your own thinking on the subject.)

Paul Baird: My web site is worth a look. Most of what I’ve learned is there. I don’t want to dwell on my own situation, only to use it as the example that I clearly know the most about.

The published feed off the unpublished. I think most know that. Covert censorship is rife. They may not know that. My novel “In the year 2252” was covertly used, banned, mocked, and abused by many in Hollywood, and the personal surveillance I endure led to much covert harassment/feedback. The book criticised elitist betrayals, the space program (an obscene waste of money directed secretly at surveillance and other weapons for human manipulation, when so many are starving, etc.), the NWO, drug proliferation, etc., etc.

From Surveillance Issues:

“Before a second draft was prepared, it was clear covert censorship would prevent any possibility of publication… I was already under 24-hour-a-day surveillance and was fielding feedback from corrupt sections of the entertainment industry, especially the media.

The reasons for their objections are many. Although the fictional novel was ultimately to be placed in a “virtual reality” setting, the submitted draft drew too much attention because it was critical of many things which criminals in high places do to get what they want and control others. Corruption, drugs, war, media deception, and all manner of immorality were openly attacked in the novel. I also lobbied on privacy laws.

No media player would want the general public becoming fully aware of the invasions of privacy and crimes which journalists and agency officials commit. Remember, I lobbied heavily on privacy laws for years with [ex-Prime Minister] John Howard himself supporting my views, in writing.

“Ethic” Rather than “Ethnic” Cleansing”

Ramola D: One of the most outstanding aspects of your experience is that you have spoken to and communicated with hundreds of people who variously worked for Intelligence agencies, the military, elected politicians, journalists, neuroscientists, neurologists, and in the process learned a great deal about the way the very real “system” of covert political repression works, what’s behind it, and what chance the average person has, of exposing it, or affecting it.

Do you still think it is next to impossible to stop or expose this system?

Paul Baird: I never thought it was impossible just difficult. Equally difficult struggles have taken longer. We just need to persevere and trust in God.

From Surveillance Issues:

AFP (Australian FBI)(NH) – Head of surveillance unit: “Even if a head of state or a Prime Minister was to wade in on these matters, they would be out of office that same day. That is what you’re up against here”. When I asked who was primarily responsible for these crimes– spy agencies, the military, politicians, or journalists–he answered: “Well, they all have ready access”, meaning all of the above. With this, he confirmed my earliest observations that this was elitist/class crime directed by criminals in high places at those who challenged them in some way.

US Embassy in Canberra – Chief US spy in Australia: Standing on the lawn outside (they would not have me in the building), and looking skyward, then panning his hand across the city skyline below, he bragged: “I know everything that happens in every office in this city. Everything. Understand?” I wrote to every Federal MP and told them what he had said. None responded. All are clearly compromised by the surveillance.

…The overall message is that this is politics first and foremost: political psychiatry, political oppression, political crime. Science is employed but politics is the reason for choosing the targets.”

As for what it’s all about: After 26 years on this, it has become clear to me that this is more about politics than anything else–suppression, oppression, experimentation, and eugenics.

In fact, my personal view is that this is a new “silent holocaust” (Look up the term on Wikipedia–I added the third definition: “‘Ethic’ rather than ‘Ethnic’ cleansing whereby whistleblowers, activists, and writers critical of a government or the powers that be can find themselves the subject of programs designed to persecute, oppress, and indirectly prevent reproduction….”).

Those with gene trait combinations that indicate they may challenge the Powers That Be (PTB) (or those that have already done so in some way) are placed in a sort of electronic, mobile concentration camp and harassed/stressed so that none (or few) reproduce from that point. It is extermination by natural attrition: the removal of those traits from the gene pool by stealth.

And that 60% that will not question authority at all (the CIA estimate) will grow while the 1% that stick their necks out will dwindle. Whether that succeeds or not, I believe that is their thinking….One arm harasses the targets so their complaints mirror mental illness (paranoia, schizophrenia, etc.), while the other observes the results, pretends it’s natural, and approves the necessary social engineering. I believe this helps sell it to those who know but acquiesce.

From Surveillance Issues:

NASA Inspector-General’s Office: After admitting that they knew all about NASA’s role in delivering payloads into space and the capabilities of the satellite technology in question, and being asked what could be done to stop them, I was told: “Nothing. I suggest you pray”. This was repeated, as I was clearly incredulous. It was said with resignation and certainty as the only solution. This, more than any other comment from any other source summed up the difficulty of the situation faced by all targeted persons.

Bogus National Security laws have enabled Big Brother to monitor everyone and harass many, any that challenge the status quo.

Ramola D: Many you spoke to revealed a great deal about the true nature of surveillance—which we still don’t read about in The Guardian or The Intercept or The Washington Post. (In fact, we read about it primarily at Surveillance Issues, World CACH, ICAACT, US CACH, The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Mind Justice, Targeted Individuals Canada, Mind Control in America, and other informative websites like I Want to Know and Educate Yourself, covering classified technologies and covert operations, often run by those actually being wrongfully, covertly, or remotely radiation-/neuro-targeted and assaulted, worldwide.)

As part of your own experience, when you were first hit, in 1991, you record communications from various politicians, including a letter of support from ex-Prime Minister John Howard, which told you many were aware of your high-tech surveillance and harassment, yet they could not help, their “hands were tied.” You’ve since understood that many policemen and politicians are aware that people are being assaulted with these remote technologies—yet won’t help; how do you read that?

Paul Baird: To be clear: John Howard’s letter of support, which can be seen on my web site, came before he was PM. I did not talk with or meet John Howard; he sent me a supportive letter, that’s all. However, I did speak with members of his staff. After he was PM, his aides told me it was awkward and his hands were tied, as did aides in other Ministerial offices. It is awkward because acquaintances and foreign politicians are involved. I discovered that those targeted people with federal police complaint files had them marked “Politically Sensitive” for the same reason.

Media Treason & Complicity In Covering Up Covert Global Neuro-Weapon and EMF Weapon Use on Populations

Ramola D: I am especially interested in addressing the part that Media plays in covering up the worldwide usage of neuro-weapons and directed-energy weapons on the populace.

Obviously, such a gigantic cover-up could not have been pulled off without Mainstream Media playing a very active role—in not merely suppressing this information by not covering it, but by pandering to their CIA/DOD overseers in distorting, denying, degrading the information out there on it, in the process deliberately discrediting those targeted persons and those being non-consensually experimented-on today who speak out.

cialies1We see evidence of this malicious campaign today in publications such as The New York Times, The Washington Post, Mother Jones, The Daily Beast, Rational Wiki, Wikipedia and other mainstream rags. But most—not all—alternative media also refuse to acknowledge the very existence of this crime. You’ve stated, not just about this but crime in general, “By owning/controlling the media, criminals avoid open challenge.” What have you learned about journalists regarding this particular cover-up?

Paul Baird: Yes, as you say, the CIA-controlled MSM as well as the marginalised media, even publications like Nexus, refuse to run anything but the most derogatory items on TIs. The New York Times, Washington Post, and other misinformation strongholds, in particular, have attacked some of our better campaigners after luring them into an interview situation. They run with some mass hysteria line and ignore that all the targets have done something to annoy the PTB. Personally, I would never even talk with these snakes and this is the first interview I’ve ever given, and that’s only being done because I’m convinced that you understand the issues and are totally sympathetic.

operationmockingbirdcia-owns-the-media1Look, as ex-CIA director William Colby admitted: “The CIA controls everyone of importance in the major media”. They’re not going to rat on themselves, nor will they help an agency-target or anyone attempting to expose crimes of the corporate/military/political conglomerate. Those entering the MSM sort of sell their souls on matters like this and are brainwashed into believing it’s justifiable, and that they couldn’t do anything about it anyway. They’re all scared when confronted on this. It’s also all covered by bogus National Security legislation, so they lean on that as another excuse when there aren’t any real excuses, just criminal delusions fostered by elitists.

And sections of the media don’t just acquiesce on all of this and attack those trying to highlight it, they actively take part in harassing TIs. In fact, in my own case, and that of others who’ve been targeted by the entertainment industry villains, the attacks can be overwhelming and brutal….I see the MSM media as evil traitors and criminals.

Marginalised journalists and MSM execs, presenters that do not approve told me that surveillance results can be handed over with a “Find a place for this on tonight’s news/current affairs” -type instruction. Surveillance frequencies can be handed to stations. Direct computer to teleprompter connections can be arranged. The target is oppressed and discredited if they tell anyone, but this practice is as old as eavesdropping and predates all the technologies that aid today’s elite criminal. Again, insiders don’t care for the truth, only ego, income, and celebrity.

Hearing Voices, the Neurophone, and What Neurologists Know

Ramola D: I’d like to focus a bit on the issue of hearing voices, which many of those being assaulted with covert and classified technologies report, often as “synthetic telepathy” or the military term,Voice to Skull or V2K. Evidence for this military technology has been provided on FOIA request, and can be seen in patents.

Reporting such technologically-induced voices as evidence of covert neuroweapon assault to local law enforcement or physicians, still, today, ends with the target being taken to a Psych Ward and shot up with neuroleptics and anti-psychotics, essentially being disbelieved, dismissed, and discredited as mentally ill, schizophrenic, and hallucinatory.

This is absurd, because there are many known and patented technologies today to induce voices in people’s heads, such as the Frey effect, the microwave hearing effect, and bone conduction—which whistleblowers and scientists have also spoken about, and some of which are beginning to see coverage in mainstream media–but the Neurophone predates them all, and was used as a Voice of God weapon during the Iraq war, according to many analysts. What is so important about the Neurophone?

Paul Baird: Neurophone technology is the basis for developments that see many targeted people fielding personal “broadcasts” from Spy Central. From ignorant police and medicos to complicit journos and MPs, any discussion of this can lead to the complainant being institutionalised.

neurophoneThe device was invented in 1958, and was classified soon after. The developments from direct to remote, to vehicles, to satellites which deliver it via laser (slower sound riding faster directional light over the insignificant distance from a geo-synchronously-orbiting Deeper Space satellite to the Earthly target) followed.

It was used by spies for silent communication (no touching ear pieces, etc.), to drive Iraqi soldiers out of bunkers, to fire up and delude Manchurian candidates, and to discredit and/or institutionalise many political targets. It is subtly referred to in many songs.

It is the only term in our repertoire that cannot be denigrated, misrepresented, covered with other meanings or used elsewhere. There are countless pages of web site listings on the word, yet it still remains out of all dictionary listings, because the psych’ branding of sufferers as mad is central to the oppression of the righteous. On top of that, the reaction I get from perps/Government infiltrators in our midst is out of proportion. If others knew of it (even audiologists etc.,) it would become known world-wide, and the secrecy and misuse over 50 years would come out.

The education of people as to the existence of Neurophone technology and its development is one way we CAN break through. Other terminologies can be attacked. Other devices don’t have such specific names and cannot be actually bought from a real inventor who is still alive.

Ramola D: You have spoken with several neuroscientists on this subject, how have they reacted, when told of these technologies to remotely induce voices in people’s heads? I would think it’s very important to have psychiatrists communicate with neuroscientists, and vice versa, so psychiatrists begin to understand that hearing voices can no longer be considered symptomatic exclusively of schizophrenia.

Paul Baird: My experiences talking to brain experts indicate that they see all of this as interesting and say things like “Where can I get hold of these technologies”, that’s if they aren’t already involved. In other words, the humanitarian aspect is lost on them and all they see is New Science. They are part of the problem, not the solution. That’s not to say honest, caring ones don’t exist, and cannot be found, just that it would be difficult with the “Year/Decade/Century of the Brain” brigade.

My preferred target, based on positive feedback and confessions from the profession, would be NEUROLOGISTS. Many know. Some sympathise. Any that say they’re not interested (especially in a device like a NEUROphone) are liars. Any and all neurologists would be interested and they, in turn, could be used to convince others. The extraordinary efforts and manpower used to stop me telling an entire conference room full of neurologists is evidence enough for me…This avenue, like Net films, is a concern to “them” because it may work.

Challenging the inexact science of psychiatry with neuroscience is what I’m on about too. Neurologists know. If they would just relay that, then the psych’ profession could not ignore it.

Ramola D: When you say Neurologists, I presume you don’t mean Neuroscientists (as above/brain researchers)? (Correct me if I’m wrong.). And are you serious, have you actually met brain researchers who professed immediate interest (in technologies that could remote-target brains)? That would suggest that a majority of researchers are Not focused on the humane or ethical aspects of brain research? That seems huge in itself–can you elaborate?

Paul Baird: I use Neuroscience to mean the branch of medicine/science dealing with the nervous system and the brain. Its practitioners are neurologists. I see neurologists as just one of many groups that deal with brain disorders. Neuroscience is the broader field they operate under and that can include psychiatry, pharmacology, biochemistry and so on. And, yes, I’m always serious on the topic of covert harassment…The flippant “Where do I get it?” type responses are there but I don’t even recall the names, as once I hear that sort of inhumane response, I dismiss the person; I’m looking for compassionate, knowledgeable people, not corrupt or uncaring, would-be criminals. The names of those honest neurologists who knew or quickly accepted the truth are logged, but must remain concealed unless and until they choose to come forward; though some are briefly mentioned on my web site.

Ramola D: So generally speaking, one would think all neurologists today should be interested in learning about what TIs are experiencing? And a Neurophone would be of interest to all, you’d think? Did you want to elaborate on that experience of being stopped from telling a conference full of neurologists about the Neurophone?

Paul Baird: The Neurophone is a device that allows non-verbal communication as signals directed at the body to travel the nervous system and register in the brain–by-passing normal hearing mechanisms. It is attuned to the individual bio-electronic resonance frequency of the target, and so is not heard by others in the signal’s path. For any neurologist to say they neither know of nor care about knowing of such a device would be clear evidence of corruption or knowledge. 

Indeed, for any specialist, be they neurologists or psychiatrists etc., to say they’re not interested in any device that allows signals to travel the human nervous system must raise suspicion of complicity. Like a corrupt cop who says he has no interest in learning of a new crime technique, it would be more than suspicious. The Psych’ professionals are almost all corrupt, many are involved but not the neurologists.

neurophone2Sometime in the early ’90s, I attended a huge Neurologists’ convention at the Sydney Hilton. Expecting to be unable to speak directly to the attendees, I brought flyers in envelopes addressed to each attendee and posted them on the giant notice board. The names and permission to do this had been given to me by the organisers, who later told me that when I left, many men in black suits filed in and took one each. None of them were conference attendees who remained in the hall at the time. Consequently, not one received my posting. When I started contacting them individually, I found that many knew of the research, the Neurophone, the brain-wave scanning and brain-wave interpretation software.

Example 1: One admitted he had been harassed for inventing his own Neurophone, and offered to use hospital scanning equipment to scan targets–people who were being interfered with by remote technologies. The hospital equipment could only be accessed for official research so 40 targeted people would be needed as volunteers to be able to call the testing a research project and thus gain access to the oscillating scanners. He warned that if the monitors interfered with brainwave signals during scanning, which they could easily do, that he would be obliged to report anyone whose brainwave patterns matched those of known criminals on file. The risk was assessed by both of us as too high so we told no one.

(Personally, I believe that part of the framing we suffer includes bogus brainwave results that they fudge). The neurologist was later offered a job at Sydney University’s Centre for The Mind which studies creativity, facial expressions, and such, and is supported by Richard Branson, Peter Adams, Baz Lurman,The Dalai Lama and others. At this point this neurologist’s attitude was corrupted, and he claimed that not everything about such human research is black and white but grey. Potentially one of our greatest supporters, and a man who had offered so much hope over so many discussions, had been compromised and was lost to us.

Example 2: Another neurologist shared that illegal human research (non-consensual) had been going on for years. She said they used to hide brain-wave scanners in computer screens and wall cavities in neurologists’ offices, and would illegally scan patients’ brain-waves for research. Today, she said, the US military scans brain-waves from satellites, and does most of the research themselves. She feared for her job/life and told me to never use her name, though I could repeat what she had told me.

Challenging the inexact science of psychiatry with neuroscience is what I’m on about too. Neurologists know. If they would just relay that, then the psych’ profession could not ignore it.

The Criminal Silencing of Critics with Deadly Weaponry, Discrediting, and Psychiatry

Ramola D: Psychiatrists and doctors are being used to name victims mentally ill (schizoid or paranoid or both) if they report hearing voices or covert harassment on the street, or airplane/helicopter stalking, being followed, being swarmed in stores, etc.

Dr. Seth Farber recently wrote about this in his article, “The Psychiatric Metanarrative, Targeted Individuals, and the Deep State: A Response to The New York Times”, saying that psychiatrists didn’t have to be wittingly complicit, they were generally oblivious of covert agency actions, and could just be expressing the innately authoritarian and conformist attitude of Psychiatry, which is eager to name all deviations from a norm they subjectively designate as sign of mental illness.

In essence though, psychiatrists are co-operating with the State in diagnosing victims as schizoid and helping to cover up this Crime-With-Technology. In the US and Europe, victims can be committed to institutions by such psychiatrists. Have you spoken with psychiatrists and neuropsychiatrists, what have you learned?

Paul Baird: Yes. Most scientists have no interest in ethics or human rights. Some others have organised groups to look into that. Professional prostitution or a “guns for hire” approach is common across many professions. Over 60% of people will now do whatever they’re told for money or advantage according to the CIA. “It is appallingly obvious that our technology has exceeded our humanity.” Albert Einstein.

Psychiatrists’ bread-and-butter diagnoses include schizophrenia; only an honest, intelligent, brave one with little ego would accept the truth. Voices in the head are their favourite money spinner–and who supplies much of that money? The government, elite employers, etc.

It is very dangerous to speak to psychiatrists, especially if they’re corrupt. Even the best ones will accept stalking, harassment, and victimisation scenarios but draw the line at hearing voices broadcast from Spook Central.

Ramola D: You’ve stated that this is class warfare, where people in power use criminal tactics of silencing potential critics with deadly weaponry, and Media helps by ruthlessly suppressing and ridiculing targets’ testimonials, while also attacking them with the information gained from constant surveillance, “Surveillance Results”–could you expand on that?

Paul Baird: The elite all know. MPs, celebrities, “businessmen”, senior military personnel, etc. They salve their consciences on the conspiracy of silence by rabbiting the CIA line that it’s a matter of National Security. They know who’s in the wrong but just don’t care. Remember, the CIA sifts and places people for the shadow government, selecting from that 60% I keep referring to. For example: A rep’ of the top security firm here told me that the “Word is out to wash our hands of you”–the Pontius Pilate approach. Having all sold their souls with their silence and complicity, the elitists do what they can to discredit the innocent. The prince of lies controls their hearts and minds.

From Surveillance Issues.com:

Legal Aide: “It’s common for corporate criminals to covertly harass and blacklist people and many of them wind up on the street. They enjoy seeing that as they present as hopeless/mad. I’m only using this job as a stepping-stone and have a family. If I try to help any of those I know they did this to or spill the beans, my career will stall.”

Lawyer/Partner: “We’ve discussed it and would dearly like to help, but if we do, “They” will come at us from the side; we’ll lose all clients from any connected source, and that means we’d be out of business.”

Neuro Surveillance: Celebrities and Public Figures Both Controlled and Complicit

Ramola D: You’ve said that celebrities and public figures are also controlled by threat of use of these technologies against them. Many are also used, via Surveillance Results, via television, radio, film, to further harass targets. What do you think public figures know about all of this and why won’t they help?

Paul Baird: As for what celebrities know: This is again what I’ve brought to the table time and time again, but no-one wants to hear it. I’ve been hit by these people for decades and met some of them, some others who work for them, and many others who’ve been similarly hit. Most celebs are chosen, through agency vetting and syndicate approval, and are in that 60% I told you about. They have no editorial control, especially the journalists, and just present what they’re told to BUT they know of the targeting and, over time, if they hit the same targets, they’re in on the joke/crime.

The whole “don’t trust public figures” thing is so hard to relay in the age of celebrity worship that it’s frustrating. There are fence-sitting celebrities who don’t really approve of all this surveillance and oppression, but see it differently to you and I; as a sort of necessary trade-off. So many subtly refer to V2K and mind-reading technologies. With many, many songs mentioning “voices in my head” and “reading minds”, with the colloquial references used as covers if and when they are asked.

What am I saying? It’s back to that 60% thing again. 60% of people will do as they’re told, so the selections are made from that pool of talent, and the other 40% are shunted out.

In the case of public figures, Satan, through his minions, exacts the surveillance price from celebrities and they accept it because: that’s what they do for a living, and if they don’t do it, some lesser talent will take their place and do it anyway. Pretty much the same defence you’d get from hired assassins, give or take some large egos.

As for the price they pay (covert surveillance above the papparazzi thing being a big part of it): they pay a price, but their silence on the matter means that others also pay that same price with nothing to counter-balance it; all of us are also monitored, etc., because they remain silent. So we all pay, and only they benefit.

I say we all stand up and tell, and to hell with the monitors and their technology; it’s undemocratic, immoral, and criminal, and no government has a mandate to do it or allow it to be done.

The Few Exceptions: “Too Afraid to Do More”

Ramola D: So: people in public office and in prominent positions in media are generally corruptible, or they would not have attained their office. This brings us to the present, to all the implications of Pizzagate, the dark stories of blackmail and pedophilia propping up people in public office. Have you met or know of any exceptions, and what is your feeling about corrupt people in power today—have things changed, do we have a greater chance of exposing them?

Paul Baird: Yes, I’ve met some exceptions; that’s where a lot of my information came from in the first place. However, they will not go public as their careers/lives may be in jeopardy. Around the time I was talking to PM Howard’s people, the chief AFP (Australian Federal Police) surveillance expert told me that even if the PM were to try to help a targeted person, that he would be out of office that same day; one way or another. Such is the power of those that foster this system of oppression.

The honest/brave ones that helped a lot were mainly State and Federal Police, ex-spies and such — a few ex-politicians, TV presenters, TV/radio execs, and presenters were honest and supportive, but they were too afraid to do more than that.

Could Pizzagate and Pedogate Help Expose High-Tech Targeting?

Ramola D: What do you think about the connections of high-placed criminals to Pizzagate today, and the exposure of pedophilia/Satanism, etc.? Ted Gunderson and others have spoken about child trafficking and abuse, and many researchers have written about Satanism in the security and Intelligence agencies. Any chance, you think, that the exposure of this evil will help expose high-tech targeting as well?

Paul Baird: There’s always a chance, I suppose, but I tend to think that pedophilia in elitist circles is so out of control that it’s spilling out into the public arena. So many celebrites are caught up in rings or personal situations that there are two LA law firms that deal with nothing but celeb’ pedo’ cases or sexual-harassment-type matters. I personally see how we protect our children as a gauge of how well society is progressing. At the moment we are in a very sick, disgraceful place.

“The Ability of Government to Classify Crime is What Must be Fought.”

Ramola D: Going back to classified crime: I would think any victim of such “classified” assault on their bodies and brains would agree with this statement of yours:

“Classifying” information and calling it a matter of National Security negates the need for the criminals involved to even create excuses for their conduct. The ability of government to classify crime is what must be fought.”

Yet this is crime that malingers in shadows, that is systemically being protected and covered-up. How can such crime be exposed, and how can the classifying of such crime be fought?

Paul Baird: That’s the big question, isn’t it. Exec. Order 13526 is supposed to outlaw the classifying of matters to hide crime, yet it happens every day.

Sec. 1.7. (Executive Order 13526) Classification Prohibitions and Limitations.

(a) In no case shall information be classified, continue to be maintained as classified, or fail to be declassified in order to:

(1) conceal violations of law, inefficiency, or administrative error;
(2) prevent embarrassment to a person, organization, or agency;
(3) restrain competition; or
(4) prevent or delay the release of information that does not require protection in the interest of the national security.

To stop it, we need advice from National Security experts. However, the governments employ most of them, creating a conflict of interest in much the same way that the MSM makes sure it uses all media lawyers to create the same conflict. Those few experts left charge too much for targeted people to afford and, as we all know, you only get the justice you can afford. The elitist criminal will always price you out on civil matters and hide on criminal ones. That’s why 98% of crime (mostly white-collar crime) goes unpunished.

Ramola D: Finally, several initiatives supported by your extensive writing and reportage and run by Dr. Nick Begich and Lynn Surgalla of the US Psychotronics Association made great headway in 1999 at the European Parliament and UNIDIR (United Nations Institute for Disarmament Research) in creating legislation banning the use of weapons to remotely manipulate humans. Yet they were not enforced, and were indeed fully ignored by the US Government. What can we do today to once more bring this vital issue to international attention?

Paul Baird: The European Parliament passed The Resolution on the Environment, Security and Foreign Policy, A4-0005/99 on Jan 28th, 1999. This called for a world-wide convention to ban the use of all weapons for human manipulation. UNIDIR passed a similar resolution. Both were ignored by the media and the US gov’t. (UNIDIR 2002 Media Guide to Disarmament.)

The European Parliament and UNIDIR, in recognising our concerns, did mention Weapons of Mass Destruction but grouped it all into a category called “Weapons for Human Manipulation” and that’s what they wanted banned.

The point I often make about the US, which all countries know rules the planet but they dare not spell out how, is that UN Weapons Inspectors and various “Inspector Generals” etc. are nigh on impotent when it comes to the US stockpile of Weapons of Mass Destruction and covert, classified weapons. It’s as if all other countries are potential villains but not the country in the best position to be just that, and which commits more crimes against humanity than any other. This exclusion from scrutiny is one of the ways you can tell how tightly the US fist holds the reins of power worldwide. Equally, they can bolster and expand their National Security laws to cover concealing, spying, harassing re. the entire planet, but anyone else that tried that would be denounced as criminals by the CIA-controlled Media.

Again, National Security laws and the inability of UN Weapons Inspectors to study evil, classified technologies are, for me, two of the biggest obstacles we face.

With the MSM controlled by the CIA and the US government clearly behind all of this, only public education, through the marginalised media, can get the result we need.

Ramola D: Any other thoughts on how collective humanity can end these horrific elitist criminal practices of covert EMF weapon and neuro-tech assault?

Paul Baird: Can I just emphasize that despite the various other angles to all of this–the oppression, the experiments (AI, Dream Studies, Mind Control, Brain Studies, etc., etc.) that there is clearly a Eugenics angle as well. Much like their Nazi predecessors, these people not only want to disable us and put us in a mobile concentration camp and run their evil experiments, they also want to remove all trait combinations from the gene pool that lead to the make up of those who provide resistance to their evil operations–curiosity. persistence, honesty, spirituality, etc. I know of no targeted person that had children after the stressful harassment started, and most would see their offspring would also suffer if they did. Like Poles, gays, Jews and others during WWII, today the ethical, compassionate, and law-abiding are also in danger of extermination.

Only by exposing these practices can we end them. We need to work at finding ways to let the general population know that they live not in democracies but totalitarian/fascist states and (that they must work) to restore true democracy.

Finally, the answers lie with the marginalised media and articles prepared by people like yourself, Ramola. If enough people can learn of these atrocities through such writings, then pressure can be brought to bear on the powers that be to stop what is effectively a silent holocaust: the remote incarceration, torture, experimentation, and extermination of people of integrity who have the temerity to challenge elite crime.

With much gratitude to Paul Baird for this singular interview, conducted over a long period and several emails. Please visit Surveillance Issues for more information.

Please share widely. Re-posting with permission only, please contact Ramola D, thanks.

RELATED:

Paul Baird/Surveillance Issues: Covert Oppression Using Classified Technologies

Memorandum to President Donald J. Trump on Domestic US Torture Programs Running Under Cover of Surveillance

Intel Agency Crimes: False Flags, Lies, Media Control, & Mind Control Psy Ops

Dr. Katherine Horton to All Americans with Integrity: Global Nazi Extermination Program Underway–Why You Need to Help Rescue Electronic Concentration Camp Victims Now!

Bigger Than Snowden: A Spotlight on Whistleblowers/Electromagnetic Weapons Are Being Used to Torture and Subjugate Countless American Citizens

Seth Farber, Ph.D: The Psychiatric Metanarrative, Targeted Individuals, and the Deep State: A Response to The New York Times

Ex-CIA and MI5 Agent and Whistleblower Carl Clark Reveals Covert Electromagnetic Torture of Civilians by Intel Agencies in US/UK/Europe/Asia with Directed Energy “Non-Lethal” Neuroweapons

Open Season on Targets: Blacklisted Individuals, Extreme Abuse in Targeting, Secretive Lab-Rat Exploitation, & Massive Establishment Cover-Up

In the Name of National Security? Secret, Classified Human Subject Experimentation and Research in 2015: Where is the Public Outrage?

Memorandum to President Donald J. Trump on Domestic US Torture Programs Running Under Cover of Surveillance

“We will seek friendship and goodwill with the nations of the world, but we do so with the understanding that it is the right of all nations to put their own interests first.

We do not seek to impose our way of life on anyone, but rather to let it shine as an example.

We will shine for everyone to follow.”

–President Donald J. Trump, Inauguration Day Address, 1/20/2017

donald-trump-inauguration-3a

Memorandum on Domestic US Torture Programs

Running Under Cover of Surveillance

Covert US Military/Intel/Justice Physical Mutilation of the Population

EMF Weapons, Neuro-Weapons, Bio-Terrorism, & Organized Stalking

Date: 25 January 2017

To President Donald J. Trump

Dear Mr. President,

We unite in asking you to act to terminate immediately the ongoing covert programs of Electronic Warfare and COINTELPRO-based domestic terrorism that are currently being run by the US Intelligence agencies, US Military, US Homeland Security, and their contractors in the name of Electronic “Surveillance” and National Security against the American population.

As you enter this office for the first week, it is possible the Deep State and unelected shadow government that apparently hovers behind all those elected to the government of the United States will present these covert programs to you as normative Intelligence and surveillance activity necessary for the preservation of National Security.

As Intelligence analysts, human rights activists, advocates, whistleblowers, writers, scientists, victims, and highly productive and accomplished members of society with varied science, arts, and humanities backgrounds in critical thinking, systems analysis, engineering, education, healthcare, law, and Intelligence, we are here to inform you otherwise: These are NOT normative Intelligence and Surveillance activities. Using the deadly weapons of Electronic Warfare, these are organized Terror programs, committing the most horrific crimes and human rights violations, causing grievous bodily harm to countless numbers of innocent citizens.

Surveiling and assaulting neither terrorists nor spies but the best and brightest, most productive, and most accomplished Americans, as well as whistle-blowers and activists, these programs seriously destabilize our civil society, are at risk of irreversibly degenerating the economic output of our country, and have already become our most shameful export abroad.

Situation On the Ground in Continental USA

Thanks to the trillions of dollars poured annually into Covert Operations funding, the carte blanche given to Intelligence and Military agencies, both pre- and post-911, and the convenience of classification and concealment of all manner of dubious activities as necessary for National Security, fraud, waste, and corruption at the highest levels of Government is now endemic. Corrupt factions in Intelligence agencies and in Military departments are now openly committing war crimes and crimes against humanity in acts of direct enmity against the American people.

  1. In the name of the War on Terror, a superior trafficking operation has been unleashed by the US Military, Department of Homeland Security, and the CIA on American citizens:

Current military and Intelligence directives (5240.1R, the NDAA, EO 12333, and the CIA’s AR 2-2) together permit the US military to detain citizens indefinitely, and to use those Americans “under surveillance” for experimentation purposes. This is used for an outright, public enslavement and torture of a large fraction of the US population.

The creation of Joint Targeting operations, Fusion Centers, Regional Information and Sharing Systems (RISS) programs with privatized Intelligence centers, as well as “Community Policing” and “Neighborhood Watch” initiatives have permitted a network of immoral and depraved operatives from Law Enforcement, the Intelligence agencies, and the military, using the guise of “national security” to conduct financially rewarding no-holds-barred human testing for the pharma, surveillance, and weapons industries, as well as to live out their personal sadism and depravity. It is a telling characteristic that the victims of these crimes are 70-80% women. The sex ratio is indicative of sexual violence and war crimes.

Meanwhile, an ever increasing army of civilian, quasi “Law Enforcement” personnel, sometimes taken from the dregs of society, is being trained, round the clock and used in set-up 24/7 operations, on those innocent Americans being targeted.

  1. In the name of the War on Terror, and masquerading as necessary Electronic Surveillance, condoned and orchestrated by US Homeland Security and the US Department of Justice, the most deadly weapons of Electronic Warfare are being routinely used on civilians under so-called surveillance inside their own homes including:
    • directed-energy and microwave weapons,
    • infrasonic and ultrasonic weapons,
    • military radar weapons,
    • neuro-weapons,
    • infections with biological or synthetic self-replicating nanotechnology agents (“smart dust”) that aid the readout of brain activity.

These are military weapons of war, designed to incapacitate, degrade, and destroy human organs, nerves, bodies, and brains; they are further being used inhumanely, in non-stop, 24/7 scenarios of attack.

In addition, CIA/DIA/DARPA/NSA agents also run covert interrogation exercises, mind control operations, and behavior modification programs (extensions of MK ULTRA and the original Nazi death-camp experiments) on their brains.

A vast apparatus of sophisticated stealth Electronic Warfare and Signals Intelligence equipment carried on planes, drones, helicopters, satellites, cell towers, ground-vehicles—and involving the complicity of all Intelligence agencies, such as the NRO, NGSA, and Federal agencies such as the FAA and NASA is being used for this purpose.

Those being hit with Electronic Warfare weapons are also being subjected daily to COINTELPRO actions or “Zersetzung”—organized stalking, crowding, mobbing, obstructing, brighting, flashing, noise harassment carried out by the FBI’s Infragard, as well as US Neighborhood Watch groups.

These are joint US Military and Intelligence programs of domestic torture, hidden under cover of biometric surveillance, physical surveillance, and electronic surveillance by a cynical and corrupt Homeland Security/Department of Justice mechanism, which has permitted the use of cover-story labels to conceal the use of violence on American citizens.

  1. In the name of the War on Terror, in 2017, American neighborhoods and communities have been transformed from calm, peaceful, and neighborly communities into predator vs. prey, i.e. divided holdouts of covert spying, snitching, Electronic Warfare, smear campaigns, and studied COINTELPRO attacks on neighbors, planned and coordinated through federal government-sponsored intelligence, information and command centers at the national and local levels, such as the Regional Information Sharing System (RISS), the U.S. Department of Justice, and the network of Fusion Centers.

At core of these attacks are the innocent Americans being wrongfully targeted and defamed as extremists, terrorists, spies, enemy combatants: often the most upright in communities, people of conscience and community spirit, integrity and accomplishment, entrepreneurship and creativity, innocence and impeccable character, people targeted not for their potential for criminality but for their innate power as attractors and disseminators of positive community influence.

The coterie of criminals from inside the FBI/DHS/CIA/NSA and local Law Enforcement and RISS centers involved in these programs openly lie in neighborhoods to name these innocents terrorists or spies, open investigations on innocents, start slander and defamation campaigns on innocents, and then corral whole communities into helping them surveil, spy, sabotage, and slander them, under threat of high fines and jail time.

By these means, whole lives are destroyed: employment is sabotaged, lies are circulated, and families are torn apart.

Neighbors become collaborators and complicit when they let Electronic Weapons operators freely enter their neighborhoods and homes, using their driveways and properties to install antennas and conduct tracking operations.

Collaborators are paid handsomely and bribed with home renovations, new cars, and tickets to luxury holidays and ball games. They are also trained in the operation of certain equipment, including cell phones to direct pulsed radiation attacks, which they now turn on their innocent neighbor.

This rewards and entrenches corrupt behavior in a manner that will utterly splinter and disintegrate our society for decades to come. Worst of all, this system of routine horrific abuses has developed a life of its own whereby ever more vindictive acts are committed and the perpetrators on the ground take free licence to do whatever they like at the expense of economically productive members in our society. Their excesses include electronic rape.

  1. Psychiatry has been roped in as political tool to subjugate those reporting these programs by naming them delusional, a verdict that Law Enforcement and CIA-controlled media then run with.

It must be stressed that the national silence on this issue as well as the distortions of reportage we see in mainstream-media mention of “Targeted Individuals” who report abusive surveillance programs is directly related to the vampiric control of major media that the CIA exerts, and their deliberate promotion of deception in coverage, in order to keep these violent, mutilatory programs of Electronic Weapon use on citizens clandestine and concealed.

Corruption at the levels of Law Enforcement and the Department of Justice, and the use of weaponized psychiatry combined with indiscriminate smears and slander of the victims has prevented the situation from being remedied.

A Public Scandal Of International Proportions

This has now become a proliferating and self-perpetuating industry of premeditated, systematic mutilation of some of the most productive members of our society.

By getting rid of people of conscience and integrity, whistleblowers, and activists in communities—through these extreme means of public torture and humiliation—it appears that the covert operators in Intelligence and military agencies running these programs seek more and more to create docile, deceitful, and pliable populations, people who will believe the official lie, people who will turn on their own friends and neighbors, people who will assist in stoning the innocent to death.

The extent and sadism of these deliberate bodily and brain assaults—which essentially involve the use of military weapons of war on peaceful, non-combatant, unarmed civilians, peacefully residing in their own country–amount to crimes against humanity being perpetrated against the American people.

And sadly, these Nazi death-camp programs of torture have become USA’s most prominent export along with our bombs, missiles, and drones.

To the disgrace of all Law-Enforcement, victims have been pleading for support publicly on social media for years. By now, the situation has gone beyond a disgrace and has become a public scandal of international proportions that is threatening the stability of our societies. Without a doubt, this problem is destroying the best and brightest in our nation and will inevitably affect the economic and creative capabilities of the US. This already sets us back in the race with other nations and seriously exposes the US to the danger of a hostile takeover.

Silent Holocaust Taking Place Inside the US

Please see attached here:

1) The Executive Summary: Neuropsychological and Electronic No-Touch Torture Report (Based on “The Torture Memos” and the Senate Intelligence Committee’s Declassified “Torture Report”) By Robert Duncan, A.B., S.M., M.B.A., Ph.D.

2) NSA whistleblower Karen Stewart’s succinct summation of what has happened to America today:

Under former President Bush and now continued under President Obama, what apparently started decades ago as illegal and clandestine programs of experiments on human subjects, such as the CIA’s MK ULTRA, has resulted in the proliferation of Defense Contractors such as Lockheed Martin, Raytheon, General Dynamics, and others, making secret agreements with Federal agencies such as DOD, DIA, NSA, DHS, etc., to allow them and related laboratories and universities to expand inhumane experimentation programs such as illegal experiments for Directed Energy Weapons on unwitting and non-consenting American citizens.

The scam goes like this, random people, or people who are dissidents or whistleblowers are purposely mislabeled as “terrorists” and put on an Enemies List, which is then turned over to Defense Contractors to target under perverted interpretations of NDAA and PAA.

This allows them to engage the Military and Law Enforcement in either the active harassment and torture of individuals illegally targeted for fraudulent cause, or it gives the Defense Contractors carte blanche to commit criminal assault upon innocent citizens while demanding (unconstitutionally) that Police stand down and do nothing to help their victims.

Please read the full statement here.

Please Act Now To Stop These Crimes Against Humanity in the USA and Worldwide

To stop these crimes against humanity we, the undersigned, request that you immediately:

  • Stop all of these surveillance, testing, and experimentation programs.
  • Stop and revoke all mandates permitting the US military to test weapons on citizens.
  • Repeal and revoke all civil and military directives which permit non-consensual experimentation on Americans.
  • Call out the National Guard to confiscate all portable EMF-weapons and radar/sonic/scalar surveillance devices, and haul off to prison anyone – including Feds, law enforcement, etc., found with them as they violate many many sections of 18 USC in regard to weapons of mass destruction.
  • Freeze all programs of surveillance being run by any and every agency in the DOJ and Homeland Security apparatus.
  • Force the open publication of the list of names of all people who have been targeted with organized stalking, EMF and neuroweapons by agencies at the federal, state, and local level for the past thirty years.
  • Compel disclosure of the medical parameters of these classified, covert, special access surveillance and torture programs from all Universities and research institutions, all Defense and Intelligence contractors, departments, and agencies.
  • Compel disclosure to each victim of his/her file containing what experiments have been conducted, what has been injected or implanted, what nanotechnology has been administered, and provide immediate, fully-compensated medical help in scanning/implant removal, radiation-damage treatment, & taking other medical/health measures against the long-term consequences of these crimes.
  • Fully re-imburse to victims all medical costs and family funeral expenses sustained during the course of these torture programs, and plan to provide continuous compensation for all victims’ health expenses until death.
  • Cut funding for all surveillance programs currently being run on named American citizens.
  • Cut all covert operations funding for any and every agency, in particular the CIA.
  • Compel mainstream media to fully and openly detail these programs of torture on citizens.
  • Root out all personnel employed in these programs, starting from the top.
  • Set in motion a Congressional investigation, to fully uncover and disclose details of these programs.
  • Dismantle all agencies and military groups whose record shows shameless participation in these crimes against humanity.
  • Work closely with your counterparts and with agencies abroad to ensure the same results of restoration of human rights and freedoms, worldwide.

These crimes against humanity need to be stopped if the United States of America wants to retain its national resilience and keep the goodwill of its partners worldwide.

You have an opportunity today to set right many historic wrongs. Much is made of America’s history of slavery. Yet this reality on the ground today shows us, that with the stealth weapons of Electronic Warfare and Neurowarfare, slavery has entered a new phase.

You have said:

There should be no fear — we are protected, and we will always be protected.

We will be protected by the great men and women of our military and law enforcement and, most importantly, we are protected by God.

…We will make America safe again.”

–President Donald J. Trump, Inauguration Day Address, 1/20/2017

But there are NO laws on the books today in the USA—land of the free and home of the brave—to prevent non-consensual experimentation on humans. Americans today are enslaved and are exporting this medieval travesty into every corner of the world.

Your children and grandchildren are just as much at risk as ours.

Please act today to put an end to these horrific, shameful crimes against humanity which are tearing apart our society.

Sincerely,

Ramola D, USA
Author, Journalist, Activist

Karen Melton Stewart, USA
NSA Intelligence Analyst, Ret.

Dr. Katherine Horton, Germany
Particle Physicist, Systems Analyst

Ricardo Camilo López, USA
Theoretical Physicist, Math & Science Teacher, Semiotician

Paul Baird, BEc. LLB, Australia
Human Rights Advocate

Eyerly Felder, USA
Human Rights Activist, Foster Parent, Podcast Host and Journalist

Rosanne Marie Schneider, USA
Author of “Surveillance, Torture and Control in the Modern World”
Former Artist, Animal Rescuer, and International Business Owner | Now Victim

Regis Burke, MSW, USA

Leo E. Garcia, USA

Teresa Bender, R.N., ASN, Harrisburg, PA, USA
Graduated Magna Cum Laude. Phi Theta Kappa member.
Service connected disabled veteran of USAF, 1989-1993.
Honorably discharged. Served during First Gulf War.
Interviewed by news media in West Virginia. Video on YouTube link: “Adult Bullying, West Virginians speak out”. Also participated in Targeted Individual awareness video titled “Targeted Individuals, A Plea for Help”, filmed in NJ in 2014.

Robert I. Walker, USA
Human Rights Activist, Vietnam Veteran, Christian

Seth Farber, Ph.D., USA
Author, Psychologist

Gregory A Mann, USA
Former Marine, Retired Dept. Of Defense
Combined service 27 years.Whistleblower.

Margaret Zawodniak, RN, BSN, USA

Amy L, USA
Licensed Massage Therapist

Joseph Quevedo, B.S. International Business, USA
Certified Logistics Technician

Mariana Maritato M.S., CCC-SLP, C-PESL, HC, Poland

Herman Winston, USA
US Army Veteran, Ex-Police Officer, Mechanic

Dr. Millicent Black, MACM, MMFT, USA
Refuge From the Storm Church, Columbia, TN
Pastor, Activist, Researcher

Tracy A. Wellons, USA
Biomedical Research Scientist

Kenneth Peartree, USA
Senior Master Sergeant, US Air Force (Ret.)

Virginia Sealey, USA
Louisiana State University graduate, Health and Physical Education.
Commercial Real Estate Broker (Ret.)

Captain Gary W. Kassbaum M.M., Canada
Senior Regional Investigator – Marine, Transportation Safety Board

Alec Devere Rafter, NYU Graduate, B.F.A., USA
Actor, Writer, Musician

Ben Colodzin Ph.D., California, USA
H-SCADA profiler (Human-Supervisory Control and Data
Acquisition Systems) for targeted victims

Paul Grigun, USA

Thomas A. Dickey, USA
U.S. Army, Retired

Mr. Robert Vincent Leaf, USA
HVAC Technician, App.

Mike Patrick, USA

Mandi (Deedee) Durrence, USA
Self-Employed, Construction, Farming

Barbara Hyseni, USA
Sergeant in the US Air Force
Christian Ordained Minister

Geri Kemp, BS in Business/Finance, MPA, USA
Certified Business Official, Educational Facilities Planning,
School Business Management (Ret.)
National Youth Equestrian Program Organizer

Denise S. Pompl, USA

Donna Stanley, USA
Mother, daughter, grandmother, friend, American, Retired Corrections Officer

Lori Tolbert-Carroll, USA

Charmaine Thomas, USA

Guy Potter, USA
35-year victim

Ms. Maura Sheehan, RN, BSN

Rochelle Jones, USA
Ordained Minister, CA

Juanita Hardnett, GA, USA

Sherri M Guarnieri, USA

Edith Diane Schutza, TX, USA

Michele Kimbrough, USA
Retired, Department of Corrections

Kola Boof
Award-Winning Novelist and Television Writer

Bonnie Hunt, USA
Retired Comm. College Instructor, College Lecturer,
and HS Teacher, MBA, MS, CPA (Inactive)

Jeaneine M. Heaney, USA
Christian

Arlene Johnson BA, MLS, USA
Publisher/Author | http://www.truedemocracy.net

Cathy L. Wright, M.S., CCC-SLP, USA
B.A. in English, B.S. in Communication Sciences and Disorders,
M.S. in Communication Disorders.
Speech-Language Pathologist. Whistleblower.

Angela Farrell, USA
BS, Psychology, BSW from West Virginia University.
National Sales Award 2005, 2008. Pharmaceutical representative.
Currently: Yoga , aerobic and Silver Sneaker instructor YMCA.
Health and wellness instructor.

Mrs. Sherri A. Marquis, AA Business, BA Legal Studies, MS Mgmt, RI, USA
U.S. Navy Journalist – 12.5 years, honorably discharged with service-connected disability.
Dept.of Defense (Navy, Army, Marine Corps) Contract Specialist/Contracting Officer, GS-13, 8 years, WHISTLEBLOWER
Lockheed Martin Enterprise Information Systems (Orlando) and Missiles and Fire Control (Orlando) Intellectual Property Paralegal and Contracting Officer
Currently: unemployed, blacklisted, isolated, tortured and psychologically injured

Leila M S Gutowski, RN BS, BSN, VA, USA

Cheryl Weinrich, VA, USA
Former employee of SAIC, Inc., Employed from 2000 to 2010.
Contracted out 2009-’10 as a Document Control Specialist and Courier with the Missile Defense Agency.
Former student at Northern Virginia Community College, Annandale and Alexandria, VA, 1982 to 2000: Travel and Tourism, Psychology and Information Technology.

Lorenzetta Whitfield, USA
Lillian Whitfield, USA
Tanya Whitfield, USA
(Sisters targeted since May 2013)

John Thomas Christiana, USA
BS Degree CSULB; MS Degree, Kaplan Univ, 4.0; Law Student, 2L
Everest Summiter | Human Rights Advocate
Targeted Individual Victim | Federal Lawsuit Plaintiff

John Leon Anderson, CT, USA
13-year victim

Nina Elhawary Duvall, USA
Drug Alcohol Tech | Working with Ms. Massie Munroe on her campaign and book.

Mark Mandigo, USA

Muguet Burgos, CCNY, USA
Photographer

Innocentia Merchant, UK

Jessica Charpentier, MA, USA

Charles Pak, USA
Disabled Iraq Veteran 2004-2008
Tortured victim of remote technology 2007-current

Dominic Friscia, USA

Alicia Ogburn, and children, PA, USA

Amy Anderson, CA
Human Rights Activist

Constance Hannah Rose, Pacifica, CA
Artist, Author (The Joy Thieves)
Creative Director and Entrepreneur

Edward L. Spencer, MD
Neurology Retired, Researcher, Author

Dianne Renee Chandler
B.B.A. Business Administration
M.S.S. Strategic Studies, U.S. Army War College
M.S. Acquisition and Contract Management
LTC , USAR retired Veteran 28 years Service tortured victim since 2012 after filing an EEO complaint Dianne Chandler vs. Secretary of the Army John M. McHugh

Kathleen Haston, BA Psychology, USA

William Brock, Boston, MA, USA

Patrick Cleary, USA
B.S. Communication Arts from Cornell University, 1991.
Disabled teacher, social worker, and activist.

Harold Hubbard, disabled, USA

Marina Ragsdale, USA
Crew member at McDonald’s | Victim

Jeannette Eileen Fess, USA
Former Realtor | Victim

Takele Erko, Ethiopia
BSc. Chemistry | TI for 6 years

Dr. Helen Tsigounis, Australia
Author of “The Red Back Web”: http://docdro.id/dOiUm27
Targeted 20 years.

Caroline Coon, Tiburon, CA
Owner of store “Little Black Dress”

Marina Abramycheva, NY, USA

Agnieszka Kubicka, USA
26 years old | Student, Restaurant Worker

Tiffany Fusini, BA in Sociology and Gender Studies
Neuro-Behavioral Specialist

Mečislav Chorzempa, Computer Programmer, Czech Republic

Judith Greschus, Detmold-Germany
Acknowledged politically persecuted person of the GDR regime(certificate “C”)

Elke Malone, Germany
55 years, Educator

Thomas Steinke, USA
Independent Contractor
OTR Truck Driver

Andrew Furey, PA, USA

Terrance Bass, USA
Retired Musician and Marketing Professional

Geoffrey Beattie, N.I., UK

Ricki Leggett, USA
Victim for 15 years.

Stanley Heavrin, Louisville, KY, USA

Debra Matheny, Hibbing, Minnesota, USA
Anti Public Corruption Activist, Investigative Blogger, 3 generations of targets. My daughter and granddaughter, murdered.

Mr. Adair Rutherford Buckner, I.

Edgard Rene Romero Cruz
Creative genius, Artist, Mind Slave.

Dagmar Palmerova, Prague, Czech Republic
Degree in Economics

Beth Ruegg, USA
Targeted victim for decades

Paul Lucas, BSBA, Finance and Accounting, USA
Senior Accountant/Analyst for International Corporation

Nathan Entrekin, USA
Graphics/Media Artist, LDS church member

Laura Entrekin, USA
CNA Manager, LDS church member

Mr. Tobin Dresser, Bend, Oregon, USA
Freelance Writer

Andrea McCoy, BA, USA

Patricia Angulo, USA
Intake Clinical Coordinator, Personal Trainer, Aunt, Case Manager

Gülay Daricili (female), Germany
Certified Interpreter and Lecturer

Lisa R. Becker, Milwaukee, WI
BS, Human Environment & Design, graduated with honors in 1989.
Under surveillance since college, tortured with electronic surveillance since 2007.

Toshiko Namiki, Japan

Dolly Guenthner, USA
Whistleblower on the City of Elizabethtown, KY municipality and the KY Retirement System.
Terminated employee from the City of Elizabethtown, after 20+ years

Alan J. Bellina, USA
Amy L. Bellina, USA

Mary Fehr, New Mexico, USA
Retired journeyman CNC machinist
TI 2 years +
Catapulted into surveillance program by Ohio Neighborhood Watch

Darleen Palmeira, Kapaa, Hawaii
Targeted since 2015

Helmut Michael, Germany
I support the memorandum.
As to our personal experience:
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=oMqWfh7TZhI

Stephen O Neill, Sligo, Ireland
Targeted since 2005

Susan C., USA
Associate Underwriter

Ursula J. Barboza, USA
Juris Doctor (1995), M.A. Library and Information Science (2008)

Heide Klebsattel, Gutach/Germany
Designer
TI since 2010

Benjamin Miller, Jersey City, New Jersey, USA

Robert Stephen Spicer, USA
1-year aware TI

Michael McKay
B.S./B.A. UC Davis International Relations/Japanese
M.S. SFSU Physics

Linda L. Jensen (Maiden name, Christopherson/first marriage, Vegoe)
Musician, poet, educator of young people, legal and medical secretary, missionary, mother, grandmother, gardener.
Also an author, and activist for the rights of individuals for justice, “life, liberty and pursuit of happiness” in accordance with the Declaration of Independence of the United States of America.

Oskar Svärd, Master’s in Political Science, Sweden

Gabriele Plank, Munich, Germany
65 years old, Teacher, German Gymnasium

Mr. Christian Pfeifer, Luckenwalde, Germany

James F. Lico, USA
BS, Computer Science, Associate’s Degrees in Biology, Electronic Engineering
Retired Software Support Specialist, Systems Administrator
Targeted since 2010

Donna Wilkinson, USA
Retired

Chloe V. Rose, USA
Service connected 90% disabled Gulf War veteran, USN.
Honorably discharged 1980-1991.

Kathryn Sorensen USA
Retired Financial Management
Recovery Agent

Martina Pearce, Sales Manager

Leonard Loch, Hamburg, Germany.
Merchant, Graduate in Business Administration.
Targeted since 2003.

Kimberly Buckner, USA
Researcher, Whistleblower, Human Rights Advocate

Connie Hicks, USA

Marcus George Hopkins, NM & MN, USA
Ba.Sc. Wildlife Science
Heavily targeted for 6 years by group of technologically advanced, vicious criminals, including a corrupt NSA, FBI and Private Investigator Employee(s)

Steve Granite, USA
General labor
30-year victim

Bennetta McKenzie, IL, USA
AUTISM MOM – Bachelors in Accounting, MBA, CPA
Targeted 14 years

J. McKenzie, IL, USA
Autistic college student, Mathematics major

Clint McLean, MS, Computer Science (distinction), South Africa

Marie-Luise von Neuberg, Karlsruhe,Germany

Detlef Müller, Minden, Germany
TI for more than 30 years

Paolo Fiora, London, United Kingdom
Director, LESAG, London End Stalking Action Group

Atsuko Miyata, Japan
Mother, wife, homemaker, landlord
Victim for 28+years

Dr. Cherie Larsson, Ph.D, MBA, BA, Florida, USA
Ph.D in industrial Organizational Psychology

Irina Wickholm, Russia
Victim, and Human Rights Activist

Tera Wills, Ph.D, College Professor, USA
Ph.D. in combination of Nuclear Engineering and Radiochemistry, University of Arkansas
(40 years in US/from Iran)
Targeted since 2012

Liuda Balcius, USA/Lithuania
Author, Blind Social Worker, Teacher of the Blind, Humanitarian and Adventurer
Blind victim of reprehensible directed energy weapons
and unconscionable chemical poisonings for more than 20 years.
Looking forward someday to a peaceful, private life without pain and torture.

Catherine (Kate) Ryan, R.N. Retired
Former Representative in Consumer Electronics
Activist/Whistleblower of an Extraordinary Rendition site in Italy, inappropriate planned disposal of PCBs through insert in bathroom tiles.
SOA Watch/Supporter, Runs Support Group for TIs in New England

Slawomir Wiktor, MA (Magister) Philosophy, Poland
TI for 7 years, Activist with Polish TI association, STOPZET

Zofia Filipiak, Poland
President, Polish TI Association STOPZET

Brandon Armstrong, USA
Truck Driver. Targeted American.

Danuta Gajewska,Poland
Teacher

Gretta Fahey, Newbrook, Claremorris, Ireland
A Targeted Individual for fourteen years.

Mrs. Hadia Fehlauer, Leimen, Germany
62 years old, Housewife and former Translator

Mr. Frank Hennrich, Walldorf, Germany
54 years old, dipl.-Cosmology Physicist, IT-product Owner

Mrs. Angelika Nowatzki, Großaitingen, Germany
66 years old, Housewife

Mr. Stefan Prechtel, Crailsheim, Germany

Lori Budd, ME, USA
Accountant
Targeted since 2005

Shelly Hoyle,WA,USA

Jane Kiesel, USA

Debra Poulsen, USA

Carmen de los Santos, USA
Information Technology Technician
Internal Revenue Service

Dr. Matthew Aaron, USA
Neurobiologist, Geneticist, Science Journalist

Debra Anda, Minneapolis, Minnesota
Generational victim of COINTELPRO
Mother Murdered 1970’s
Life of chaos, peace In Christ Jesus

(An updated version of this memo, on an ongoing basis, will be maintained on this page at The Everyday Concerned Citizen. Please send an email anytime to ramolad@hushmail.com if you wish to sign this memo. Please share this information — which is being suppressed by corporate, mainstream, CIA-controlled media — widely. Stand up for America today, and for all of humanity worldwide, add your name, and inform others. These crimes Must be publicized the world over, and publicly addressed. )

Currently Updated: 3-24-2017

Pdf for Download: Memo to President Trump on Domestic US Torture Programs Running Under Cover of Surveillance–3-24-2017

Seth Farber, Ph.D: The Psychiatric Metanarrative, Targeted Individuals, and the Deep State: A Response to The New York Times

Not long ago, in June 2016, The New York Times published a piece by Mike McPhate, titled “United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers,” purporting to offer an unbiased journalistic exploration of the subject of “Targeted Individuals.” This piece garnered quite some attention and consternation from among the ranks of those actually being targeted, surveiled, and assaulted today with EMF/sonic/scalar weapons–as well as those educated, informed Americans who are well-aware that such high-tech surveillance, targeting, and assault is indeed occurring–and was covered here earlier, in response, as well as here, in reportage of a key interviewee, Dr. Robert Duncan’s response.

Now Dr. Seth Farber, a deeply insightful psychologist, psychotherapist, scholar, and author steps forward to address the glaring omissions, elisions, deceptions, and inadequacies of Mr. McPhate’s article, pointing up the hollowness of its claim to objectivity, and offering a comprehensive discursive response that considers the diverse aspects of contemporary psychiatry, contemporary surveillance, historic non-consensual human experimentation, historic covert Intelligence operations, whistleblower testimony, classified military research, neuroweaponry, and the increasingly-evident hand of the “Deep State” which bear on this issue. I am pleased to publish this tremendous tour de force by Dr. Farber, honored that my words are included in it, and highly recommend that every single psychiatrist, psychologist, medical professional, and journalist in the USA and worldwide read it, closely and completely, to fully understand the extreme nature of Targeting in our midst today, as well as the unethical, colluding role played by psychiatrists and co-opted Media, in protecting it.

ayt-problems-with-psychiatristsaIn Dr. Farber’s words: The development of a totalitarian regime—nominally a constitutional republic—in which human rights and the constitutional right to liberty are routinely trampled upon is today an ominous prospect in America.” The prevention of such a development,” he emphasizes, is now dependent upon the willingness of small minorities of individuals who are inspired by transcendental ethical ideals to mobilize larger groups to oppose the human rights abuses that are committed by the Deep State and by the mental health system… I hope with all my heart that this article will be the harbinger of such profoundly-needed change. — Ramola D, December 2016

***

Dr. Seth Farber, Ph.D, is an author, psychotherapist, and an editor of The Journal of Mind and Behavior –he completed his doctorate in psychology at California Institute of Integral Studies in 1984. His work has been influenced by such renowned dissident psychiatrists as the late Thomas Szasz, M.D. who wrote the Foreword to Farber’s first book, Madness, Heresy and the Rumor of Angels: The Revolt against the Mental Health System (1993). See his books and email address at http://www.sethHfarber.com.

The Psychiatric Metanarrative, Targeted Individuals, and the Deep State: A Response to The New York Times

by Seth H. Farber, Ph.D

Introduction
The Corporate Media and Psychiatry: Veiling the Human Rights Violations of the Deep State
Advancing the Psychiatric Metanarrative, Neutralizing Deep State Critics
The Psychiatric Fantasy System and the Battle Against Non-Conformity
The Psychiatric Pharmaceutical Industrial Complex
The Deep State on Trial
The CIA Assassination of Its Own Agent — Protecting Whose Security?
Whistleblowers Post 9/11
TIs and No-Touch Torture
Neuroweaponry and Classified Military Research
Discussion of the New York Times Article About TIs Based on the Psychiatric Metanarrative
The CEP and the Power of the Ethically Guided Minority

Introduction

As a dissident psychologist-therapist and critic of the mental health system, I hope the Mike McPhate article in The New York Times will open the eyes of targeted individuals (“TIs”) and other supporters of constitutional rights, to the fraudulent nature of the mental health professions (“United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers,” June 11, 2016). Most TIs already know that if they are mentioned at all by the mainstream (i.e., corporate) press, it is to be ridiculed as “conspiracy theorists,” or dismissed as plain psychotics. The term “TI” refers to an individual who is a victim of organized group stalking and non-consensual harassment or experimentation with the use of advanced neuro-biological weaponry–these activities are believed to be initiated by Intelligence organizations. Ramola D (Dharmaraj), an award winning fiction-writer and poet, former English professor and social activist who became a TI in 2013, now an independent journalist, writes that the source of the targeting is “joint Military/Intel/Justice/Academic institutions.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Human Rights, Accessed July 2016). Mental health professionals with rare exceptions believe TIs are paranoid psychotics who are not “targeted” by anyone.

Back to Top

The Corporate Media and Psychiatry: Veiling the Human Rights Violations of the Deep State

McPhate’s article exemplifies the collusion of the mainstream (corporate) media with Psychiatry, thus veiling (unwittingly, at this locus near the bottom of the hierarchy of power) the operations of the Deep State. I use “Psychiatry” as a synecdoche to denote the mental health system with its panoply of psychologists, social workers and various mental health professionals and workers. I use it also to denote the entire psychiatric-pharmaceutical industrial complex since the mental health system is oriented toward pushing toxic drugs (‘prescribing medications”)– and is financed largely by the multi-billion dollar pharmaceutical industry.

McPhate’s article in The New York Times is a chilling example of journalists’ willingness to abdicate their power of critical thought and leave the determination of what is “reality” in the hands of the secular priesthood which reigns today in the name of psychiatry –– although it is almost certain that had McPhate seriously discussed the Deep State, his article, as mentioned, would not have been printed. In McPhate’s article the pretense of journalistic “balance” is virtually abandoned. Instead we hear only one authoritative voice –- that of the psychiatrist, the mental health professional. (A month later The New York Times published another article that also deferred to the psychiatric metanarrative, “The Baton Rouge Gunman and ‘Targeted Individuals,’” July 19, 2016, accessed October, 2016.) Although journalists defer habitually (i.e., without deliberation) to the “expertise” of psychiatrists, the editorial board and publishers of the corporate newspapers like The New York Times have obviously deliberately decided not to print articles that discuss the operations or even the existence of targeting by “the Deep State.” Thus it is not surprising that McPhate wrote an article that would not have threatened any of the vested interests discussed below.

Peter Dale Scott, Professor Emeritus at the University of California, is most often associated with the esoteric and little known but increasingly publicized concept of the Deep State. It is the explicit or implicit root metaphor that is at the basis of the TI metanarrative, as well as the metanarrative of “9/11 Truthers,” critics of the official government account of the attacks on 9/11. The TI metanarrative is complex and has given rise to too many variations among its users. Hopefully the discussion here will provide enough background to give readers a rudimentary sense of the TI metanarrative and its understanding of the growing encroachment of the Deep State into the lives of ordinary Americans.

Scott describes the Deep State as

“a parallel secret government, organized by the intelligence and security apparatus, financed by drugs [and other sources], and engaging in illicit violence, to protect the status and interests of the military against threats from intellectuals, religious groups, and occasionally the constitutional government.” (Voltaire Network interview with Scott, April 6, 2011, accessed 2016.)

I would add that it protects not just military interests but corporate and law enforcement interests as well, and that it is largely unaffected by public opinion or elections and operates autonomously beyond the reach of the law, behind the structure of the legislative, judicial, and executive branches of government, influencing the operations of these branches and maintaining social control in societies that are nominally democratic. Ironically, although targeting maintains social control by creating an atmosphere of fear, it also, presumably inadvertently, transforms many of those targeted individuals who are not political activists (the majority of TIs) into political activists and critics of the Deep State and its anti-democratic functions.

Ramola D, an eloquent spokesperson for the TI narrative, tersely and succinctly conveys in a few words the extent of targeting today:

“All over the US today, and indeed the world, people are being nonconsensually rolled into covert programs of 24/7 physical assault, torture, and slow-kill assassination by EMR microwave/radio/sonic neuroweapons, also called Directed Energy Weapons or Non Lethal Weapons; 24/7 remote access, manipulation, and assault of their brains and central nervous systems; and 24/7 “full spectrum surveillance” involving overt community surveillance, concealed electronic monitoring, and public/community stalking, accompanied by discrediting and social ostracism by defamation and slander campaigns, and in-community harassment and PsyOps projects (more on all this below & in succeeding posts).” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, 2015: “Targeted Individuals” are Non-Consensual Subjects in Criminal, Clandestine, Classified “Top Secret” MKULTRA-Extended Mind & Behavior Control/Torture Experimentation by Joint Military/Intel/Justice/Academic Institutions, as well as Targets of COINTELPRO and Electronic Warfare.)

But despite its prevalence, targeting amazingly remains largely “in the dark” to those who are not participants or victims. Wikispooks notes,

“In contrast to overtly authoritarian rule, deep states must operate more or less secretly, like terrorist groups, so preserving secrecy is a high priority. Control of the commercially-controlled media is essential to the effective preservation of secrecy needed for the deep state to work effectively.” (Accessed 2016 at Wikispooks/Deep State)

Psychiatry also plays a critical role in maintaining secrecy — in veiling the operations of the Deep State — although I will argue here that it does this even though the majority of mental health professionals are completely unaware of the existence of the Deep State. It is able to play this function unwittingly because the profoundly conformist nature of Psychiatry leads it to define any deviation from the norm as pathology — including any belief in the existence of a shadow government or Deep State (such a belief is disparaged as “conspiracy theory”), let alone being a victim of this entity (which is deemed “delusional”).

This is not to deny that a small but influential group of leading figures and institutions in Psychiatry have, from the establishment of the CIA to date, consciously (and secretively) collaborated with non-consensual and thus illegal experiments carried out by the CIA and other intelligence agencies, and psychologists with the sanction of the American Psychological Association: APA psychologists recently played a role in designing torture of Guantanamo detainees. (In fact leaders of both APAs have long had a close relationship with the CIA.)

This led to a backlash by membership of the American Psychological Association—organized by a few principled psychologists—which voted in 2008 to prohibit psychologists from working in national security settings, against the opposition of the APA leadership (Roy Eidelson, 2013, “APA Fiddles While Psychology Burns,“ in Psychology Today, August 5, 2013, accessed November, 2016).

(The activities of the infamous psychiatrist Ewan Cameron who reduced hundreds of patients to a vegetable-like state through intensive electroshock, funded by the CIA and the Canadian government, set a precedent followed by other mental health professionals who collaborated with the Deep State in designing and implementing programs of torture, used for various purposes. (See Colin Ross, 2006, The CIA Doctors, Richardson, Texas: Manitou).

But the attitude of mental health professionals to “mental patients” has been losing its soft edge of seemingly benign paternalism, and becoming increasingly punitive, although still wrapped in terminology of medical care. Psychiatry has undergone radical changes since the early 1960s when the state mental hospitals began to be emptied and the project of “deinstitutionalization” was announced. The state hospital population shrunk nationwide from over half a million in the late 1950s to 40,000 today. The ideal, if not the reality, was progressive–to reintegrate the “mentally ill” into the community. What took place was “transinstitutionalization” (see Thomas Szasz, 1998, Cruel Compassion, NY: Syracuse University Press): Patients were placed into small scale group homes and (originally) cheap hotels where they were given stupefying “anti-psychotic medication” and isolated from the community. Yet there were legal safeguards that were designed to protect arbitrary confinement and forced drugging of patients.

But the merger of psychiatry with the pharmaceutical industry created a new imperative — to confine ever more patients, to induct ever more persons into the mental health system, and to force psychiatric drugs on an ever increasing number of the “mentally ill.” Furthermore, as society has morphed into a national security state, so the mental health system has become more repressive and the legal safeguards of patients’ right to liberty have been razed. In the 1990s, states enacted involuntary outpatient commitment laws — the main purpose of these laws was to force “non-compliant” former mental patients to take neuro-toxic “anti-psychotic” drugs on an outpatient basis (see below). (The drugs in a “depot” form were injected into the patient’s body where it would be released gradually over the month.) In the psychiatric metanarrative, non-compliance is treated both as pathology and as misbehavior, as a sign that the patient is both mad and bad.

Recently, although the Murphy Bill (HR 2646, which passed the House in 2015) met resistance in the Senate, some of its worst provisions were incorporated into HR 34, the 21st Century Cures Act – a boondoggle for the pharmaceutical industry which lowers FDA safety standards (see Dr. Mercola, July 13, 2016, 21st-Century Cures or Corruption?) — which passed overwhelmingly in the Senate on December 7, 2016. This revised bill incorporates many of the worst provisions of the Murphy bill, including the one at the top of Psychiatry’s wish-list: The ability to force psychiatric treatment (psychiatric drugs) on anyone psychiatrists deem too mentally ill to realize drugs are “good” for them. In other words, a history of violence is no longer a criterion for forcing toxic drugs on “non-compliant” patients. Psychiatry will no doubt continue to push for those provisions not included in the new bill.

Patients’ rights activist Lauren Tenney, Ph.D. stated about the bill,

“It is urgent that people realize that no child will grow up without psychiatric evaluation. All people will become, in a generation or two, acclimated to being psychiatrized; psychiatry and its arms of drugs and institutions will become even more standard [than it is now] in our society.” (Mad in America, Nov 29, 2016, “Warning: A Psychiatric tsuNAMI is Upon U.S.”/From Katherine Hine–Warning, the US govt is trying to legalize forced psych drugging!)

Today in states across the country new hospitals “are being built in droves,” as Janet Phelan puts it. (See “Still Crazy After All These Years: Psychiatric Lockdown Returns to the US” in Activist Post, Oct 5, 2016, accessed November, 2016.) Sharon Cretsinger, social worker and director of Kent Empowerment Center, noted, about the Murphy Bill, that “the most frightening parts of [the Murphy Bill] are the severe limitations placed on PAIMI advocates (Protection and Advocacy for Individuals with Mental Illness) who are specifically prohibited from discussing with “individuals who lack insight into their condition” their right to refuse medication or act “against the wishes of their caregivers.” (Ibid)

PAIMI, an agency “which was specifically set up to address the needs and questions of individuals in treatment,” is prevented from advocating for patients, except in cases of “abuse and neglect.” The limits placed on advocates, Cretsinger says, “shows clearly that Murphy’s bill does not (want) anyone refusing treatment [‘medication’], or even talking about refusing treatment.” The Bill increases funding for involuntary out-patient commitment and for Assertive Community Treatment. Phelan describes ACT, “This enables teams of mental health workers to troll the streets, looking for homeless or other individuals to ‘treat’ in situ.” Of course typically ACT leads to involuntary treatment.

The bill also authorizes grants for “programs for infants and children at significant risk of developing, showing early signs of, or having been diagnosed with mental illness including serious emotional disturbance.” Those eligible for these services are defined as “a child from birth to not more than 5 years of age.”

This is an obvious effort to “funnel” babies into treatment with powerful psychotropic drugs–and create life-long (albeit a shortened life) customers for the pharmaceutical industry. Already there are 8 million children on psychotropic drugs. But, heavily lobbied by the drug industry, our representatives have decided to get more children hooked on drugs–decided to sacrifice babies on the altar of Mammon.

This is the stream of history into which TIs have entered, one which has seen a political battle against psychiatric coercion by patients themselves, beginning in the 1970s with the formation of the first “mental patients’ liberation” organizations. (For a history from 1960 to 2012, see Farber, 2012, The Spiritual Gift of Madness:The Failure of Psychiatry and the Rise of the Mad Pride Movement, Rochester, Vermont: Inner Traditions.) By 2016, the website Mad in America was booming-–with tens of thousands of readers every week, including many psychiatric survivors–– readers participate in discussions beneath the articles. But as dissent has flourished on the Internet, the movement against psychiatric coercion has shriveled in the “real” world. Patients were making progress but the tide began to reverse in the 1990s, and thereafter. The Murphy Bill, a product of post-9/11 America, represents a new, more pernicious, more repressive phase in the social control of mental patients. It mirrors the militarization of the police. (See Randy Balko, author of The Rise of the Warrior Cop , quoted at US Police Have Killed Over 5000 Civilians Since 9/11, MintPress News, accessed October, 2016.)

To what degree it will lead to deliberate collaboration of psychiatry with the military, law enforcement, and/or various agencies of the Deep State is unpredictable, although going full speed ahead on such a course risks the danger of polarization among mental health professionals who for the most part see themselves as “medical specialists” on a par with cardiologists and do not like to think of themselves as dirty cops. The backlash of APA membership’s against its leadership’s participation in scarcely veiled torture is indicative. (See James Risen, 2015, The New York Times, August 7, 2015, “Psychologists Approve Ban on Role in National Security Interrogations“.) At the top of the hierarchy of professionals we can infer that status-conscious professionals will be pleased, as always, to collaborate secretly with high status officials in Deep State agencies. The promulgation of the new psychiatric metanarrative will enable the majority of mental health professionals to tacitly co-operate with the Deep State with more extensive and more punitive modes of social control–while preserving their identity as medical helpers by defining TIs as just another category of “non-compliant psychotics”–-and with more punitive measures as a necessary response to the growing epidemic of mental illness and the emergence of more “troubling” (to use McPhate’s word), more “treatment-resistant” (a common professional term) manifestations of “psychosis.”

 

Back to Top

Advancing the Psychiatric Metanarrative, Neutralizing Deep State Critics

In fact McPhate’s article — strategically placed in The New York Times, the renowned bastion of (corporate) liberal journalism — helps to craft and popularize the emerging psychiatric metanarrative about TIs, which we will analyze below. (A metanarrative is a grand narrative, or theory that tries to give a coherent totalizing account to a variety of historical events and a multitude of human experiences.) As opposed to the psychiatric metanarrative, a TI metanarrative is also emerging and being used as a tool by TIs. While the narrative has a number of variations depending on the perspective of the individual theorist (whether a TI or not), it has a basic skeletal structure which has been shaped by the experiences and theories of many TIs and by the experiences and political theories of an increasing number of technical experts and whistle-blowers -– former employees of the CIA, NSA, and other Intelligence or military organizations.

These former employees are almost always highly educated and among the most intelligent strata of society, and include computer experts, highly sophisticated scientists (from electrical engineers to physicists) and spies. Intelligence agencies recruit the best and the brightest -– and increasing numbers of these persons are possessed by a keen conscience. Thus they find themselves morally unable to perform the tasks they are assigned or to sanction what they know is being done in the name of protecting national security.

If they are asked why they left the CIA or NSA, they invariably give the same answer. From William Binney who worked for the NSA for over 30 years before he resigned in 2001 to Edward Snowden, these persons will tell you with patriotic fervor that they took an oath, not to uphold the government or the NSA but to uphold the US Constitution. In other words these whistle-blowers argue that our actual government today as influenced by the agencies of the Deep State is in conflict with constitutional democracy as conceived by our founding fathers. Edward Snowden has given words and a face to today’s political dissident/whistle-blower in the US, persecuted or in exile ostensibly for giving information to the enemy, but in reality for exposing operations of the State to American citizens. (Chelsea or Bradley Manning did not receive equivalent public exposure -– primarily because she was imprisoned and silenced before she could speak to the Press.)

If McPhate even read any of the accounts by critics of the Deep State (he demonstrates no familiarity with their disclosures), he must have disregarded them, because the psychiatric metanarrative is presented in his article as the truth and the TI metanarrative is viewed through the prism of the psychiatric metanarrative as nothing more than a delusional symptom of the paranoid schizophrenic’s diseased mind. When McPhate describes TIs as unequivocally psychotic, he is ignoring or discounting the accounts of some of the smartest former employees of Intelligence, including those who designed the technology used for surveillance and control, and including those experts he interviewed. Robert Duncan, a whistle-blower and former CIA employee who helped to develop the cybernetic weapons that to his dismay are being used on innocent Americans, was interviewed and then virtually ignored (see below) by McPhate.

McPhate’s article is based uncritically on the psychiatric metanarrative that journalists for the corporate press are trying to make the official metanarrative: All TIs are mentally ill persons–they are not individuals who are victims of group-stalking and various forms of non-consensual experimentation with neuro-weaponry. (McPhate implies that not all Tis are mentally ill but seems to consider that fact irrelevant to his discussion.) They are psychotics who come together with other psychotics and reinforce each other’s delusions — thus they phobically avoid consulting mental health professionals to get the professional help they need.

The psychiatrist is the socially sanctioned arbiter of what is real (for most persons in secular society), and the TI’s metanarrative with its references to historical events and accounts by contemporary whistle-blowers and its claims about the power of the (secretive) Deep State is not even recounted except very briefly and elliptically by the journalist — ostensibly because the psychiatric authority has determined it provides no cues to reality and it will only mislead readers. Psychiatry’s business is the construction and reproduction of “reality” — psychiatry provides the stamp of authority for the official reality and works with journalists to propagate the new metanarrative about TIs. By failing to interrogate power, journalists are betraying their vocation as the 4th estate, which historically held private and government institutions accountable to democratic ideals and exposed potential totalitarian and plutocratic threats to democracy. (Today such journalism can be found in books and in Internet magazines, but only rarely in the mainstream Press.)

Most persons including TIs assume that the psychiatric diagnostic system is legitimate. This is why TIs often claim they were “misdiagnosed.” They assume that there are correct diagnoses, free of bias, just as in other fields of medicine. Many TIs think if they find an honest psychiatrist they will be cleared, legitimized, given a “correct” diagnosis, not realizing that the psychodiagnostic system itself is a fantasy, a delusion! They don’t understand that every mental health diagnosis is a misdiagnosis, that the system of psychodiagnosis is nothing but a collective fantasy -– in psychiatric terms, it is a consensually validated (financially remunerative) delusional system.

For example, TIs who have gone to the mental health system have typically been diagnosed as “schizophrenic,” “paranoid,” and with “delusional disorder.” All of these diagnoses imply the TI is hearing voices that do not exist, or imagining people are stalking her or manipulating her brain with neuro-weaponry/or attacking her body with remote-influencing technologies. In the psychiatric metanarrative on TIs’, the TI is so overwhelmed by a paranoid distrust of people in general that she fantasizes the government or the CIA or other malevolent forces are persecuting her.

Yet many TIs optimistically and/or naively think they can change their psychiatrist’s mind by presenting documentary evidence of the existence of these Deep State operations. What they do not understand is psychiatrists and other mental health professionals are indoctrinated to regard any behavior or allegations that deviate from the social norm as pathological. This is not surprising considering the historical function of Psychiatry was the control of deviants, of poor people, of mad people, the preservation of the status quo. (Since the 1980s, its function has also been to market drugs for its pharmaceutical partners.) The purpose of institutional “mental health” was not to rehabilitate people, to help them heal from their wounds or to promote progressive social change. (Some people were helped in unusual instances by mental health professionals -– this happened far more frequently in the private sector.) But the allegation that the government -– the CIA, the Military — is secretly using bizarre neuro-weaponry (or directed-energy weaponry) against Americans and subjecting them to gang stalking is not something the mental health professional wants to even consider. It is no surprise that in the emerging Psychiatric metanarrative, allegations of Deep State covert operations are construed as symptoms of paranoid delusions.

 

Back to Top

The Psychiatric Fantasy System and the Battle Against Non-Conformity

This is nothing new. Psychiatrists typically react to proponents of radical change by seeking to pathologize them. Braginsky and Braginsky did a series of studies in the early 1970s published in their book Mainstream Psychology:A Critique (see discussion in Sarbin, T. And Mancuso, J., Medical Diagnosis or Moral Verdict, 1980, NY; Pergamon Press). Psychiatrists watched an interview between a doctor and a pseudo-patient. In the first segment, the patients reported irritability, poor sleep, etc. In the second and third segment segments, they expressed either middle of the road or New Left views. In the fourth segment, both groups criticized mental health professionals.

Sarbin and Mancuso summarize: “As the New Left radical’s complaints shift from statement about self to statements about society, the patient is regarded as increasingly psychologically disturbed.” The moderate patient’s degree of psychopathology remains stable as he or she expresses anti-New Left sentiments. The judgments of the severity of the pathology of both groups “dramatically increase when they criticize mental health professionals” (Sarbin and Mancuso, 1980, pp.94-5). Even the politically moderate patient who was perceived as only moderately disturbed (despite being presented as a hospitalized mental patient) is diagnosed as very “psychotic” after his attack on the mental health profession.

The experiment was repeated with a different group of psychiatrists with one change: In the 4th segment, both groups make flattering statements about the mental health professionals, e.g. “helpful,” kind,” and “very special” people. The result for Segments 1-3 were the same but after watching Segment 4, the psychiatrists decided the patients were cured (p.95). This is an extreme reaction and one that likely reflected the fact that the psychiatrists did not know the patients’ diagnosis upon admission – the patient unlike in the study below did not feign psychotic symptoms — and (the fact) that the study was conducted during a more tolerant phase of the mental health system in the early 1970s as compared to today.

One would expect that today the patients upon praising mental health professionals would be deemed to be psychotics in remission, as was the case with Rosenhan’s experiment -– conducted during the same period but with patients identified as “schizophrenic.” Athough Rosenhan’s experiment was conducted at the same time, and the patients were cooperative, they did not go so far as to flatter the doctors. Furthermore psychiatrists in the Braginsky and Braginnsky experiment were not told the pseudo-patients’ original diagnosis was “schizophrenia”––since they did not complain of voices or delusions, they could as easily have been hospitalized for depression. Today psychiatry is more aggressive than in the early 1970s and even “normal” patients are regarded as mentally ill.

Surprisingly few people, even mental health professionals, know about the classic Rosenhan experiment; it created an explosion of controversy within the mental health field at the time,it appeared, although it never entered the public imagination. Rosenhan, a psychologist, and 7 mentally healthy associates–all went to emergency rooms of local hospitals and feigned they were having auditory hallucinations. The pseudo-patients included a psychology graduate student in his twenties, three psychologists, a pediatrician, a psychiatrist, a painter, and a housewife. Once admitted they acted completely normally-–but none of the staff suspected they were sane. Significantly, quite a few patients made comments to the pseudo-patients like, “You’re not really crazy.”

They were interviewed by psychiatrists or psychologists who wrote evaluations of the patients and interpreted all their present behavior as evidence of their schizophrenia, and claimed to discover the roots of their alleged schizophrenia in their early childhood experiences. (At the time of this experiment Psychiatry was still based on the psychoanalytic dogma that pathology was caused by incidents in early childhood). Rosenhan noted, “Once a person is designated abnormal all his other behaviors and characteristics are colored by that label. Indeed that label is so powerful that many of the pseudo-patients’ normal behaviors were overlooked entirely or profoundly misinterpreted.” (Accessed 2016 at isites.Harvard.edu: On Being Sane in Insane Places, by David L. Rosenhan (pdf))

It took most of the pseudo-patients weeks to obtain release–in order to do so, all had to agree to take psychiatric drugs (which they later flushed down the toilet–no longer possible) and agree with the psychiatrists that they were mentally ill. All were finally released in times ranging from 7 to 52 days with the diagnosis of “schizophrenia in remission.” Rosenhan noted in an interview many years later, “I told friends, I told my family: ‘I can get out when I can get out. That’s all. I’ll be there for a couple of days and I’ll get out.’ Nobody knew I’d be there for two months … The only way out was to point out that they’re [the psychiatrists] correct. They had said I was insane, [I told them] ‘I am insane; but I am getting better.’ That was an affirmation of their view of me.” (Accessed 2016 at Wikipedia/Rosenhan Experiment.) In other words, to get the psychiatrist’s approval, the patient must affirm the psychiatrist’s view of the patient. For the TI today, this would mean feigning acknowledgment of the truth of the psychiatric metanarrative about Tis-–that they were delusional.

The reason professionals could not tell the clients had not really had “psychotic” breaks (were not “insane”) is because “mental illness” is a projection of the psychiatrist– the projection is triggered by a few cues that do not necessarily include the symptoms of “schizophrenia.” Knowing the patient has the diagnosis itself is enough to trigger the projection — which is a major reason (in addition to the debilitating effects of the “meds”) — why “schizophrenia” (an emotional crisis) becomes chronic once the patient becomes inducted into the mental health system: She is regarded as incurably ill and these expectations become a self-fulfilling prophecy. As holistic physician Gary Kohls put it, “The truth is that people diagnosed as ‘mentally ill’ for life are often simply those unfortunates who have found themselves in acute or chronic states of potentially reversible crises or temporary ‘overwhelm’ due to any number of preventable, treatable, and even curable situations.” (“Kris Kristofferson’s Dramatic Cure of his “Incurable” Alzheimer’s Disease/Another Iatrogenic Illness Unveiled” by Dr. Gary G. Kohls, on GlobalResearch.ca, accessed September, 2016.)­

Since psychiatry is an agency of surveillance and control, it views with apprehension any patient who resists, or critiques its power. In the Braginsky and Braginsky experiment, a radical critique of society was viewed as a sign of pathology. Mental health professionals regard anyone who comes for help as mentally ill to some degree. If the patients imply that there is something wrong with the world then the psychiatrist qua social control agent is likely to regard them as paranoid — in the psychiatrists’ world view, society is “natural,” normative, even if it needs a little patching up, and “maladjustment” is a symptom of “pathology.”

Radical psychiatrist R. D. Laing saw it very differently: This reification of an insane world was itself a symptom of insanity, and “schizophrenics” were invalidated because they were beginning to wake up from the social fantasy. Laing had reversed the premise of the psychiatric metanarrative by defining adjustment as pathological, “Social adjustment to a dysfunctional society may be very dangerous. The perfectly adjusted bomber pilot may be a greater threat to species survival than the hospitalized schizophrenic deluded that the Bomb is inside him.” (R. D. Laing, 1967, The Politics of Experience, New York: Pantheon Books, p120). This was written during the height of the nuclear weapons race — and Laing saw in the “delusions” of the mad, a metaphorical critique of society and a sign of a resistance to a conformity that threatened the survival of the species. In accord with Laing’s critique, but before Laing had developed it, Martin Luther King Jr. stated, “The world will be saved by the creatively maladjusted.” Today many of the creatively maladjusted come from the ranks of those most directly attacked by the Deep State. And they too, like the mad, are perceived as a threat to the psychiatric guardians of the status quo.

But this kind of threat is easily deflected by redefining it as a medical problem, as pathology. TIs are hardly the first to be pathologized. The medicalization of dissidence and deviance is the real specialization of the psychiatric profession, as the late Thomas Szasz, dissident psychiatrist, argued in book after book. Mental illness is a “myth,” as Szasz said, a misleading trope––the entire system is based on a spurious metanarrative that has deceived the American public for well over a century. Mental health professions are comprised of pretend doctors treating non-existent illnesses. There are of course therapists who help people but they are the minority — almost all in the private sector — and for the most part inaccessible to those without money. Subsuming anyone’s life under a pseudo- medical “diagnosis” obscures their abilities, simplifies their life story, and leads the professional to prescribe a “medical” solution (e.g., stupefying psychiatric drugs) for a non-medical problem, for what Szasz aptly called “problems in living.”

Each person’s unique life story can only be understood when she is grasped in her full individuality including both her strengths and her weaknesses, her virtues and her bad habits. Only a psychotherapist who understands this can be helpful. A therapist who fails to see a client’s strengths will underestimate her ability to recover from trauma. The therapist who seeks to promote conformity will not be able to help the troubled oddball become a creatively maladjusted social change agent. But this hardly matters if the goal of the mental health system is not to help people but to maintain social control.

It is revealing that before 1973 homosexuality was viewed as a mental disorder but as a result of agitation and lobbying by homosexual psychiatrists the APA decided by a close vote that homosexuality was no longer a disorder. Taking into account the conformist orientation of the mental health system — as illustrated in the last few paragraphs — we realize that the diagnoses are based upon values that can always be contested. They are not based on biological facts like real medical diagnoses. In the first place “mental illness” is not an objective biological fact–there are no biological referents to which the construct corresponds. This is why psychiatrists, in order to maintain their facade of legitimacy substitute reliability for validity.

“Reliability” is a scientific term that refers to agreement — in the above case, the agreement among mental health professionals, almost always with financial ties to the pharmaceutical industry — who invent the psychiatric diagnoses, whereas validity refers to a correspondence to reality. (Postmodernists may quibble, but for now I will leave such ontological qualifications for another time.) This is a blatant epistemological error. Because a hundred psychiatrists agree someone is “seriously ill,” and delusional does not mean that person is delusional. The witch prickers would usually agree which suspects were witches — but women do not make pacts or have sexual relations with the Devil (the definition of a witch), so in actuality there were no witches. These highly educated clergymen, the intellectual elite of their era, were wrong. The term “witch” was reliable but invalid, it did not correspond to any social reality other than the shared fantasy of the witch-prickers. Today the term “psychotic” tells us little about the person so described and a lot — as we see — about the shared fantasies of psychiatrists..

Cardiologists do not determine diseases by voting. Mental health professionals, as seen, have a tendency to rate those persons who resist or reject or criticize their own authority as mentally ill. They are also wary of those who make trenchant criticisms of society. It is therefore not surprising that psychiatrists regard TIs as delusional, as psychotic, just as in the 1960s, they tended to view New Leftists as mentally ill. Without even examining the Deep State literature, psychiatrists have promulgated a metanarrative that views them all as delusional, as schizophrenics — as non-compliant psychotics who refuse to take their ‘meds” or accept that they are mentally ill. Mental health professionals have been in conflict with “non-compliant” patients since psychotropic drugs were first used in the mid-1950s. This conflict took on a political dimension when the “mental patients’ liberation movement” (now the psychiatric survivors’ movement) originated in the early 1970s.

But what evidence do they present that TIs are all delusional? In McPhate’s article he extensively quotes from psychologist Lorraine Sheridan. She conducted an experiment with psychiatrist David James and coauthored an article titled “Complaints of group stalking (‘gang stalking’): an exploratory study of their nature and impact on complainants” published in The Journal of Forensic Psychiatry and Psychology Vol 26, No 5, 2015. The journal is read “throughout the world” by “psychiatrists, psychologists, criminologists, lawyers, sociologists, nurses, social workers and other legal and medical professionals” who use this journal as “their major forum for penetrating, informed global debate on the latest developments and disputes affecting the practice of forensic psychiatry.” Sheridan and James write, “All cases of reported group-stalking were found likely to be delusional, compared with 3.9% of individually stalked cases.” But they found no such thing. By their own definition, a delusion is “a false belief based on incorrect inference about external reality.” In order to know the belief is likely to be delusional, they have to know about the external reality.

100% of the 128 allegedly group-stalked individuals were determined to be deluded. How? Two clinicians read extensive questionnaires filled out by the subjects and both agreed all of the time that each subject was deluded. But reliability is not validity. It cannot tell us about the external world. Mental health professionals have no “expertise” in determining what is real, although credulous people — like New York Times journalists — think their credentials give them the ability to know if a patient is delusional. But, to know that, one has to know what is real. The claim of Sheridan and James that group stalking does not take place is an un-validated theory about the nature of (social) “reality.” They have made no effort to confirm its validity by examining the reality. .

Sheridan and James claim that all 128 self-identified TIs had 1 or more of three kinds of delusions. The first was of group stalking. They write these are “cases where the resources or elaborate organization required to carry them out made the alleged activities highly improbable.” But probability is not a scientific or quantifiable concept as they use it. Upon what do they base this determination? Upon nothing–it has no force beyond a decree. The subject’s claims that they were subjected to neuro-weaponry, such as “voice to skull” fell, according to the authors, into the category of a delusion based on “impossibility” or “bizarre impossibility.” What about quantum physics, about “spooky action at a distance” (Einstein), entanglement, Bell’s theorem? All impossible according to the scientific paradigm that had reigned for centuries, just like the technology that Sheridan and James dismiss as impossible. These “scientists” are ignoramuses who have learned nothing from the history of science. (Below is evidence that this impossible technology exists.)

If 2 million clinicians instead of 2 agreed that 128 subjects were delusional, it would still prove only that clinicians tend to agree about TIs and about reality. All of the professionals who examined Rosenhan and his compatriots agreed they were insane. But they were not. Their diagnoses were all invalid. The witch-prickers agreed which suspects were witches, but we know now there were no witches — women do not have sex with the Devil. Their diagnoses were wrong. If Sheridan and James really wanted to determine if TIs were delusional, not just write propaganda, they could have hired a private investigator — short of this they could have at least familiarized themselves with the TI metanarrative about group stalking. They could have examined the historical literature on Stasi in former East Germany and the ACLU book (cited below), The Surveillance Industrial Complex.

I do not think the Sheridan and James article is a work of deliberate deception. Rather it is “bullshit.”As Bruce Levine notes, the liar, unlike the bullshitter, knows what the truth is and endeavors to conceal it. “The vast majority of psychiatrists are bullshitters, uncommitted to either facts or fiction…It is not in the bullshitters’ interest to know what is true and what is false, as that knowledge of what is a fact and what is fiction hinders the capacity to use any and all powerful persuasion” — that is, to persuade people their psychiatric theories reflect reality. (See Levine, “Psychiatry’s Current Greatest Controversy: Fraud, Bullsh*t or What? at Mad in America, accessed September, 2016.) That is why these psychiatrists undertake no investigation––not even reading the literature on the Deep State by scholars and whistle-blowers, let alone by TIs. It’s not that they know that TIs are telling the truth, and endeavor to conceal it. As Levine puts it (about a different psychiatric myth), “ Most simply don’t know the truth because they have put little effort in discerning it.” The fact is they don’t really want to know if TIs’ allegations are correct. 

Their purpose is to not to discover the truth –- but to serve the mental health system. To quote Levine again, “The goal of bullshitters is not necessarily to lie about the truth but to persuade their audience of a specific impression so as to advance their agenda.” In this case the agenda — fostering the growth of the mental health system and maintaining social control — is advanced in two ways. First,by pathologizing TIs, mental health professionals are able to induct more clients into the mental health system, and thus to contribute to the growth of the psychiatric-pharmaceutical industrial complex. Second, by defining dissident or subversive ideas as “delusions,” as symptoms of “mental disorders,” they are able to neutralize or invalidate these ideas, suppress their expression and thus maintain social control — enforce the dominant social norms,

These redefinitions serve social control in a very specific way. They allow professionals to define exploitative practices as legitimate medical treatments — from drugging babies to silencing victims of no- touch torture — while maintaining their self-image as doctors, or medical helpers. Thus professionals can bullshit their way through life — by diagnosing babies and TIs as covert psychotics. Psychiatrists have no need to investigate whether TIs’ claims are valid because Sheridan and James and The New York Times have told them that all TIs are delusional. The substitution of reliability for validity, of bullshit for investigation-findings, is a sleight of hand performed in the most prestigious academic journals and newspapers, and propagated in the psychiatric metanarrative.

(This also serves psychiatrists’ own emotional needs by warding off ideas that threaten to disturb their comfortable mainstream views about the world in which we live — thus what is strange and frightening is reduced to the banal, the familiar. )

All the instruments of psychiatry are brought to bear to pressure, to persuade, to force the deviant to conform. In this manner, Psychiatry also unwittingly, and in some prominent cases, deliberately, serves to preserve the invisibility of the operations of the Deep State. That is to say, the Deep State is enabled to hide evidence of its crimes because Psychiatry destroys the credibility of its victims/critics by certifying them as insane. Thus relegated to the lowest social caste, they are now civilly dead. Bearing the stigmata of their diagnoses, their friends, family, and associates no longer attend to the meaning of their words. Their words are treated as “semantic exudates,” as Szasz once said, of their mental illness. They may speak the truth, but no one is listening.

The Psychiatric Pharmaceutical Industrial Complex

The nature of “mental illness” underwent another change starting in the 1980s. The change was not based on discoveries about the patient’s mind or brain. As usual the changes took place in Psychiatry and were projected onto the clients. As a result of Psychiatry’s alliance with the pharmaceutical industry, it redefined mental illness. The psychoanalytic theory that pathology resulted from traumas in early childhood — prevalent for most of the 20th century in the university and the clinic — was replaced by the dogma that it was a brain disorder.

Although Psychiatry could find no evidence of a brain disorder, it claimed if it kept searching eventually it would find the evidence.

Dr Peter Breggin, a psychiatrist and former student of Szasz became a spokesperson for the dissident position from the 1980s to the present. Breggin chronicles that Psychiatry began to undergo a financial crisis in the 1980s when due to rising popularity of psychotherapy starting in the 1960s, clients sought out less expensive therapists without medical degrees. To recover their hegemony and financial advantages, the American Psychiatric Association decided in 1980 to renounce a century-old practice banning, soliciting, or even accepting contributions from the pharmaceutical industry. This was a watershed––the medical model in biological form experienced a resurgence and the Psychiatric-Pharmaceutical-Industrial complex was born. As Peter Breggin wrote,“The floodgates were opened and would grow wider each year…Whatever function APA had ever fulfilled as a professional organization was now superseded by its function as a political advocate for the advancement of psychiatric and pharmaceutical interests.” (Toxic Psychiatry, 1991, New York: St Martin’s Press, p 355.)

Once again Psychiatry proved its understanding of problems in living was based on its own subjective fantasies, defined as reality by the authorities. Although Psychiatry claimed they had suddenly become more scientific and realized mental illnesses were really brain disorders, this transformation of the view of pathology, just like the transformation in 1973 of the view of homosexuality, was caused by changes within Psychiatry — its merger with the pharmaceutical industry — that led to a change in its collective cultural fantasy which it has the power to present to the public as reality.

Let me be clear, I am not denying that there is a relationship between the mind and the body. I am aware that physical stress contributes to emotional problems, and I am aware that emotional problems are reflected in the individual’s body and brain. But none of this justifies importing medical categories, medical “diagnoses” into the realm of human psychology and interpersonal relationships. Physical illnesses are based on biological facts whereas “mental illnesses” are based almost entirely upon psychiatric fantasies about patients. Psychodiagnosis works as social control but not as medicine or therapy. Because psychiatric diagnoses are derogatory evaluations about clients’ minds, they undermine clients’ self-confidence and thus become self-fulfilling prophecies. .

Even the leading establishment figures in Psychiatry now admit that psychiatric diagnoses are purely subjective, admit there is no evidence of any “chemical imbalance” — even as they try to hold on to “the medical model” — what I call medicalism — even as they continue the centuries’ long search for “defects” in the brains of the “mentally ill.” Thus Thomas Insel, the Director of the National Institute of Mental Health wrote in 2013 on the eve of the publication of the long-awaited 5th edition of the psychiatric Bible, The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (the first edition was published in 1952, the DSM-IV was published in 1994, and the revised edition of DSM-IV was published in 2000) that the weakness of the manual was “ its lack of validity.” “Unlike our definitions of ischemic heart disease, lymphoma, or AIDS, the DSM diagnoses are based on a consensus about clusters of clinical symptoms, not any objective laboratory measure.” (See “The NIMH Withdraws Support for DSM-5Psychology Today, May, 2013. Accessed 2016.)

Even the Chairman of the Committee, Allen Frances, which composed the 4th edition of the DSM, had a change of heart and became a critic of the DSM — he admitted diagnoses were subjective. “There are no objective tests in psychiatry that say definitively that someone does or does not have a mental disorder.” (Mental Disorders: The Facts Behind the Marketing Campaign/CCHR, Accessed 2013.) His book Saving Normal argues that the DSM-5 classifies all kinds of normal behaviors as mental illnesses. (As indicated by the title, Frances wanted to restrict the application of the medical model in the helping professions, not to eliminate it.) For example, mourning the death of a parent or spouse or one’s partner for more than 2 weeks is interpreted by the DSM-5 (the DSM-IV required more than 2 months of grieving for the person to be deemed mentally ill) as a symptom of a “clinical depression,” not as a natural response to loss. The change reflects the increased symbiosis of psychiatric and drug companies. Defining mourning as a clinical depression enables the drug companies to significantly increase their markets, “If, for two weeks after losing the love of your life, you have sadness, loss of interest, trouble sleeping and eating and less energy, the DSM-5 now allows a drug salesman to teach the doctor that this is major depressive disorder and requires a pill,” Frances said. (Julie Deardorff, “Defining the Subtleties of Grief,” Chicago Tribune, March 5, 2014.)

The prototypical act of defiance of the psychiatric-pharmaceutical complex is refusing to take one’s “meds.” I began graduate school in the late 1970s. Since that time the canard has become received wisdom in society: patients who don’t take their “meds” have a resistance to getting well. This canard overlooks the sickening “side effects” of psychiatric drugs. It is a myth that these drugs are designed to cure or correct the “chemical imbalances” of mental disorders. The drugs have a sedating effect on all persons (as well as numerous unpleasant side effects) — well-suited for managing “mental patients” in a state hospital (where they were all warehoused until “deinstitutionalization” in the 1960s). Those who take these drugs for more than 2 years tend to develop brain damage that often mimics the symptoms of “psychosis” and makes a full recovery from “psychosis” almost impossible.

Author and award-winning medical journalist Robert Whitaker writes, “I think science is telling us that antipsychotics, on the whole, worsen long-term outcomes, even when prescribed for ‘clear cut psychiatric disorders,’ and thus, if psychiatry wants to develop evidence-based protocols, it needs to figure out how to minimize their long-term use. And that is a belief that directly challenges the conventional wisdom…” (See for example Robert Whitaker’s “evidence based” discussion of his investigation in his reply to psychiatrist Allen Frances at PeteEarley.com, “Robert Whitaker Explains His Research After Being Pigeonholed as Anti-Medication,” see also Whitaker, Anatomy of an Epidemic.)

Those who resist Psychiatry’s drugs (or ministrations) are “non-compliant” or “treatment resistant” patients — they arouse the anger and contempt of mental health professionals. The fact that psychiatric treatment is unsuccessful with “schizophrenics” — and causes severe health problems does not prompt a reevaluation of their treatments because the goal of the public mental health system is maintaining social control, and selling psychiatric drugs. The fusion of mental health with the pharmaceutical industry makes change virtually impossible — there is too much to lose.

Thomas Szasz believed that pseudo-medical explanations of problems in living had no objective referent, that “mental illness” was a myth, that the medical procedures of Psychiatry were mere ceremonies intended to make psychiatrists look like real doctors — and there is a plethora of ceremonies and narrative designed to mystify clients and the public. Thus he wrote in Insanity: The Idea and Its Consequences, “Explanations [of mental illness] in 20th century have run into the 100s if not thousands. Methods are equally numerous. Seeing through the riddle of mental illness is not so much like seeing the emperor is naked but rather more like realizing that the emperor’s wardrobe is rich and dazzling beyond the dreams even of emperors but that there is no emperor.” (Szasz, 1997, NY: Syracuse University Press.)

 

Back to Top

The Deep State on Trial

Let us first imagine we are putting the Deep State on trial, as a thought-experiment. The criminal, the defendant, is the Deep State — I do this in an effort to establish the validity of the TI metanarrative. If the Deep State exists and commits the crimes alleged by TIs, this does not prove every self-identified TI is a TI. But it proves some are — and the possibility must be weighed by every mental health professional that people claiming to be undergoing the kinds of experiences and tortures described in the TI meta-narrative may be genuine TIs. If the TI metanarrative is false, than every TI is really “psychotic.” The lawyer for the prosecution would want to exclude certain kinds of people from the jury because they could not decide fairly whether the Deep State was guilty — e.g., people in the employ of the Deep State, very pro-establishment people who think our government can do no wrong. For example, McPhate, following the psychiatric narrative claims, or at least implies, not that some TIs are psychotic but that almost all self- identified TIs are psychotic. (He does not discuss those who are not psychotics–he merely qualifies his assertions.) Someone with an a priori commitment to that viewpoint would not be able to objectively judge.

Let us consider first the obstacles faced by the prosecutor of the Deep State. The lawyer for the prosecution would have a number of obstacles to overcome. Several come to mind.

1) First, the average person has read nothing in the newspapers about TIs–except perhaps articles claiming they are psychotic. We tend to assume that what we have not heard of does not exist.

2) It is hard for most people to believe that the US government would subject its own citizens to torture. It is hard to believe that the government would violate the very Constitution upon which it rests.

3) Few people have heard of the advanced technology which the TI metanarrative claims to be in use. This is not reported in the Press and it sounds like “science fiction.”

4) Most people think only TIs or only psychotics are making these kind of claims. But it is not only TIs — covert psychotics from the psychiatric perspective — who make these claims. They are also made by highly accomplished former employees of the Deep State, the CIA, NSA, etc. These expert witnesses make the same kind of claims made by the TIs. In McPhate’s article, they are virtually ignored — he interviewed some of them but then failed to quote them or misrepresented them. People know Edward Snowden — no one has accused him of psychosis — but Snowden discussed only the prevalence of surveillance, not the existence of neuro-surveillance, “mind control,” no-touch torture, non-consensual experimentation on people with directed energy neuro-weaponry.

5) Another element in the TI’s metanarrative is group stalking — the mental health professionals claim credibly that it is very unlikely that such tremendous resources would be mobilized against one person. To the average person group stalking indeed seems odd and unreasonable. And there is no rationale for such alleged activities. (It is revealing that FOIA documents have shown that CIA assets in the media in the 1960s were instructed to emphasize how improbable a large operation would be, and impossible to keep secret; Alex Constantine, 1997, p 42, Virtual Government: CIA Operations, Los Angeles: Feral House).

6) The very formidable obstacle I tried to debunk above — belief in the validity of the mental­ health system in general, and in particular in the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs itself, which claims that virtually all TIs are delusional, are psychotics, and thus everything they claim about Deep State operations are just symptoms of their pathology.

Let me briefly touch on each of these points. We do not have to rely on TIs or victims to ascertain that the CIA and the military has subjected Americans to harmful experiments to further the various goals of the CIA and later the NSA, although anyone seriously investigating the issue would take victims’ accounts into consideration. The Church Committee was formed in the late 1970s to investigate CIA covert experiments. During the same period President Ford appointed the Rockefeller Commission. On the Senate floor, Senator Ted Kennedy summarized the results of the Church Committee investigations:

The Deputy Director of the CIA revealed that over thirty universities and institutions were involved in an ‘extensive testing and experimentation’ program which included covert drug tests on unwitting citizens ‘at all social levels, high and low, native Americans and foreign.’ Several of these tests involved the administration of LSD to ‘unwitting subjects in social situations.’ At least one death [Frank Olson’s], resulted from these activities.” (WikiSpooks/Project MKUltra)

But that was an understatement. The Church and Rockefeller Committees found this program consisted of 149 projects at 80 universities and other institutions involving drug testing and a variety of other studies on unwitting human subjects, including numerous studies using electromagnetic technologies. (Byron Belitsos, “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control, accessed July, 2016.)

The Church Committee investigation was hampered by the fact that CIA director, Richard Helms destroyed the files on MK-Ultra in 1973 when he feared there would be an investigation. The Committee relied upon participants in the program for evidence -– they admitted secretively administering LSD (e.g., slipping it into subjects’ drinks at a party) to unwitting subjects. A memo in 1952 indicated the purpose of the program: “Can we get control of an individual to the point where he will do our bidding against his will and even against fundamental laws of nature, such as self-preservation?” (See WikiSpooks/Project ARTICHOKE accessed July, 2016, cited in Gordon Thomas, G., Journey into Madness. The Secret Story of Secret CIA Mind Control and Medical Abuse.) New York: Bantam, 1990). One can think of many military applications of such powers, whether directed against foreigners or Americans.

The US General Accounting Office issued a report in 1994 that summarized the findings of previous commissions, making clear that the program was conducted jointly by the CIA and the Department of Defense and casting doubt on the volunteer status of US soldiers who were among the subjects in these experiments. The report stated “Working with the CIA, the Department of Defense gave hallucinogenic drugs to thousands of ‘volunteer’ soldiers in the 1950s and 1960s. In addition to LSD, the Army also tested quinuclidinyl benzilate, a hallucinogen code-named BZ. Many of these tests were conducted under the so-called MKULTRA program, established to counter perceived Soviet and Chinese advances in brainwashing techniques.” (WikiSpooks/Project MKUltra, accessed July, 2016.) Although there was only one documented death (Helms had destroyed the files), one need not have an overly vivid imagination to envision the adverse effects of unknowingly ingesting LSD.

On January 15, 1994, President Bill Clinton formed the Advisory Committee on Human Radiation Experiments (ACHRE), chaired by Ruth Faden, Ph.D., MPH of the Johns Hopkins Berman Institute of Bioethics. ACHRE made clear that since the 1940s the Atomic Energy Commission had been sponsoring tests on the effects of radiation on the human body. American citizens who had checked into hospitals for a variety of ailments were secretly injected with varying amounts of plutonium and other radioactive materials without their knowledge. These experiments included other populations such as orphans given irradiated milk, children injected with radioactive materials, prisoners in Washington and Oregon state prisons. In other words, the Military and Intelligence was carrying out Dr Mengele experiments upon American citizens. Much of the experimentation was carried out in order to determine how the human body metabolizes radioactive materials, information that could be used by the Departments of Energy and Defense in Cold War in war planning. (Wikipedia/Human Radiation Experiments.)

Numerous human radiation experiments have been performed in the United States, many of which were funded by various U.S. government agencies such as the United States Department of Defense and the United States Atomic Energy Commission. Researchers had a pattern of choosing the most vulnerable people, but soldiers were also a group heavily exposed to experimentation.

Experiments included, but were not limited to:

feeding radioactive material to mentally disabled children [4]

exposing U.S. soldiers and prisoners to high levels of radiation [4]

irradiating the testicles of prisoners, which caused severe birth defects [4]

(U.S. House of Representatives, Committee on Energy and Commerce, Subcommittee on Energy Conservation and Power. American Nuclear Guinea Pigs: Three Decades of Radiation Experiments on US. Citizens. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office. Cited in Wikipedia/Human Radiation Experimentsaccessed July, 2016.)

The Washington Times summarized in 1994 the findings of ACHRE: “At least 500,000 people were used as subjects in Cold War era radiation, biological and chemical experiments sponsored by the federal government, a congressional agency said yesterday…the tests conducted ranged from radiation to biological and chemical agents like mustard gas and LSD.” (See p. 46, Nick Begich, 2006, Controlling the Human Mind, Anchorage, Alaska, Earthpulse Press.)

Byron Belitsos notes, “By 1963, 1,200 nuclear weapons tests conducted at the Nevada test site had exposed every person in the U.S. to deadly radioactive fallout, causing millions of fetal deaths, spontaneous abortions, stillbirths, and birth defects. The U.S. government also conducted over 4,000 radiation experiments on individual human test subjects without their informed consent. The delayed effects of decades of radiation exposure from weapons testing are today demonstrated by a U.S. population plagued with epidemic cancer and heart disease, neurological disorders, low fertility, chronic fatigue, obesity (thyroid involvement), immune system dysfunction and learning disabilities.” (Byron Belitsos, “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control, accessed July, 2016.)

Anyone familiar with these experiments, documented by the U.S. government, should know that neither the military nor the CIA has any compunction about harming American citizens — thus familiarity with this history removes one of the major obstacles to accepting the TI meta-narrative. Nor can we dismiss these acts as something that happened in the past, and would not happen in our ostensibly more enlightened era. It is true that covert non-consensual experiments were officially banned by US Congress after the Church Committee findings. But no one was held accountable, no one went to prison, no one paid any fines, no one lost a job — this fact was not lost upon later whistle-blowers post-9/11 who were prosecuted for revealing criminal activities by the Deep State.

In the history of exposure of Deep State malfeasance, only the whistle-blowers themselves are punished. In the light of this lack of accountability, is it feasible to assume experiments on humans ceased? Did Deep State violations of the Constitution of which the public is aware cease after Bush? Obama of course refused to hold anyone accountable, and in office he carried out the same policy as Bush of shielding the state from scrutiny or litigation. It is significant that McPhate wrote, ironically, “The military establishment, the theory goes, never gave up on the ambitions of MK Ultra, the C.I.A.’s infamous program to control the mind in the 1950s and ’60s.” Without any evidence that he has studied the history of the CIA, he makes a patronizing tongue-in-cheek comment about TIs, as if the belief that the military continued its efforts to gain power over the human mind was such a far-fetched idea. “Hear no evil, see no evil, speak no evil” seems to be McPhate’s guiding principle.

Whistle-blowers since the origins of the CIA have made profound and searing criticisms of their former employers. The most scathing indictment of the Deep State has originally come from former agents, not from its victims (the victims, increasingly including prodigious scholars, are now catching up with former spies, journalists and scholars, in the production of analyses, exposures and histories) — although any agent who criticizes the Deep State becomes a potential victim. Many former employees have argued that the Deep State is totalitarian, and that America today is no longer a democratic republic — some have claimed it is guilty of crimes similar to the Nazi regime. (I will not discuss here Operation Paperclip — under which Nazi scientists were brought to the US to work for the military and US intelligence.) Those who became critics were among the most highly intelligent, patriotic, and morally principled people in the country. Their testimony and experiences vitiate the widespread public belief that the agencies of the Deep State protect the national security and freedom of Americans. It is because of this assumption that many Americans do not object to being placed under surveillance. And because of this they do not believe the TI metanarrative which posits that the protection of American citizens is not one of the primary goals of the Deep State — although law and order may be, or at least order — and that agencies of the Deep State have been willing to harm or put at risk the safety of American citizens in pursuit of other goals.

 

Back to Top

The CIA Assassination of its Own Agent––Protecting Whose Security?

We learn about the Deep State both from what whistle-blowers reveal and from what we see the Deep State is willing to do to silence whistle-blowers, to preserve its own secrecy, its own autonomy and lack of accountability to organs of the American people––to the Congress, to the Senate. Of course increasingly the Legislature defaults on its oversight responsibility, increasingly the Executive shields the Deep State from scrutiny–-thus shattering the foundation of Constitutional government. The belief that the government would never harm American citizens is shattered, thousands if not hundreds of thousands of its victims have been Americans. The Deep State goes to great lengths to preserve the secrecy of its programs, which is why so few people are aware of them.

Frank Olson might have become the first CIA whistle-blower but he died before he had a chance to reveal any secrets. But Frank Olson’s death was not self-inflicted as his son Eric Olson discovered– and many mainstream journalists and writers agreed. Olson is a psychologist who was determined to unravel the mystery of his father’s death and ultimately to be the voice for his father’s own moral doubts about the CIA. Michael Ignatieff, a friend of Eric Olson, writing in The New York Times Magazine reviews the findings of Olson, and it leads almost inexorably to the conclusion that the CIA assassinated his father (“CIA; What Did the CIA Do To His  Father?”). When the Olson family was issued a formal apology by President Ford and CIA Director William Colby in 1975, they were told their father was a military officer who was given LSD unknowingly as a part of MK-Ultra — this ostensibly led Olson to become deeply depressed and commit suicide. The family was given $750,000 by an act of Congress, and the matter was finished. But it wasn’t. The story was a cover story — and Colby and Ford had lied. And the CIA lied to the Press.

His son writes, “In 1952 Frank Olson [a leading biochemist] was acting chief of the Special Operations Division at Detrick; at the time of his death in 1953 he was SOD’s director of planning and evaluations. The Special Operations Divison at Detrick was the government’s most secret biological weapons laboratory.” Frank Olson knew — that despite vehement denials by the American government at the time — the United States was using biological weapons, including anthrax, in the Korean War. Considering that Olson had decided to resign from the CIA, this fact made Eric suspicious of the CIA account of his father’s alleged suicide.

He had his father’s body exhumed, and a forensic team, led by James Starrs of George Washington University, discovered “a blow to Olson’s temple which caused a fist-size bleed under the skin.” They concluded that someone had hit/knocked Olson out with a blow to the head and then dropped him out the window. Armed with this evidence, Eric persuaded Manhattan District Attorney Robert Morgenau in April, 1996, to subpoena a grand jury to examine the evidence for commission of homicide. During the course of this investigation (which found insufficient evidence to go to trial — perhaps because of the sudden death of a prospective witness, former CIA director Colby), Eric also learned that Olson’s death is taught as a case study of “the perfect murder” at the Mossad Training School outside Tel Aviv — this has been confirmed by two former Mossad agents, Ari Ben-Menashe and Victor Ostrovsky. (Family Statement on the Murder of Frank Olson.) 

A letter by the DA was sent to former CIA director William Colby, asking for an interview about Olson. There is evidence that Colby at this point himself felt moral qualms and was ready to spill the beans (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.) But a few days after receiving the letter Colby died in an alleged canoeing accident in the river near his Maryland home. According to newspaper accounts, much of which his wife contested — she was out of town at the time of Colby’s death — Colby went canoeing at night time (something he had never done before, according to his wife) without wearing his life vest. His computer was on and his dinner half eaten. Colby’s death helped kill the investigation.

It was around this time that Eric Olson had an epiphany, “In 1997, after the C.I.A. inadvertently declassified an assassination manual dating from late 1953, Eric Olson was able to read the following: ‘The most efficient accident, in simple assassination, is a fall of 75 feet or more onto a hard surface. Elevator shafts, stairwells, unscreened windows and bridges will serve. . .’ The manual went on to recommend a blow to the temple to stun the subject first: ‘In chase cases it will usually be necessary to stun or drug the subject before dropping him.’ Reading this passage at the kitchen table in Frederick, Eric realized that “dropped” was the right word.” (Ignatieff, NY Times, op.cit.)

Norman Cournoyer, one of Frank Olson’s oldest friends, called Eric in 2001 after reading the article in the Times. Frank Olson began work on interrogations methods for the CIA in the late 1940s. These were designed to extract information from even the most uncooperative subjects with the help of drugs and torture. Olson confided in Cournoyer (who also had top security clearance) that in 1953 he had been witness to more than one murder by interrogation––largely of Soviet spies. For most of the time, Olson remained in the CIA laboratory in the US.

But in 1950 he traveled to Europe and witnessed the CIA interrogations there — often “terminal”– of “expendables” including double agents, Soviet spies, and Nazi war criminals. Olson asked his friend: “Norm, did you ever see a man die? I did. People being interrogated died.” He told Cournoyer he was getting out of the CIA. He also told Cournoyer that the US was manufacturing biological weapons and he assumed had used it against the Koreans. By this point Eric concluded his father was murdered because the CIA concluded he was a security risk. Cournoyer agreed. “Was there reason for your Dad being killed by the CIA? I believe so,” he told Olson on German TV. (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Author Gordon Thomas spoke to Dr William Sargant, the British psychiatrist who worked on CIA mind control experiments and examined Olson at the request of the CIA after he began to have moral qualms about his work. “Sargant told me he believed Frank Olson had witnessed murder being committed with the various drugs he had prepared. The shock of what he witnessed, Sargant believed, was all the harder to cope with given that Frank Olson was a patriotic man who believed that the United States would never sanction such acts….He decided Frank Olson could pose a security risk.” He conveyed this information to Olson’s superiors at the CIA. When he learned of his death “he came to the immediate conclusion that Olson only could have been murdered,” Thomas wrote to Eric. (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Olson was invited to a meeting at Deep Creek a week before his death. The meeting was attended by future CIA director and head of covert operations, Richard Helms, as well as Sidney Gottlieb (one of the leaders of MK-Ultra). Gottlieb secretly spiked Olson’s cocktail with LSD. The real purpose of the meeting was to determine through using LSD if Olson would reveal the secret he knew upon leaving the CIA. Evidently they determined Olson was a “security risk.” As Steinberg put it, “What is clear and what was also clear to Frank Olson in the final weeks of his life is that he became a target of the very torture/interrogation techniques that he had witnessed in Europe. Returning from the LSD interrogation at Deep Creek Lake, he told his wife ‘I made a terrible mistake.’” (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Eric finally concluded about his father, “He died because of security concerns regarding disavowed programs of terminal interrogation and the use of biological weapons in Korea.”

Eric has finally decades later given his father a voice from beyond the grave. (Family Statement on the Murder of Frank Olson.) 

The question must be asked: Whose security? Certainly not the security of the American people. The US was committing war crimes and violating international law by using biological weapons. These actions were risks to the security of all people. Their disclosure would have embarrassed the US government and would have resulted in the firing and resignation of people in government. It was their own security Olson’s superiors were worried about. Had Olson become a whistle-blower, international law would have been strengthened and the people of the world would have been protected against the risk of an epidemic caused by biological weapons.

The Frank Olson case reveals the CIA’s involvement in the creation and manufacture of illegal and dangerous weapons, its murder of those used as guinea pigs in its testing of interrogation methods, its willingness to assassinate one of its own agents, and its ability to enlist even the US President in a cover-up of the assassination of Frank Olson. Here we see even in its embryonic form the Deep State acting with flagrant disregard for human life, for the Constitution, and for the United Nations and international law. For the Deep State the Enemy is not merely another country — it’s here within. Even the CIA’s own agents are murdered if they try to leave the organization, or if they are deemed to present a “security risk.”

And, revealingly, Eric told Ignatieff he was regarded as mentally disturbed by many of his critics — just as TIs are today. Ignatieff wrote, “Eric knows that to charge the most secretive agency of American government with murder is to incur the suspicion that you have become deranged by anger, grief, paranoia, greed or a combination of all four. ‘Eric is crazy, Eric is obsessed,’he says, mimicking his accusers.” (Ignatieff, “CIA; What Did the CIA Do To His  Father?”)

 

Back to Top

Whistle-Blowers Post-9/11

Thomas Drake knows the power of the National Security Agency all too well. He is a former senior executive of the U.S. National Security Agency (NSA), a decorated United States Air Force and United States Navy veteran, and a whistle-blower. Drake’s crime seems to have been telling a reporter about fraud — specifically about NSA’s purchasing an Internet data collection system that cost billions of dollars more than necessary and that collected so much data that it resulted in Constitutional violations of privacy. This was the famous Trailblazer system — Drake argued like William Binney and several other NSA whistle-blowers that by choosing his tool instead of Thin Thread, the NSA was putting their own influence and power over the public good, over the nation. These men had been attracted to the NSA precisely because of their patriotism and desire to be of service to the nation. When they found there was a conflict they chose loyalty to nation — at great personal sacrifice.

Drake went to the press only after following prescribed channels of redress for Constitutional wrongs, only after failing to get NSA inspectors or Congress to take remedial action. The Justice Department in 2010 raided his house and charged him under the 1917 Espionage Act with violations that carried a penalty of up to 35 years in prison. But they dropped the charges when no evidence linked him to spying or a foreign power. The judge in the case called the prosecution “unconscionable.” Drake is the 2011 recipient of the Ridenhour Prize for Truth-Telling and co-recipient of the Sam Adams Associates for Integrity in Intelligence (SAAII) award. The government also took away his security clearance. He now works as a clerk in an Apple computer store…(Vocativ, September 19, 2013, “Should the NSA Be Dismantled?”, accessed July, 2016 ).

In excerpts from Thomas Drake’s SAAII award acceptance speech, he clearly formulates the nature of the conflict between the NSA and the republic.

With all the unitary executive privilege, all the secrecy and exigent conditions used as the excuse to torture, deny due process, and engage in off-the-books electronic surveillance, Jesselyn Raddick [his lawyer, and a whistle-blower herself, when working for Department of Justice] and I followed all the rules as whistle-blowers until it fundamentally conflicted with our oath to uphold the Constitution. Then we both made a fateful choice to exercise our First Amendment rights. We went to the press with patently unclassified information, about which the public had a right to know.

However rather than address its own corruption, ineptitude, and illegality, the government made us targets of federal criminal leak investigations, part of a vicious campaign against whistle-blowers that started under Bush and has now come to full fruition under Obama …We were transmogrified from public servants trying to improve our government, into traitors and enemies of the state. The government subjected us to severe retaliation that started with forcing us from our jobs as career public servants, rendering us unemployed and unemployable, while swinging a wrecking ball into the conditions of our jobs, in my case a security clearance, and in Jesselyn’s case, state bar licensure. We were blacklisted and no longer had a stream of income, while simultaneously incurring attorneys’ fees and necessitating second mortgages on our respective homes. But that was nothing compared to the overkill reprisal to come, placement on the no-fly list for Jesselyn and prosecution under the Espionage Act for me.

What we experienced sends unequivocally a chilling message, an unequivocally chilling message about what the government can and will do when one speaks truth to power: a direct form of political repression and censorship. If sharing issues of significant and even grave public concern which do not in any way compromise our national security is now considered a criminal act, we have strayed far from what our founding fathers envisioned. When exercising First Amendment rights is now considered espionage, this is anathema to a free, open, and democratic government….

Before the war on terrorism, our country well recognized the importance of free speech, privacy, legal counsel, and the right to be free from cruel and unusual punishment.. These are the hallmarks of tyranny and despotism, not democracy, and are…alien to the Constitution and our American way of life.

We did not take an oath to see secrecy and subterfuge used as cover for subverting the Constitution and violating the law. Our oath to the Constitution took primacy.

And today we have a frightening lack of responsibility and accountability within the national security complex, and it poses — I will mince no words here — it poses a direct threat to all our personal freedoms, as well as a clear and present danger to our constitutional republic….Our government has profoundly lost its constitutional compass and it’s been tainted to its core. And yet it is our enshrined liberties, it is our enshrined liberties that are our national security. What country do we want to keep?…

Jesselyn and I took an oath to support and defend the Constitution, not an oath of loyalty to the organization…We blew the whistle because we saw grave injustice and wrongdoing occurring within our respective organizations.

In my recently successfully concluded case that ended decisively in my favor, the government wanted to put me away in prison for many, many years in fact, at one point they threatened me with 35 years in prison — for simply telling the truth as a whistle-blower and exposing government wrongdoing and illegalities. The government found out everything they could about…me over many years, before I was even indicted. Having this secret ability…to collect and analyze data with few if any substantial constraints…is seductively powerful, and when …done in secret, it is the ultimate form of control over another...

Modern governments today increasingly perform mass surveillance of their citizens — explaining that they believe that it’s necessary to protect them from dangerous groups such as terrorists, criminals, or politically subversive dissenters — in order to track the citizenry and maintain social control. Read the history books. We are fast approaching a genuine surveillance society in the United States, a dark Orwellian future where every move, our every transaction, our every communication, and our every contact is recorded, compiled, and stored away, ready to be examined and used against us by the authorities whenever they want to at any time.

Five centuries ago, Machiavelli explained how to undertake a revolution from above without most people even noticing. On his Discourses on Livy, he wrote that one, quote, “must at least retain the semblance of the old forms; so that it may seem to the people that there has been no change in the institutions, even though in fact they are entirely different from the old ones”, unquote. In other words, keep the old government structures; meanwhile, you make profound changes to the actual system, because the appearances are all that most people notice. So, today, instead of seeing the mere corpse of the republic in which we supposedly live, we only see the clothing. We have had a quiet revolution that has not eliminated our elected representatives; it has simply made them largely irrelevant…

Being a student of history, I consider the immediate aftermath of World War II as a real turning point, when the American dream began to go south, at the very moment when the U.S. sat astride the world at the pinnacle of power. And…this is when the American republic began its transformation to a national security state and then exponentially accelerated as a result of 9/11 into a top-secret America…

With such a massively expanded ability by the government to spy on your personal life, we might as well bid adieu to the Fourth Amendment, the foundation of a citizen’s integrity as an individual person…as well as your ability to speak and associate freely with others under the Fourth Amendment.

Consider the conviction, as I summarized now for you, held by this country’s founding fathers, that a functioning constitutional republic and democracy requires what? An informed citizenry. So what happens in the case of an uninformed citizenry? The experiment in government by the people is doomed to failure and would inevitably transform into what we increasingly see today.

Do we want to continue to have a burgeoning military-industrial-congressional- intelligence-surveillance-cybersecurity-media complex? For whom does it benefit? Do we want to concede the eroding of basic human rights? Why?..

So I leave you with this as I channel Frederick Douglass. On August 3, 1857, Frederick Douglass delivered a West India Emancipation speech. At Canandaigua, New York, on the 23rd anniversary of the event, he said, quote, “..Those who profess to favor freedom and yet deprecate agitation are men who want crops without plowing up the ground; they want rain without thunder and lightning. They want the ocean without the awful roar of its many waters.” “Power and those in control concede nothing without a demand. They never have and they never will.” Let me translate into today’s language. Every one of us, every one of us in this room and beyond this room, each and every one of us must keep demanding, must keep fighting, must keep thundering, must keep plowing, must keep on keeping things struggling, must speak out, and must speak up until justice is served, because where there is no justice there can be no peace.” (Real News Network, Nov 4, 2012, “Whistleblower Threatened with 35 Years of Tyranny, Warns of Impending Tyranny“) 

Drake was not aware of the torture of TIs. But would he have been shocked by it? Does it conflict with his understanding of what the Deep State is able and willing to do? Obviously not.

William Binney learned the same lesson. He worked for the NSA for 30 years, and resigned in 2001. Binney was a Russia specialist who started work in NSA as an analyst and became successively a Technical Director, and then a geopolitical world Technical Director. In the 1990s, he co-founded a unit on automating signals Intelligence. His career culminated as Technical Leader for Intelligence in 2001. Having expertise in intelligence analysis, traffic analysis, systems analysis, knowledge management, and mathematics (including set theory, number theory, and probability), Binney has been described as one of the best analysts in the NSA’s history. Binney complained to the Department of Defense in 2002 that NSA had wasted taxpayer money by buying a data collection system — Trailblazer — that collected 20 trillion communication transactions of American citizens. Binney was particularly angry because he believed the surfeit of information prevented them from detecting 9/11.

Binney’s outspoken criticism of the agency subjected him to reprisals. On July 2007, after The New York Times reported on the government’s warrantless wiretapping, the FBI broke into his house with guns drawn and confiscated his computers and business records. Although he was cleared of wrong-doing the NSA revoked his security clearance forcing him to close his business at a cost of $300,000 a year. (See Wikipedia/William Binney/U.S. Intelligence Official.)

Binney described his arrest:

“The first I knew the FBI was in my house was the guy pointing a gun at me when I was coming out of the shower. That’s the first I knew. My son let them in, and they pushed him out of the way at gunpoint, and then they came up into my bedroom and pointed guns at my wife and me, so that’s the first I knew they were there. And it surprised me. I said: “Well, what are you doing here? I’ve been cooperating with you, telling you everything I know about this, everybody involved in this program, so why are you doing this?” Basically they wanted me to tell them something that would implicate someone in a crime, OK? The point was they were after Diane Roark because they didn’t like her, and also Tom Drake…Then they told me they thought I was lying to them,…So then I started to get mad. I said: “OK, you want to know what the crime is? Bush, Cheney, Hayden, and Tenet were the central conspirators to subvert the Constitution and the laws of the United States, and here is how they did it. The raid took about seven hours — they were there from 9:00 in the morning to the middle of the afternoon, and they took my computer, all the electronic hardware, discs and things that go with that…” (PBS Frontline/United States of Secrets/William Binney.)

On May 31, 2016, Binney told Loud & Clear host Brian Becker on Radio Sputnik, “They [the NSA] don’t care what they do, they feel that they have the right to do anything that they feel necessary, and they will cover up crimes and procedures and violations of regulations that they’ve done to achieve whatever their ends are.” This is a man who worked for NSA for decades, and became increasingly disillusioned with policies after he became a whistle-blower. “The president can declare anyone a terrorist threat and have the military take them off the street, anywhere, and incarcerate them indefinitely without any due process. Those are violations of fundamental rights of the Constitution,” he explained. “That’s exactly what Special Order 48 issued by the Nazis in 1933 did, right after the Reichstag fire. It says almost exactly the same thing.” (Sputnik News, May 31, 2016, “NSA Surveillance Takes a Page from Nazi Germany“, accessed July, 2016). 

In early October, 2016, William Binney and Kurt Wiebe, another whistle-blower who used to be an analyst for the NSA, in an interview with Ella Felder, told her and the several hundred TIs who were listening in on a mass telephone conference call that they had made a commitment to expose the plight of TIs. Wiebe explained that he did not know about TIs when he was at the NSA:

“We understand the predicament you are in, we have been in similar situations but don’t give up the faith — just because we haven’t seen it at NSA or CIA doesn’t mean a doggone thing…NSA and CIA work in compartmented areas, or on a Need to Know basis. We do know government has a history of experimentation against people, and the DOD has authorization to conduct experiments on people, sometimes with consent, some without consent. We know government has the power to deliver all kinds of aggressive measures against people.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, October 16, 2016, NSA Whistleblower Powerhouses Stand Up to Support “Targeted Individuals” Worldwide”)

Binney said they were planning on doing research and compiling reports from TIs,

“And then finally, we’ll try to put together recommendations on how people should proceed, to try and prove what is happening with them specifically with compiled evidence — in such a way that you can bring the evidence into a court of law. We’re trying to use the discipline that we use for our data analysis, that would be demonstrable in a court of law.”

Binney, Drake and others escaped the most punitive arm of the Deep State. The two most famous whistle-blowers were not so fortunate. Bradley/Chelsea Manning was the most unfortunate of the whistleblowers. For his service to humanity in exposing US war crimes, this young man/now woman received a formal sentence of 35 years. Political dissidents from Noam Chomsky to Daniel Ellsberg hailed him as a national hero, while politicians called him a traitor. Edward Snowden, who exposed the surveillance Panopticon, is more fortunate than Manning—he is forced to live in exile in Russia.

 

Back to Top

TIs and No-Touch Torture

TIs are plagued by basically two categories of what they experience as torture or harassment: 1) group stalking and 2) subjugation to experimentation with neuro-weaponry, and directed energy weapons. The first class of experiences is deemed highly improbable by Sheridan and James, and thus those who experience them are “delusional.” The second class is supposedly impossible.

Sheridan and James write concerning allegations of group stalking: “the resources or elaborate organization required to carry them out made the alleged activities highly improbable.” They give several examples: “hostile operatives being inserted in victim’s workplace and their children’s schools; 24-hour electronic surveillance involving teams of men in black vans; surveillance by cameras placed throughout the city; staff of shops and libraries being amongst the group stalkers; everyone in the street being ‘plants’ acting out roles towards the victim; ‘more than a thousand’ people being involved; traffic lights being manipulated always to go red on approach… collaboration between diverse agencies, such as the Automobile Association, a building society, a website, and neighbors.”

Below is a description of an example of group-stalking by Ramola D. She describes two changes in her life; first, the relocation of her family to a suburban neighborhood in Massachusetts, and then the transition that occurs when she becomes a TI. The rich prose and the very thick detailed descriptions give the account a sense of realism that one would not typically find in descriptions by “psychotics.”

Over the last couple years, after we moved up to the Boston area from Washington DC in the summer of 2011, I have been working mostly from home on various writing projects, editing a literary journal, and running creativity workshops and summer camps in art, science, and writing for children, as well as working at local academic institutions nearby. I’ve had a real taste this way of the quiet, lazy feel of the South Shore; I’ve enjoyed the ambience of living in a “settled” hundred-year old neighborhood in Quincy filled with stately, long-lasting oaks and maples, gentle and genteel neighbors, mostly older, with the occasional friendly young family with kids…the usual scurry of backyard bird life woken by the occasional inland-straying seagull, and above all, daytime quiet. Quiet, sleepy, placid, slow, laid-back, relaxed, easygoing are words I might have used to describe both the South Shore and its residents back then…

This unfortunately is no longer the case. Over the past year, things have changed dramatically in Quincy.

Now police sirens scream night and day down the once-quiet streets, including the main streets Newport Avenue and Hancock and, in my neighborhood, the close-by Harvard Street–and I mean, quite frequently, as if a thousand criminals were driving hellfire down the South Shore with trusty Quincy cops in high pursuit–and fire engines also shriek fairly often as they clang and roll by, often on quiet walks down winding sidestreets where no hint of burning houses can be seen, to add to which EMS trucks and vans also clog sidestreets and main streets, using sirens and trundling urgently by, as if the number of accidents or emergency medical calls had somehow increased overnight. Daytime quiet therefore no longer exists–there has been a dramatic escalation in the use of sirens, and it continues. This absurdity–especially absurd in its contrast to previously-peaceful Quincy–is clearly contrived. The local police have been incentivized to act like crazed patrollers of a criminal town. To add, if anyone’s noticed–all across the country, police cars and sirens have changed–they are outfitted with dozens of lines of blue lights now, their siren whoops and hollers now, rather than emitting a single round call, and the whole vehicle buzzes and shakes and whoops and dazzles as it flies by–bizarre? You bet.

Traffic also has changed. The roads of Quincy are now clogged with gigantic SUVs, Hummers, large pick-up trucks, and military-style pick-ups with menacing metal frames over the truckbed, large trucks of every kind, and frequent clogging of roads with roadwork trucks, even when there is no roadwork in sight. Starting in Fall 2013, traffic lights suddenly increased in duration. This has not abated. Traffic lights are noticeably longer, which means the long lines of cars with engines chugging, releasing masses of dirty exhaust into the atmosphere at lights are longer, and drivers–the usual Bostonian highway bellicosity notwithstanding–are markedly more belligerent, frequently tailgating, cutting off directly in front of cars, and crowding like swarming bees on highways.” (The Everyday Concerned CitizenWhy I Started This Blog)

It sounds crazy but the author seems sane! The author is an accomplished professional, a former professor, with a husband and child, with no history of “psychiatric” problems. The writing style itself reflects the mind of a writer fully in control of her craft, and of herself. If Ramola D appeared before a jury, undoubtedly the jurors would find her a credible witness––not dismiss her as delusional. To back up her story, there would be other targets with similar stories. The second change had taken place after Ramola had begun writing to her representatives asking about the chemtrails she saw in the sky. She also complained in her child’s school about the ethics of a childcare operation. At a trial against the American Deep State, historians would be called as expert witnesses to demonstrate that very similar tactics were used by Stasi — the secret police — in East Germany, or by Russian Intelligence. This establishes a pattern of such activities by Deep States.

It is impossible to fully explain in rational terms these programs since they are based on institutionalized paranoia, on collective insanity. The psychologists who say that such operations are highly unlikely fail to understand the mindset of those who designed these programs. Ramola D credibly argues that the purpose of such programs is to get the target labeled insane, so that the Deep State’s victimization of American citizens will remain invisible. But such a goal in itself makes no sense, is insane; it also indicates that the Deep State does not regard mental health professionals as very canny. She writes that these tactics seem “a desperate attempt to get the individual diagnosed professionally (by either an unsuspecting or complicit psychiatrist) as a “paranoid schizophrenic”, the moment he or she begins talking about covert harassment…being stalked by helicopters, being covertly implanted, being “gangstalked” on the roadways, or being surrounded by people wearing his favorite colors or talking about him or saying things in his presence straight out of his [own] head.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, 2015: “Targeted Individuals” are Non-Consensual Subjects in Criminal, Clandestine, Classified “Top Secret” MKULTRA-Extended Mind & Behavior Control/Torture Experimentation by Joint Military/Intel/Justice/Academic Institutions, as well as Targets of COINTELPRO and Electronic Warfare)

According to the Department of Defense in 2002, operations such as these are designed to be used against citizens of the enemy country (not against or upon citizens of its own host country) — the goal is to break the political will of the enemy. (Rich, 2011, New World War, Morrisville, NJ: Lulu Enterprises, p. 295.)

The evidence for the existence of group stalking is not just TIs’ and historians’ testimony but government documents (the books on Stasi are based on archives that became available with the demise of the Soviet Union) revealing similar programs in totalitarian societies and in the US in other periods. (Of course the programs have become more sophisticated over the years.)

For example, COINTELPRO was a program implemented by the FBI in the 1960s and 1970s designed to disrupt anti-war organizations and groups that were thought to be communist or socialist. J. Edgar Hoover announced the directives “to expose, disrupt, misdirect, discredit or otherwise neutralize” persons in these groups. (Mark Rich, 2011, New World War, p.87.) The Church Committee stated that under COINTELPRO, “the arsenal of techniques used against foreign espionage agents is transferred to domestic enemies.” (Ibid.) COINTELPRO included using undercover agents posing as activists in order to carry out surveillance or to act as provocateurs (in many cases that meant becoming the intimate partner of the activist––a heinous kind of subterfuge), and fomenting hostility between different factions of the left. Human Rights Watch notes,“The CIA then began monitoring student activists and infiltrating anti-war organizations by working with local police departments to pull-off burglaries, illegal entries (black bag jobs), interrogations and electronic surveillance. After President Nixon came to office in 1969, all of these domestic surveillance activities were consolidated into Operation CHAOS.” (Project Freedom, Echelon, “The NSA’s Global Spying Network,” accessed July, 2016.)

In 2002, we learned from the mainstream media that the Bush Administration planned to recruit millions of United States citizens as domestic informants in a program “likely to alarm civil liberties groups.” The Terrorism Information and Prevention System, or TIPS, meant the US would have a higher percentage of citizen informants than the former East Germany did. The program would use a minimum of 4 per cent of Americans to report “suspicious activity.” The scope of the surveillance network was broad: TIPS volunteers would be recruited primarily from among those whose work provides access to homes, businesses or transport systems. Letter carriers, utility employees, truck drivers and train conductors are among those named as targeted recruits. (The Sunday Morning Herald, July 15, 2002, “US Planning to Recruit 1/24 Americans as Spies”)

The program would involve a joint effort by local police, DOJ, state and local businesses. Even though the program was rejected by Congress, that does not mean it was not implemented–it merely went “dark” as the CIA calls it. That makes it all the more effective with Congress unaware of its existence and the media convinced it therefore did not exist. Mark Rich reports, “the American Civil Liberty Union contends that it and similar programs are being used aggressively across the nation.” ( Rich, The Hidden Evil, 2008, Morrisville, NC: Lulu Enterprises, pp.100-6, Informants, The Hidden Evil (online), accessed July 2016). According to Nick Turse, Bush had initiated similar programs under the auspices of Citizen Corps coordinated by the Department of Homeland Security. (See Turse, 2009, The Complex: How the Military Invades our Everyday Lives, NY; Metropolitan Books, excerpt at Google Books, accessed November, 2016.)

Rich describes a typical pattern of group stalking reported by TIs:

“City vehicles, postal vehicles, fire trucks, school buses, and taxis are reportedly stalking people. Construction projects encircle a targeted person’s home and also spring up at frequently visited places. Utility companies interrupt service. Local businesses provide poor service, appear incompetent or clumsy and work with civilian informants to harass targeted people in their stores.” (Ibid).

Note how this matches the report above of Ramola D, as well as activities reported by the “delusional” subjects of Sheridan and James. There is no evidence that those who constructed the psychiatric metanarrative read about TIPs, read the ACLU report (“The Surveillance Industrial Complex,” 2004, Jay Stanley, New York ACLU), or read about remarkably similar practices engaged in by secret police in East Germany, and elsewhere.

Only two websites and no books on this topic are mentioned in the bibliography of the article by James and Sheridan. And although these websites are excellent, it is obvious that James and Sheridan dismissed the reports on these websites without reading the material let alone grappling with the challenge it posed to their arrogant claim that all 120 of the TIs whose accounts they read were delusional!

In East Germany, the citizen-informants included doctors, lawyers, journalists, sports-figures, writers, actors, high officials in religious organizations, pastors, waiters, hotel personnel, and other workers. “Schools, universities, and hospitals were infiltrated from top to bottom,” wrote John Koehler, author of Stasi: The Untold Story of the East German Secret Police. Markus Wolf, a former Stasi officer, said that, in Germany, TIs were gangstalked by citizen agents who “literally encircled their everyday movements.” (See Rich, 2008, op.cit.) The homes of these persons were “put under siege.” (Rich, p.105.) TIs (the term was not used in East Germany) were typically stalked wherever they went. A report authored by Ray Cline, former Associate Director of the CIA, said that Stasi’s network of informers reached into “every crevice of society.” Although the goal here and in the Soviet Union was ostensibly “national security,” Cline noted that the surveillance system was really used to terrorize the population and inhibit them from “speaking out.”

It appears that no one has admitted to being citizen-spies in these programs, Rich wrote in 2008. According to a former Soviet citizen-informant, they were told “secrecy” was essential and they had to sign a contract to not reveal their work for the Deep State. They were told the public often did not realize “the danger these people represent to our society.” (Cited in Rich, 2008, op. cit., online edition.) In the US, one can only guess the citizen informers are told that the TIs they are stalking are threats to national security. “The behavior exhibited by these [ordinary] citizens indicates that they are absolutely convinced that this policy is legitimate and necessary.”

In almost all cases, the families of TIs believe they are mentally ill, and many of them end up (at least briefly) in a psychiatric hospital — most trust the doctors and unwisely confide in them — where the label they are given (“paranoid schizophrenic” is typical) discredits them permanently, particularly among their families. Even those who have spouses who are critics of the national security state find their spouses seem to have a need to deny such covert harassment including the use of neuro-weaponry is happening so close to home. Many TIs think therapists must be c­onsciously collaborating but, as I argued above, most professionals are deeply conformist political centrists (usually social liberals) and unaware of the existence of Deep State operations. This is a distinctive kind of totalitarian system that relies in general on a precarious balance of stealth/invisibility and complicitous cooperation.

Thus occurrences such as those reported by Ramola D and others are deemed “highly unlikely” by Sheridan and James, and thus neophytes who might take TIs’ allegations seriously are set straight by those professionals familiar with the psychiatric metanarrative. Besides group stalking, the other most common disturbance reported by TIs is voices in their head, what is known as Voice to Skull technology. Sheridan and James say that such technology is impossible. They don’t merely claim that there is no evidence such technology exists, they claim it is impossible for it to exist! This is laughable. This is the era of quantum physics––of quantum effects, and paradoxes that by all previous standards were impossible, and that has thus taught genuine scientists to be more humble. I never cease to be amazed by the hubris and idiocy of mental health professionals — nor do I think these authors are deliberately propagating disinformation.

Dr. Robert Duncan’s testimony has been ignored by the mainstream media although he has multiple graduate degrees from Harvard and Dartmouth. He has worked for the Department of Defense and the CIA on AI (Artificial Intelligence) and neuroscience projects which seek to stimulate and rewire the human brain (see below). He has testified that he worked on the development of this technology used to make a variety of neuro-weapons. In his book, Project Soul Catcher: Secrets of Cyber and Cybernetic Warfare Revealed (2010, Boise, Idaho: Higher Order Thinkers Publishing), he discusses weaponry that can cause virtually all of the effects reported by TIs — from “synthetic telepathy” to “Voice to Skull” voices. He became a whistle-blower when he discovered this technology was being used in non-consensual experiments on American citizens (or to punish persons who had angered the wrong people), just as LSD had been used in non-consensual experiments by the CIA in a previous era in MK Ultra, as documented by the US Congress’ Church Committee. He writes “I apologize to the human race for any contribution to these 4th generation weapons that I may have worked on that are more horrific than the nuclear bomb and whose cover-up is more pervasive than the Manhattan Project” (See www.drrobertduncan.com — not Duncan’s own website).

Dr. Barrie Trower is a former Royal Navy Microwave Weapons Expert and former Cold-War captured spy debriefer for the UK Intelligence Services with advanced degrees in physics. He states:

“During the 1950s and 1960s during the Cold War, it was realized…that microwaves could be used as stealth weapons. The Russians beamed the American embassy during the Cold War and it gave everybody working in the embassy cancer, breast cancers, leukemias, whatever, and it was realized then that low level microwaves were the perfect stealth weapon to be used on dissident groups around the world, because you could make dissident groups sick, give them cancer, change their mental outlook on life without them even knowing they were being radiated, and one of my particular tasks…I spent eleven years questioning captured spies…one of my particular tasks was to learn the particular frequencies of microwaves that they used on which particular victims, if I may use that word, and what the outcome was, and I built up a dossier…I’m probably the only person in the world with the complete list…I built up a dossier of what pulse frequencies of microwaves will cause what psychological or physiological damage to a person.” (See Institute for Geopathology/Barrie Trower.)

Trower’s testimony makes clear that — contrary to psychiatric claims — that not only are Voice to Skull weapons possible but the military already possesses them:

“So the military can now put voices into people’s heads to do whatever deed they wish it to achieve, and the super stores have also realized that rather than say ‘put that down, you’re going to steal it’, if you’re indecisive and you’re shopping, they can say ‘you really do want to buy this’, and after nine months, and I got the figure from one of your calls, somebody took one of your super stores to court for beaming them. And they made a phenomenal profit in just nine months, phenomenal profit. But because your Federal Communications Committee says that microwaves were safe, the case fell. (Barrie Trower, The Cooking of Humanity.)

Gloria Naylor tells of her own victimization by neuro-weaponry in her “novel,” 1996. In the Appendix she describes the experience of herself and others: 

Sleep deprivation is common and dreams are manipulated. Victims say, “They [whoever is targeting them] can see through my eyes, what I see.” Sometimes victims describe seeing the images of projected holograms. Thoughts can be read. Most victims describe a phenomenon they call “street theater.”

For example, people around the victim have repeated verbatim, the victim’s immediate thoughts, or harassive and personalized statements are repeated by strangers wherever the victim may go.

Emotions can be manipulated. Microwave hearing, known to be an unclassified military capability of creating voices in the head, is regularly reported. Implanted thoughts and visions are common, with repetitive themes that can include pedophilia, homophobia, and degradation. Victims say it is like having a radio or TV in your head. Less frequently, remote and abusive sexual manipulation is reported. Almost all victims say repetitive behavior control techniques are used and include negative, stimulus-response, or feedback loops. (Cited in Cheryl Welsh, 2008,In Contravention of Conventional Wisdom: CIA No touch torture makes sense of mind control allegations”, accessed November 2016.)

I have now been told of experiences just like these by several dozen TIs — all have the same pattern — the voices that respond maliciously to their own thoughts, the manipulation of dreams, (some describe unwanted sexual feelings or orgasms — “electronic rape”), many say the torturers can see through their eyes, etc — these experiences often reported by people in the age range 40 through 60s with no history of “psychosis.” (The experience of psychosis usually happens in early adulthood.)

Welsh finds that these mind control techniques are similar to the new kind of “no touch” torture used by the CIA in Guantanamo and elsewhere, which is discussed in the article. She writes, “The mind control techniques seem to be psychological techniques to disorient the victim and cause him to feel completely controlled, dependent, and at the mercy of his torturers.” The victim is estranged from his everyday world — like the “psychotic” — and trapped in a theater of the mind. Unlike the psychotic’s experience, this mind theater is engineered by the torturers. The goal is to break down the personality of the subject to gain complete control over him/her. I want to mention that although the new type of torture is based on a paradigm developed by the CIA and military, it is useless for extracting accurate information from subjects. In fact, when used upon TIs, it does not even have the intended results, because TIs increasingly resist isolation by joining — often over the Internet and by phone — other groups of TIs — and they usually become social activists against the Deep State.

Quoting from Alfred McCoy’s book, A Question of Torture, CIA Interrogation, from the Cold War to the War on Terror, Welsh states, “Thus, much of the pain from all forms of torture is psychological, not physical, based upon denying victims any power over their lives. In sum, the torturer strives ‘through insult and disqualification, by means of threats…to break all the victim’s possible existential platforms.”

Welsh insightfully writes,

“Alhough TIs go to extremes in trying to escape the physical targeting, they are unsuccessful. The psychological trauma is inflicted by the sense of causing one’s own pain. [In Guantanamo, causing one’s own pain was achieved by making prisoners stand for hours.] Many TIs report that the targeting causes TIs to become isolated from friends, families, and in many cases TIs are unable to work. This common reaction to targeting seems to be a type of self-inflicted psychological pain.”

What Welsh does not mention is that the rise of weekly or twice- weekly TI telephone conference calls sometimes with hundreds of TIs participating, has greatly diminished the psychological impact upon the victim — not that it ceases to be torture, but it does overcome largely the harrowing sense of isolation, and makes life tolerable for many. This is one reason the psychiatric metanarrative, which seeks to force TIs back into isolation and dependency on an expert who regards her as insane, is so harmful — and TIs would be well advised to avoid (and certainly not to argue with) all professionals who accept this metanarrative.

Welsh’s article makes the use of neuroweaponry less mysterious — although one cannot help but be puzzled by the sensibility of those who designed these tortures, which I repeat are not effective means of obtaining information. Drawing upon the work of students of CIA torture, Welsh highlights the psychological theory and distinctive goals of CIA torture — to break down the personality, not through direct psychical torture and injury but through the creation of physical distress and acute psychological trauma. In Guantanamo and elsewhere, the effect is achieved through a combination of making prisoners adopt stress positions (e.g., standing for hours), and subjecting them to isolation and control of the environment through sensory deprivation, constant noise, and discordant music. Welsh notes, “It seems logical to surmise that the successful techniques of no touch torture would cross over to more technically based remote, advanced mind control programs.”

Medical doctor John Hall writes in Guinea Pigs, Technologies of Control“Fast forward to today, we have over 300,000 people in the United States voicing complaints of electronic harassment….We have known for some time that several technologies exist that are capable of putting voices in one’s head to subliminally harass or control them.” (Guinea Pigs, Technologies of Control, 2014, Houston: Strategic Book Publishing). Why are so few people aware of this technology?

As Ramola D succinctly puts it, ”Neuroscientists in particular know that we stand today on the lip of a massive revolution in human affairs with the new knowledge of remote influencing technologies [remote from the target, often by satellite] capable of manipulating the human body and human brain. So do the Military and Intelligence agencies.” (Washington’s Blog, The American Public Informs President Obama’s Commission for the Study of Bioethical Issues About Ongoing Non-Consensual Human Experimentation in the USA Today, accessed July 2016.) By dismissing or ridiculing the complaints of the victims of these new technologies, psychiatrists, psychologists, and others in the helping professions, as well as journalists who unquestioningly propagate the psychiatric metanarrative, betray their own vocational mandates.

 

Back to Top

Neuroweaponry and Classified Military Research

In McPhate’s article, he implies that the tortures carried out on unwitting prisoners in the CIA’s /Deep State’s quest to gain absolute power over the human mind was an aberration that came to an end in the 1960s. “The military establishment, the theory goes, never gave up on the ambitions of MK Ultra, the C.I.A.’s infamous program to control the mind in the 1950s and ’60s,” he states.

He apparently has not read the numerous books documenting that the Deep State including CIA, NSA, and the military never gave up its research on influencing or controlling the mind. This has always been the purpose on their unclassified research. “The major areas of unclassified neuroscience research, molecular biology, cognitive neuroscience and brain imaging research, which had their beginnings in the 1950s, remain the dominant areas of research in neuroscience today,” writes Cheryl Welsh, a lawyer, TI and founder of Mind Justice. (Mind JusticeResearch Possibilities, Reliable Newspaper and Magazine Sources, Document Proof of Mind Control Technology.) Bioelectrical experiments on the brain were off limits to those who did not agree to put their talent to the service of the Deep State.

One might add that this arrangement — whereby the most potent tools for influencing the brain remained classified — was also in the interests of the pharmaceutical industry, a multi-billion dollar industry that would be financially threatened and diminished by the discoveries of bioelectric research. The psychiatric-pharmaceutical complex mushroomed in the 1980s and 1990s —  psychiatrists invented bogus explanations for life problems that required chemical fixes, e.g. the theory of “biochemical imbalances,” now discredited. But, as Welsh notes, there is evidence that research on the bioelectricity of the brain, the basis of the neuro-weaponry and mind control instruments used on TIs — has remained classified in CIA mind control programs that began in the 1950s and in DARPA programs to develop technologies for remote access to the brain. ”In the 1960s and 1970s, the electromagnetic aspect of neuroscience research was well funded and classified by the US government.” (Cheryl Welsh, Misled and betrayed: How US cover stories are keeping a Cold War weapon and illegal human testing secret, accessed July 2016.)

At the same time a cover story was propagated in the press that neuroweapons are “science fiction.” “As a result of both secrecy and prevailing scientific thought, however, bioelectromagnetic research has remained underfunded and disregarded by the mainstream scientific community.”(Cheryl Welsh, Misled and betrayed: How US cover stories are keeping a Cold War weapon and illegal human testing secret, accessed July 2016.) In other words the public knows little about mind control weapons because the military and Intelligence made sure the research was kept secret, and those few unclassified scientists who showed an interest in bio-electricity and would not submit to government control were steered away from researching the technology that held the most promise for mind control.

But actually there is more evidence for the existence of neuroweaponry despite efforts to keep it secret and despite the press secrecy and ridicule as exemplified in The New York Times article. Nick Begich, Ph.D., author and public speaker in his book, Controlling the Human Mind:The Technologies of Political Control and Tools for Peak Performance (Begich, 2006, Anchorage, Alaska: Earthpulse Press) unearths information that corroborates Welsh’s claim and that shows even in the unclassified sector there is evidence of the existence of the kind of advanced bio-electrical technology that is now used in non-consensual experiments on Americans. (See also Paul Baird, “Patented Technologies” at Surveillance Issues/Advanced Surveillance and Harassment Technologies, accessed November, 2016.) Actually the motive is not always obvious. Some believe the main purpose is no longer experimentation but primarily the torture of political enemies, or to create an environment of fear that stifles dissent.

Begich agrees the research that was soon classified began in the 1950s or 60s. While the research using LSD was publicized by the Church Committee, the CIA also had other projects. For example, MK-ULTRA Subproject 119 involved a critical view of the literature and scientific “bioelectric signals from the human organism, and activation of human behavior by remote [electronic] means” (Begich, Controlling the Human Mind:The Technologies of Political Control and Tools for Peak Performance, p.60). This description was written in 1960, thus corroborating Welsh’s argument.

In 1996, the US Air Force published a document called The Information Revolution and the Future Airforce by Colonel John Warden III, that laid out their plans for the future. It is worth quoting at length –it belies the psychiatric claim that the possession of advanced neuroweaponry is “impossible.”

“Prior to the mid-21st century, there will be a virtual explosion of knowledge in the field of neuroscience. We will have achieved a clear understanding of how the human brain works, how it really controls the various functions of the body, and how it can be manipulated (both positively and negatively). One can envision the development of electromagnetic energy sources, the output of which can be pulsed, shaped, and focused, that can couple with the human body in a fashion that will allow one to prevent voluntary muscular movements, control emotions (and thus actions), produce sleep, transmit suggestions, interfere with both short-term and long-term memory, produce an experience set, and delete an experience set [emphasis added]. This will open the door for the development of some novel capabilities that can be used in armed conflict, in terrorist/hostage situations, and in training….” (Begich, p.110).

The above descriptions are consistent with exactly the kind of problems that TIs claim they have as a result of what they believe to be targeting by neuro-weaponry! Psychiatrists do not read these documents (unless they work for the CIA), but by their standards the author of this document is delusional––because according to the psychiatric metanarrative, technology with these capacities could not possibly exist!

Furthermore, as early as 1980, John B. Alexander of the U.S. Army said,

“Mind-altering techniques designed to impact opponents are well-advanced. The procedures employed include manipulation of human behavior through the use of psychological weapons affecting sight, sound, smell, temperature, electromagnetic energy or sensory deprivation.” (Begich, p.100.)

Colonel Warden’s report goes on specifically to mention the creation of voices, referred to as Voice to Skull by TIs,

“It would also appear to be possible to create high fidelity speech in the human body, raising the possibility of covert suggestion and psychological direction… Thus, it may be possible to ‘talk’ to selected adversaries in a fashion that would be most disturbing to them.” (Begich, p.110, also at Earthpulse/Mind Control, accessed July 2016.)

Not only is this kind of impossible technology forecast in this report but Begich found that quite a few patents (unclassified) proving this technology — called Voice to Skull by TIs — existed.

In the early research, Begich comments it was reported that “clear sound signals” had been sent and received — this is reported in the non-classified sector. Dr Robert Becker, a physician known for his work on bio-electricity, wrote in 1995 about a current Voice to Skull device, that “such a device has obvious applications in covert operations designed to drive a subject crazy with voices, or to deliver undetectable instructions to a potential assassin.” (Begich, p.124.)

Begich in 2006 notes, about the Air Force report, confirming Welsh’s contention made years after the report, that the technology goes back to the 1950s: “The above report was a forecast for the year 2020. However, the reality is that these technologies already exist and there are a number of patents in the open literature which clearly show the possibilities. This research is not new but goes back to the 1950s.” (p.112.) The work done in the classified sector was far more advanced than someone without knowledge of this area could discern in 1995. Begich says that “what was known from experience” is that the government withheld patents under the advisement of the military. When inventors’ intellectual property is seized, “the inventors are given a choice — work for the government or you cannot continue your research on or even talk about the invention under a national security order. Those who do not cooperate have their work…shut down.” (Ibid, p.125.)

While the research in the 1990s was not new, what was new was the idea of openly using these weapons upon the civilian populations of “the enemy” and also as we will see upon US citizens. In 1995, the EPA wrote, “A new class of weapons, based on electromagnetic fields, has been added to the muscles of the military organism. The C3I [Command, Control, Communications and Intelligence] doctrine is still growing and expanding. It would appear that the military may yet be able to completely control the minds of the civilian population.” (p.112.)

The non-covert targeting of civilian populations by the military is a significant departure from its history. Clearly manipulation was used in the past but it was not openly espoused. But with such advanced technology evidently the military did not want to be confined to covert operations. Begich’s statement that in the past “the military used persuasion through real information…to win populations over” needs to emended. The military equally or more often used false information as well as false flag operations (e.g., attacks covertly committed by the military and attributed to Communists or terrorists) on civilians in enemy countries. But what is unprecedented was the ability and intention of the military to use “mind manipulation” —  through directed energy interventions on the brain itself — to gain support, or perhaps more likely not to garner support but to quell the resistance of civilian populations to US military interventions. (Ibid, also at Earthpulse/Mind Control, accessed July, 2016).

These kinds of weapons — those discussed above and others, euphemistically termed “non-lethal weapons” — are to be used not only against citizens of the “enemy” or against stateless terrorists but against Americans — and not only for the purpose of non-consensual experimentation which we have seen has been standard practice for decades, but also to control domestic “adversaries”! As Dr. Nick Begich notes, “On July 21, 1994, Dr. Christopher Lamb, Director of Policy Planning, issued a draft Department of Defense directive which would establish a policy for non-lethal weapons.” The policy connected the military’s weapons’ research to civilian law enforcement agencies. (Begich, p.156, also at The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Is the US Department of Justice Secretly Permitting Local Law Enforcement and the Military to Assault American Citizens Using Covert Directed-Energy “Non-Lethal” Weapons?, accessed July, 2016.)

According to this directive, non-lethal weapons are to be used on the government’s domestic “adversaries”. The definition of “adversary” now appears to include any American whose activities are disapproved of by the military or by law enforcement. The directive states (emphasis added): “The term ‘adversary’ is used above in its broadest sense, including those who are not declared enemies but who are engaged in activities we wish to stop. This policy does not preclude legally authorized domestic use of the nonlethal weapons by United States military forces in support of law enforcement.” (Ibid, p.157,  The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Is the US Department of Justice Secretly Permitting Local Law Enforcement and the Military to Assault American Citizens Using Covert Directed-Energy “Non-Lethal” Weapons?, accessed July, 2016.)

Begich aptly notes, “This allows the use of the military against the citizens of the country that they are supposed to protect…” It belies McPhate’s contention below that the goals of MK-ULTRA were abandoned in the 1970s. This describes a police state in which “non-lethal” weapons may be used upon anyone engaged in “activities” the military or police “wish to stop” — a police state in which the first Amendment has been completely vitiated, and the military, police, and Intelligence agencies are sovereign rulers invading not just persons’ homes (without warrants) but the sacred sanctuary of their brains, and in which even freedom of thought is monitored, proscribed, punished, manipulated. Or in other words 1984 on steroids! This of course by the standards of Psychiatry is both highly improbable and impossible. Tell that to the Military!

Furthermore, this plan is not merely a daydream of the Department of Defense. In 1995, the Pentagon received from the government $50 million to be used conjointly with the Department of Justice to develop these weapons —  and significant funding has been available every year since then. (Begich, p.158.) Begich aptly notes, “Not since the Civil War…has the military machine been turned against American citizens.” (Ibid, p.159.) Ramola D notes that “we are being publicly told that the Department of Defense long ago, in 1994, struck a deal with the Department of Justice to permit the military to use non-lethal weapons on American civilians, inside America, in support of law enforcement.”(The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Is the US Department of Justice Secretly Permitting Local Law Enforcement and the Military to Assault American Citizens Using Covert Directed-Energy “Non-Lethal” Weapons?, accessed July, 2016.)

According to military analyst and Washington Post journalist William Arkin, Department of Defense spending on electro-magnetic weapons had reached a billion dollars a year in 2008. (Belitsos, op.cit. “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control, accessed July, 2016.) Air Force Secretary Michael Wynne stated in 2007 that nonlethal weapons should be tested on U.S. civilians in crowd control situations before being used on the battlefield. Domestic use would make it easier to avoid bad press in the international community: “Because if I hit someone with a non-lethal weapon and they claimed that it injured them, I think I would be vilified in the world press.” (The Seattle Times, September 13, 2006, “Test Non-Lethal Weapons in the US, See also Associated Press article at “US to Use Microwave Weapons on American Citizens“, accessed July 2006.) So in order to avoid unfavorable international publicity, it is better to test these experimental weapons on domestic political dissidents!

I have now presented, to the jury of readers, a summary of the case against the Deep State—based on a demonstration that Deep State operations, as described in the TI metanarrative, do in fact exist. Above I listed the obstacles, 1) to 6) , to fairly assessing the testimony of the targeted individual. There is lack of familiarity with TIs, 1), and with accounts of group stalking, 5), and of advanced neuro-weaponry, 3), which I have tried to remedy.

I have attempted here to overcome a formidable but egregious mistaken objection to the TI metanarrative which is based on 2), people’s difficulty believing the US government would subject American citizens to harm. I have shown above that this is not merely a “conspiracy theory” meme but has been corroborated by legislative as well as Presidential commissions and reports by US representatives: Over and over American citizens have been subjected by US intelligence and military to dangerous, harmful, and often lethal experiments — for the ostensible sake of national security. The use of cybernetic weaponry for political control has been openly advocated by top officials in the military in documents produced by the military. To think that experimentation and this kind of application of weaponry came to an abrupt end in the late 1970s when the Church Committee convinced Congress to make it illegal would be naïve (see Jon Rappoport, Jan 9, 2015, CIA Mind Control Program: Did it Really End?, accessed November 2016), considering the historical record — as noted — of the CIA, and considering that no one was ever held accountable for these crimes against humanity — no one paid a fine, no one went to prison, no one lost his job. Not even Helms who, as mentioned above, had destroyed the MK ULTRA files.

I have attempted to address 4), the belief that only TIs are making these kind of “paranoid” claims about Deep State (including the CIA) operations. I have examined testimony by whistle-blowers, former employees of US intelligence — not only is there no oversight to protect the public but the Deep State is able to manipulate State power to deter whistle-blowers from speaking up.

I have addressed 5), the difficulty believing that such resource-intensive activities as group stalking take place, by showing that activities like group stalking have existed before in totalitarian countries — and that there is evidence, presented in mainstream press and ACLU reports, to suggest that a massive program, using citizen-spies, of surveillance and harassment was implemented post-9/11. Furthermore, it is obvious from cursory research that advanced technology which psychiatrists claim could not exist, 5), does in fact exist.

Above all, I tried to show that, contrary to 6), public faith in psychiatric “expertise, that psychiatric authority is not based on the access to and application of a legitimate body of knowledge but is based on pretense and the enactment of a variety of ceremonies that create the illusion in the public mind that mental health professionals are scientists, are doctors of medicine (often they are MDs but their medical expertise is irrelevant to what they do as psychiatrists) when in actuality their categories of “mental illnesses” have no more validity than a collectively shared fantasy and their methods of “treating” mental illness are nothing more than methods of social control. Those therapists who are helpful to clients are effective simply because they are compassionate, intelligent, and humane — the adoption of a “medical model” would undermine the efficacy of any therapist.

The psychiatric metanarrative about TIs is yet another example of the mental health professions’ historical subordination of the quest for truth to financial exigencies, and to their own social mandate to control and correct those who deviate from dominant social norms, to domicile, tranquilize, contain and mute troubled or troubling persons, persons who are disturbing to their own families and kinship groups. The casualty has been the truth and the erstwhile losers have been those individuals who are battling to assert and recover those constitutional rights and liberties on which this country was founded — albeit imperfectly.

Below is a discussion of the article in The New York Times about TIs which was based on the psychiatric metanarrative.

 

Back to Top

Discussion of the New York Times Article About TIs Based on the Psychiatric Metanarrative

United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers

MIKE McPHATE  | JUNE 10, 2016 | The New York Times

Nobody believed him. His family told him to get help. But Timothy Trespas, an out-of-work recording engineer in his early 40s, was sure he was being stalked, and not by just one person, but dozens of them.

He would see the operatives, he said, disguised as ordinary people, lurking around his Midtown Manhattan neighborhood. Sometimes they bumped into him and whispered nonsense into his ear, he said.

“Now you see how it works,”they would say.

At first, Mr. Trespas wondered if it was all in his head. Then he encountered a large community of like-minded people on the internet who call themselves “targeted individuals,” or T.I.s, who described going through precisely the same thing.

The group was organized around the conviction that its members are victims of a sprawling conspiracy to harass thousands of everyday Americans with mind-control weapons and armies of so-called gang stalkers. The goal, as one gang-stalking website put it, is “to destroy every aspect of a targeted individual’s life.”

McPhate picks a poor example of a TI—or the best example if his goal was to persuade readers TIs are really psychotics.

Trepas’ confusion is made clear by the end of the article when Trepas himself wonders if TIs really exist. He could have picked Ramola D, winner of Grace Paley award for short stories; or Karen Stewart who worked for NSA for 28 years; or Gloria Naylor, best-selling novelist; or numerous other people I could name who were very accomplished before they became TIs. But then New York Times readers would be less inclined to dismiss TIs as psychotic. Mr. Trepas is not representative of the majority of TIs with whom I have spoken.

The author has set up his narrative. Mr. Trepas is a troubled person. He sees what he thinks are spies “disguised” as ordinary persons. (A knowledgeable TI would know that “ordinary persons” are recruited into the surveillance program.) At first McPhate tells us Trepas wonders if he is delusional, if “it was all in his head.” But then he encounters a large community of “like-minded people” who were organized around the conviction that there is a “sprawling conspiracy” to harass thousands of Americans.

Trepas begins to view his “delusional thoughts” as a legitimate interpretation of his experience, this is where the problem is defined. McPhate tells readers repeatedly throughout the article that the problem is the psychotic does not recognize he is mentally ill. This is the essential plot of the narrative — the basis of the conflict that propels the action in the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs. The problem is created or aggrandized when the pseudo-TI, or the covert psychotic, encounters a group of “non-compliant psychotics”– the psychiatric term for patients who are unwilling to take the medications psychiatrists say they need, and/or deny they are mentally ill. They are the unwitting villains in the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs.

The article continues:

A growing tribe of troubled minds

Mental health professionals say the narrative has taken hold among a group of people experiencing psychotic symptoms that have troubled the human mind since time immemorial. Except now victims are connecting on the internet, organizing and defying medical explanations for what’s happening to them.

From McPhate’s viewpoint and that of many if not most Americans, mental health professionals are the experts on reality. The “medical” experts say that the TIs’ interpretation of their experience should be discounted–and therefore the journalist will discount it. The TI is a psychotic in a new guise and her interpretations should not be taken seriously but viewed only as symptoms of her troubled mind. Psychotics have existed “since time immemorial.”

But now “victims” of “psychosis” are connecting with other covert psychotics on the Internet and “defying” “medical” explanations of their experience. This spells trouble. Only the psychiatric, the medical, explanation is real. In the psychiatric metanarrative, the TI is a non-compliant psychotic, and the behavior and beliefs of non-compliant psychotics are taken out of their social context — in which they make sense — and construed as unintelligible symptoms of an illness. The TI is treated by mental professionals as a non-compliant mental patient, and there is nothing she can say to change that diagnosis except by deciding to be a compliant mental patient.

The community, conservatively estimated to exceed 10,000 members, has proliferated since 9/11, cradled by the internet and fed by genuine concerns over government surveillance. A large number appear to have delusional disorder or schizophrenia, psychiatrists say.

Again it is repeated that there is a large and growing number of these troubled minds. Their growth is attributed to 9/11 and the Internet, and they are “fed” by “genuine concerns” over government surveillance. The journalist obviously must acknowledge the genuineness of this concern because, after all, readers know about Edward Snowden’s disclosures — but he wastes no time in getting back to his topic. A large number of these persons are schizophrenic or afflicted with delusional disorder — psychiatrists say so. The term “schizophrenic” is introduced, a term that has taken on the most ominous connotations, as opposed to the more mild term “delusional disorder.”

In the psychiatric metanarrative, schizophrenics are afflicted with the worst mental illness and thus constitute the lowest caste in the psychiatric status hierarchy of the mentally afflicted. They are the untouchables who for centuries were sequestered in state institutions and are now in our midst but restrained — often by force of law — by the fetters of toxic sedating “anti-psychotic” drugs. Thomas Szasz called schizophrenia “the sacred symbol” of psychiatry and argued that its evocation of chaos and unreason gave psychiatry its identity as the epitome and protector of order and reason (even to Freud who wrote contemptuously of schizophrenics), guarding us from these barbarians who had arisen inexplicably from the midst of Western civilization itself.

So “a large number” — psychiatrists say — of TIs are schizophrenics or otherwise afflicted. What about those who are not psychotic? Will the journalist give them a voice, allow them to express their concerns, and to comment on the psychiatric narrative? Or will they remain voiceless? In fact by the end of the article they have disappeared altogether, since McPhate does not interview one TI or one whistle-blower — with the possible exception of Dr John Hall — whom he presents as credible.

Yet, the phenomenon remains virtually unresearched.

The phenomenon has been defined by McPhate: Psychotic persons who defy psychiatric explanations and thus, do not get the help they need. But research is required on this medical problem.

For the few specialists who have looked closely, these individuals represent an alarming development in the history of mental illness: thousands of sick people, banded together and demanding recognition on the basis of shared paranoias.

Specialists in what? Psychobabble? The journalist defines the “alarming development” in the history of psychiatry: Thousands of sick paranoid people “banded together” — a “growing tribe of troubled minds.”

They are banded together like criminals — “a tribe of troubled minds” — and “demanding recognition.” The problem is a medical problem — and thus a social problem because we have now a tribe of psychotics who refuse to accept that they are mentally ill and thus will not get the psychiatric help they need. Psychiatry’s narrative, dramatized by the journalist, seems designed to evoke the public’s deepest fears about this “alarming development.” The words themselves suggest something sinister. These paranoid persons “defy” and “demand” (from society). The journalist thus takes the psychiatric narrative and gives it a journalistic and dramatic form — he is documenting a serious new medical-social problem. The TI’s metanarrative, insofar as it is alluded to — that the TI is a victim of surveillance, groupstalking, mind manipulation — is depoliticized, emptied of substantive content, and redefined as psychotic symptomotology. The journalist and the psychiatrist can make the TI’s narrative disappear — they can banish from the public imagination any genuine concerns the TIs’ metanarrative may evoke about surveillance and other pernicious operations of the Deep State.

But of what do they “demand” recognition? The question is elided by the phrasing: “on the basis.” The journalist implies they demand not just recognition but acceptance of their collective “paranoias.” This is in fact true, however carelessly phrased. TIs do not want to be classified and dismissed as psychotics, as paranoid. They want the TI metanarrative as expressed by their most articulate spokespersons to be taken seriously and reckoned with by other members of civil society — including mental health professionals whose responsibility is to help the distressed, and journalists whose responsibility is to search for the truth.

The journalist does not investigate what the TI defines as an alarming development: The growth of an apparatus of surveillance, control, and torture which victimizes American citizens, and is outside accountability. All indications suggest he has not even read the books given him by TIs he consulted -– and he has certainly not seriously considered the testimony by scientists and former agents who confirm the TIs’ “delusions.”

They raise money, hold awareness campaigns, host international conferences and fight for their causes in courts and legislatures.

These psychotics are busy and effective activists for their cause.

Perhaps their biggest victory came last year, when believers in Richmond, Calif., persuaded the City Council to pass a resolution banning space-based weapons that they believe could be used for mind control. A similar lobbying effort is underway in Tucson.

They deceived the people of Richmond, California.

An “echo chamber” of paranoia

Dr. Lorraine Sheridan, who is co-author of perhaps the only study of gang-stalking, said the community poses a danger that sets it apart from other groups promoting troubling ideas, such as anorexia or suicide. On those topics, the internet abounds with medical information and treatment options.

This tribe, this community of psychotics poses a real and distinctive danger to themselves and to the public because of the Internet — according to the expert on group stalking whose “investigation” “found” group-stalking did not exist. As mentioned above, this study was flawed and showed lack of rudimentary knowledge about experimental methodology.

An internet search for“gang-stalking,”however, turns up page after page of results that regard it as fact. “What’s scary for me is that there are no counter sites that try and convince targeted individuals that they are delusional,”Dr. Sheridan said.

According to the mental health professional, a psychologist and “expert” on gang-stalking, these delusional persons go to the Internet and find copious websites with “information” that confirm the reality of their sense that they are being stalked. The expert finds it frightening that there are no “counter” websites to tell them they are “delusional.” Of course she accepts the psychiatric metanarrative. Not because she is intentionally complicit — although past history suggests some of the most prominent psychiatrists and psychologists worked for the CIA. But because (see discussion above), like most mental health professionals, she is angered and disturbed by non-compliant patients — patients who won’t take their “medication,” and who will not accept the psychiatrists’ evaluation of them as “mentally ill.”

They end up in a closed ideology echo chamber,” she said.

We are told by the expert on reality how the psychotic delusion is anchored in the sick mind. It never occurs to her that she may be in a closed ideology echo chamber…

“In instructional tracts online, veterans of the movement explain the ropes to rookies:

Do not engage with the voices in your head.

If your relatives tell you you’re imagining things, they could be in on it.

Do not visit a psychiatrist.”

Here we see the basis of the psychiatrist’s own fear. These “psychotics” are violating the sacred psychiatric injunction: When troubled, consult a mental health professional.

This violation threatens to undermine psychiatric authority, or more precisely the authority of the mental health system with its hierarchy of professionals, including psychologists, social workers, and other allied disciplines.

TIs should take note. If they randomly consult a psychiatrist or any mental health professional, the odds are they will be treated as non-compliant psychotics. The psychiatric metanarrative denies that the State in America has the ability and the will to subject persons to sophisticated forms of tortures — and refuses to look seriously at the copious evidence that it has done so in the past and is doing so now.

Note that the journalist uses again the term “tribe,” with its menacing connotations — earlier the reference was to a tribe of troubled minds. Don’t be fooled, the experts warns: This new breed of psychotics comes from all classes and even includes professionals in higher socio-economic echelons, highly educated people, people the average person would not suspect were really psychotics, even schizophrenics, passing as normal.

In Facebook forums and call-in support groups, they commiserate over the skepticism of their loved ones and share stories of black vans that circle the block or co-workers conscripted into the campaign.

They are unhappy that their loved ones don’t believe them and they share stories the journalist depicts as bizarre. This emerging psychiatric meta-narrative dramatized by the journalist makes the TIs appear very paranoid, and it seeks to drive a wedge between the TI and her loved ones who will increasingly find the psychiatric metanarrative recounted in the Press — even in the prestigious New York Times.

A T.I. subgenre has blossomed on Amazon. Left, the cover of John Hall’s “Guinea Pigs: Technologies of Control,” and Robert Duncan’s “How to Tame a Demon.”

They have self-published dozens of e-books, with titles like “Tortured in America”and“My Life Changed Forever.”In hundreds of YouTube videos they offer testimonials and try to document evidence of their stalking, even confronting unsuspecting strangers.

All this evidence the expert warns is part of a planned effort — a conspiracy comes to mind, although the psychiatric expert would never call it a conspiracy — to “try to document” evidence that they are not psychotics but victims.

They don’t “try to” document evidence–they do document this. And McPhate chose to ignore it, despite McPhate’s correspondence with TIs and whistle-blowers — as TIs have noted. (See Human Rights Watch3 Blog, The Questionable Reporting of The New York times, accessed August, 2016.) He also does not mention that some of the people documenting the group stalking and the use of neuroweaponry are whistle-blowers or other experts (journalists for alternative blogs) with credentials and backgrounds that help establish their credibility.

Ramola D provides a list of authorities at The Everyday Concerned Citizen/Robert DuncanRamola herself is a prolific writer and TI (since late 2013) who won a Washington Writers’ Publishing House award in 1998 for her poetry collection Invisible Season, and the 2008 AWP Grace Paley Prize in Short Fiction for her collection Temporary Lives & Other Stories — she was for years a professor at George Washington University and is the recipient of a 2005 National Endowment for the Arts Fellowship in Poetry.

Of course, by omitting these credentials, it is easier to convince readers these whistle-blowers are delusional. Dr. Robert Duncan, for example, has multiple graduate degrees from Harvard and Dartmouth. He has worked for the Department of Defense and the CIA on AI and neuroscience projects which seek to stimulate and rewire the human brain. He became a whistle-blower when he discovered this technology was being used in torturous non-consensual experiments on American citizens, just as LSD had been used in non-consensual experiments by the CIA in a previous era in MK ULTRA, as documented by the US Congress’ Church Committee.

Although McPhate corresponded with Duncan, he left all of Duncan’s comments out of the article. McPhate’s manipulation of his readers is further illustrated by the fact that he selects one of Duncan’s relatively unimportant books to mention (“How to Tame a Demon”) — a book with a title (in the context McPhate has established) that makes it appear to the reader that Duncan is a psychotic who is obsessed by (literal) demons.

He could have mentioned Duncan’s seminal book, Project Soul Catcher: Secrets of Cyber and Cybernetic Warfare Revealed — but that title would not have been as likely to make Duncan look paranoid. Just mentioning a few of Duncan’s accomplishments would have undermined the psychiatric metanarrative McPhate promulgates. For example, Duncan writes, “My projects have included algorithms for Echelon and CIA natural-language parsing and classification of document content, IRS formula for red-flagging audits, writing the artificial intelligence code to automate tracking of the Soviet Nuclear Submarine Fleet and all water vessels, work integrating HAARP with SIGINT, SIGCOM, and SPAWAR…” — that is just the beginning of a long list. (See Dr. Robert Duncan.com, not Duncan’s website, accessed 2016.)

Again note that the TIs are presented as a threat: “Unsuspecting strangers” (emphasis added) -– that is, strangers who do not realize that TIs are really psychotics — are alerted they may be “confronted” by these disguised non-compliant psychotics. I have spoken to dozens of TIs. I don’t know any who “confronted” strangers. Many sought to tell their story to mental health professionals — invariably with adverse effects.

“They wanted to basically destroy me, and they did,” a young mother in Phoenix says in one video, choking back tears. She lost custody of her daughter and was sent to a behavioral health hospital, says the woman, whose name is being withheld to protect her privacy. “But I am going to fight back for the rest of my life.”

She adds, “And guess what, I’m not crazy.”

Here is the leitmotif, formulated in different ways, but always the denial of one’s insanity —  woven throughout the narrative. The journalist is trying to persuade the readers that the psychiatric metanarrative with its trope of the (mad and bad) non-compliant patients — here in the guise of the TI — is the truth, beyond doubt. The real problem, he tells us, echoing the psychiatrist, is that the covert psychotic will not admit, or does not realize — as a victim of the delusions of other TIs — that she is psychotic.

The journalist shows no sympathy for this bereaved woman who lost custody of her daughter. Or if he has any sympathy it is because she is, in his mind, a non-compliant psychotic who resists getting psychiatric help. He quotes her remark that she’s not crazy, but if there is any doubt that his intent is to convey that she is crazy, it is dispelled in the succeeding sentence about Dr. Sheridan’s study which found that all of the people who claimed to be victims of group stalking were delusional!

The woman quoted above lost custody of her daughter — probably because she went to an authority and volunteered information. The desire for the recognition for one’s identity, one’s sanity as a human being who is a subject, an equal, a person whose experiences and perspective are regarded as meaningful, leads many TIs — who cannot confide in family and friends — to seek out psychiatrists or therapists under the illusion that they will be understanding.

McPhate’s discussion with several mental health professionals is indicative: they do not hide their disdain for “patients” who refuse to accept they are ill. Although this is not discussed by McPhate, psychiatrists and other mental health professionals are particularly irked by the unwillingness of many patients to take psychiatric drugs. Ever since “psychotics” were released from state mental hospitals, they have been battling with mental health professionals for the right to liberty — a major site of contestation is the bodies of mental patients.

Many patients are reluctant to take “anti-psychotics” (above all other “meds”) because of the extremely discomforting or painful “side effects” typical of the neuro-toxic (see above) brain-damaging “anti-psychotics,” and/or because they are increasingly aware of adverse effects on their health. (See Seth Farber, 2012, The Spiritual Gift of Madness: The Failure of Psychiatry and the Mad Pride Movement, Rochester, Vermont: Inner Traditions.) Yet professionals insist that patients’ unwillingness is based on an irrational refusal to get well. (Yet we saw above that in the long run, these drugs actually impede the recovery process, although professionals are “in denial” about this fact.) Subconsciously, the psychiatrist sees the refusal to “accept one’s illness” as a threat to her authority, her legitimacy, her professional identity. (See Rosenhan experiment discussed above.) It is also a challenge to her socio-economic status, since an exodus of patients from the system would result in a loss of jobs and markets. It should be noted studies have shown mental patients were not significantly more violent than “normal” people.

Dr. Sheridan’s study, written with Dr. David James, a forensic psychiatrist, examined 128 cases of reported gang-stalking. It found all the subjects were most likely delusional.

I discussed this study above. This representation of the study is inaccurate. It did not “find” the subjects were delusional. It found that 2 mental health professionals, a psychiatrist and a psychologist, independently reached the conclusion that 128 subjects had to be delusional because what they reported in their written accounts was either highly unlikely or impossible. But on what basis can one call an event “highly unlikely”? Sheridan and James give examples of such events including hostile operatives being inserted in victim’s workplace and their children’s schools, 24-hour electronic surveillance involving teams of men in black vans, etc.

Scientific studies of the sort published in this journal generally calculate the probability statistically. There is no way for Sheridan and James, or anyone, to measure the likelihood of 24-hour surveillance. The TI reports seem highly unlikely to the professionals because it is an event they have never read about in the newspapers and that seems to lack a rationale. But before they come to convict the TI of being delusional — the diagnosis has very negative social consequences — they should examine the TI’s evidence.

Sheridan and James are like a jury which heard only the argument of the prosecution, and plugged up their ears when the expert witnesses for the defense — for the TI — took the stand.

In the light of this evidence, these allegations are very plausible — Intelligence agencies have behaved this way in the past here and elsewhere. Sheridan and James and McPhate have such strong prejudices that they refuse to examine the evidence — any decent lawyer for TIs would have easily gotten them thrown out of the jury pool. To determine conclusively if a TI is delusional one could hire a private investigator to determine if they are being stalked. (Of course if the perpetrators are canny they would realize an investigator was on the case, and temporarily stop the stalking.) Or one could examine the kind of documentary evidence for the operations of the Deep State I present above. Sheridan and James are not investigators — they are biased mental health professionals. And McPhate is not an investigative journalist — at least not here.

My own conviction as a psychologist who has not abandoned critical thinking is that most of the TIs I have met are not delusional. (In a few cases I have been unsure and a few I thought were delusional.) Certainly their allegations are very plausible and thus these allegations should not be dismissed as delusional. In most cases I have examined there is a clear difference between the “schizophrenic” and the TI. (I do not accept that “schizophrenia” is an incurable disease — I regard it as a emotional-spiritual crisis; its seeming chronicity a result of the iatrogenic drugs and standard practices of mental health professionals.)

“One has to think of the T.I. phenomenon in terms of people with paranoid symptoms who have hit upon the gang-stalking idea as an explanation of what is happening to them,” Dr. James said.

 A mishmash of conspiracy theories

McPhate uses the pejorative term mishmash as if conflict and diversity is not the norm in virtually every intellectual discipline dealing with complex phenomena. I doubt he would say quantum physics is a mishmash of theories.

Perhaps unsurprisingly, the community is divided over the contours of the conspiracy. Some believe the financial elite is behind it. Others blame aliens, their neighbors, Freemasons or some combination.

The movement’s most prominent voices, however, tend to believe the surveillance is part of a mind-control field test done in preparation for global domination. The military establishment, the theory goes, never gave up on the ambitions of MK Ultra, the C.I.A.’s infamous program to control the mind in the 1950s and ’60s.

What is implied here is that MK ULTRA was an anomalous program that ended in the 1960s.

A leading proponent of that view is an anesthesiologist from San Antonio named John Hall.

McPhate lets Hall talk but at this point in the article the framework is now established — the psychiatric metanarrative. So the unwary reader assumes these are the words of a mentally-afflicted man and they ring hollow.

John Hall, an anesthesiologist in San Antonio, has been a leading voice of those who feel targeted.

In his 2009 book, “A New Breed: Satellite Terrorism in America,”Dr. Hall gave his own account of being targeted. Agents bleached his water, he wrote, and bombarded him with voices making murderous threats.

The book made a splash because of the messenger: a licensed member of the medical establishment who was telling those who feel targeted that psychiatrists were misleading them. A janitor knows as much about the human mind, he wrote.

As we saw above, a janitor often does know more about the human psyche than the psychiatrist who cannot even distinguish the sane from the insane. In Rosenhan’s study it was other mental patients who suspected the pseudo-patients were not insane. None of the professionals guessed. Their training and miseducation prevents them from understanding what goes on in persons’ minds.

Dr. Hall, 51, was invited for an interview on “Coast to Coast AM,” a conspiracy-minded radio show based in California that is said to reach millions of listeners. After that, he said,“I had probably three or 4,000 emails from people saying:‘It’s happening to me in this state.’It’s happening to me in Florida.’It’s happening to me in California.’”

The similarities of the cases spoke to a wide-ranging campaign, he said. “If the psychiatrists want to say that this is schizophrenia or delusional disorder, that’s fine,” he said. “But every one of these victims have the same story.”

Dr. Hall discusses gang stalking, psychiatry and MK Ultra.

While Dr. Hall has faced scrutiny from the Texas Medical Board over his mental fitness, he retains his license. Over time, however, many others who identify as gang-stalking victims end up out of work. They are mocked by colleagues, tolerated by family. Friends and spouses fall away.

McPhate reports this outcome as if it is a result of TIs’ psychosis — their intractable attitude, their refusal to get psychiatric treatment.

A pretext for violence

The despair that results has led some to lash out in violence.

Many in the community, for example, are convinced that Aaron Alexis, who killed 12 people at the Washington Navy Yard in 2013, was a victim. Mr. Alexis, a former sailor, left behind a document accusing the Navy of attacking his brain with “extremely low frequency” electromagnetic waves. On the side of his shotgun were etched the words “my elf weapon.”

It was unclear when Myron May’s mental distress began, but by the fall of 2014, it had become too much. He quit his job as a prosecutor in New Mexico and traveled to Florida. There, he videotaped a testimonial about how gang-stalking had ruined his life.

“As you can see right now,” he says into the camera, “I am totally not crazy.”

Myron May: “I’m what’s called a targeted individual.”

Laying out his case, he describes an episode at a gas station where he believed somebody in dark glasses was mimicking his movements. “It was really creepy,” he said. “Everything I did, he did.”

Later in the video, he prays for forgiveness for his future sins. “Father,” he says, “right now I ask that you look down on all the targeted individuals across the globe. Help them to cope with this madness.”

“On Nov. 20, 2014, Mr. May walked into a library at Florida State University, where he had graduated in 2005, and shot three people, leaving one paralyzed. He dared the police to kill him, then fired in their direction before being fatally shot, officials said. He was 31.

Officers standing over the body of Myron May on Nov. 20, 2014, after the shooting at Florida State University.

The vast majority of people with psychosis never resort to violence. Still, studies suggest that a small number of those experiencing psychotic episodes — especially paranoid thoughts, accompanied by voices making commands — are more likely to act on hostile urges than people without a mental illness.

And what if paranoid thoughts are put in their mind by the CIA? Is the percentage of identified TIs — who McPhate claims are paranoid psychotics —  or real paranoids more likely to act on hostile urges than the angry non-TI, non-psychotic? McPhate presents no evidence to confirm this.

Furthermore several psychiatrists have demonstrated that the commonly prescribed “anti-depressants” (Selective Serotonin Reuptake Inhibitors or SSRI) actually cause some patients to become violent. Dr Peter Breggin writes, “It’s not the patient’s ‘mental illness’ that causes violence, it’s the drugs…[A]ntidepressants can and do cause violence on every level from people who feel more irritable or less loving toward their families to people who commit domestic violence or carry out mass murders.” (See Peter Breggin, July 25, Mad in America, “Violence Caused by Antidepressants”, accessed November, 2016).

Yet the idea that TIs and other “non-compliant psychotics” have a tendency toward violence is an integral part of the psychiatric metanarrative — a justification for forcing so-called patients, including TIs, to take psychiatric drugs, sometimes the very drugs that cause violence!

Many in the T.I. community, as anyone would, have repudiated the shootings by Mr. Alexis and Mr. May. But some also harbor troubling views about their perceived oppressors. They question how people could be so cruel.

Why is this troubling? Don’t most people take the view that their oppressors are cruel? It is troubling because McPhate accepts the psychiatric metanarrative which posits that the TI, the non-compliant psychotic, has a tendency to retaliate against her enemies — and thus requires psychiatric restraint — forced drugging.

Karen Stewart of Tallahassee, Fla., believes large numbers of regular people have been brainwashed by the National Security Agency into thinking that she is a traitor or terrorist. Wherever she goes, she says — to church, to the grocery store, to the doctor’s office — they are there, watching.

McPhate withholds critical information from the readers: Karen Stewart worked for the NSA as an Intelligence analyst from 1982 to 2010 — for 28 years. For 28 years she was never considered a psychotic. The biographical facts that are omitted buttress the TI metanarrative whereas the false depiction of Ms. Stewart strips her of her credentials, her authority, and reduces her to the status of an ordinary non-compliant lunatic. McPhate’s inaccurate depiction serves one purpose however — it strengthens the credibility of the psychiatric metanarrative.

Stewart writes elsewhere that she was “railroaded out” of NSA

“just two years before I could retire because I had dared ask the Inspector General to investigate a matter involving work credit and promotion theft. I moved to Florida in 2011 to get away and wait for the lawsuit (appeal to forbidden retaliatory firing) to be adjudicated by the Judge Lawrence Gallagher at the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC) in Baltimore.” (Washington’s BlogNSA Whistleblower Karen Stewart Speaks Candidly About Illegal and Criminal NSA & FBI Programs of Organized Stalking and Electronic Harassment in the USA & Abroad)

She states,

“Under former President Bush and now continued under President Obama, what apparently started decades ago as illegal and clandestine programs of experiments on human subjects, such as the CIA’s MK ULTRA, has resulted in the proliferation of Defense Contractors such as Lockheed-Martin, Raytheon, General Dynamics, and others, making secret agreements with Federal agencies such as DOD, DIA, NSA, DHS, etc., to allow them and related laboratories and universities to expand inhumane experimentation programs such as illegal experiments for Directed Energy Weapons on unwitting and non-consenting American citizens.”(See The Everyday Concerned Citizen/Karen Stewart, NSA Whistleblower: Synopsis of the Silent Holocaust Taking Place in the United States.

It baffles her, she said. But worse, “It makes me angry to see how many people in this country are sociopaths. They are absolute groupthink drones,” she said. “I don’t even consider them human anymore.”

“A need for meaning’

Susan Clancy, a Harvard-trained psychologist who has researched people who believe they’ve been abducted by aliens, said it could be extremely difficult to dissuade patients who have latched onto beliefs that they think explain their delusions.

“I think it’s a need for meaning and a need to understand your life and the problems you’re having,” she said. “You’re not some meaningless nobody. You’re being followed by the C.I.A.”

McPhate brings in yet another professional — this one from Harvard — to give weight to the psychiatric metanarrative. Yet he made contact with a number of former whistle-blowers, and quotes only one — without even mentioning her career at NSA.

Yet many of the people McPhate interviewed were not “meaningless nobodies.” Stewart was an NSA employee for decades. Robert Duncan, the whistle-blower whom he interviewed, is a former CIA employee and a scientific prodigy with multiple degrees from Ivy League schools. John Hall was a physician. Rosanne Schneider, whom he interviewed (but does not mention), is an author and artist. And furthermore there are numerous highly accomplished TIs. But including them would have undermined the psychiatric metanarrative.

In that way, Dr. Clancy said, the behavior shares a trait with religious belief: To abandon it would be life upending.

Paula Trespas, Mr. Trespas’s mother, said she avoided debating with him.

“It wasn’t something that he was making up,” she said. “He really felt the way he felt and experienced what he experienced. I got to the point where I was just finally saying to him: “I’m very, very sad that you have to go through this. I wish that there was something that I could do.’ ”

The big hope is that society will wake up to what’s happening and put a stop to it, those who feel targeted say. In some cases, they do seek psychiatric help. In others, the delusions subside. For the rest, the prognosis isn’t good, psychiatrists say. Many contemplate suicide.

Mr.Trespas, now 49, says he went so far as to prepare a rope.

Sitting at a coffee shop in Brooklyn last month, he says the stalking has thankfully quieted down. But he says his harassers have also been seeding his body with Morgellons, a painful, insectlike infestation of the skin that many doctors say is psychosomatic.

He is gaunt, with weary, sad eyes. It’s been eight years since it all began, he says. He can’t hold a job. His friends have drifted away.

The TI community includes a wide range of persons — many are accomplished writers or professionals, as McPhate noted above. Yet by choosing one of the loneliest, most confused, and most forlorn TIs, one who is not even sure of the TI metanarrative, he reinforces the credibility of the psychiatric metanarrative. This is a self-identified TI who may or may not be a TI. (Many TIs have reported that they have encountered disinformation agents posing as TIs.)

The online community has been a crucial support, he says. “But we don’t know exactly what’s happening,” he says. “Maybe we’re believing the wrong thing. I don’t know. That’s why I try to keep my mind open about who and what and why and how.”

Trepas is the only TI I’ve heard of who thinks “maybe we’re believing the wrong thing.”

One thing he is certain of though, he says: He’s not crazy.

McPhate ends the story on the cautionary motif of the psychiatric metanarrative: TIs are psychotics who refuse to accept that they have an illness — they are non-compliant psychotics.

It is a sad fact that the mainstream media has followed the lead of the psychiatric “authorities” in dismissing the allegations of TIs and defining them all as non-compliant treatment-resistant psychotics. They thus help to promulgate the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs. Journalists and mental health workers rest their case ultimately on articles like that of Sheridan and James. This article has the appearance of a genuine “investigation,” of a scientific study — but it is all hot air. It substitutes reliability for validity, the agreement or shared fantasy of mental health professionals for correspondence to social reality. In other words the hidden sub-text of pseudo-investigations like Sheridan and James is, “It is so because we the experts say it is so.”

It is my hope that in the future The New York Times will serve its function as the fourth estate. Instead of dismissing TIs and promulgating the psychiatric metanarrative, McPhate or another journalist will seriously investigate TIs’ claims. Instead of interviewing only the most troubled TIs, and thus, wittingly or unwittingly, reinforcing the psychiatric claim that TIs are covert psychotics, this journalist would interview some of the more articulate spokespersons for TIs (some of whom are mentioned above), and seriously consider their allegations.

He or she would not treat psychiatric opinions as revealed truth but would give voice to dissidents who do not subscribe to the psychiatric metanarrative. The journalist would present the testimony of a few of the whistle-blowers who have worked in intelligence — Robert Duncan is today the most prominent and outspoken of former employees of American intelligence who worked on cybernetic weaponry. While not revealing classified information, Duncan has exposed the advanced technologies used against innocent persons. As a whistle-blower he follows in the tradition of men like Edward Snowden and William Binney whose views as a supporter of TIs could also be solicited.

The torture of American citizens described by TIs is a violation of international proscriptions against torture and against non-consensual experiments on subjects. The policy of both APAs prohibit psychiatrists and psychologists from inflicting harm upon anyone. The Coalition for an Ethical Psychology wrote:

“The APA and other health professional organizations have a duty to support the ethical practice of the profession, which includes protecting their members from complicity in human rights abuses and other violations of international law.”(See Coalition for Ethical Psychology, Preserve Do-No-Harm for Military Psychologists: Coalition Responds to Department of Defense Letter to the APA, accessed November, 2016).

By labeling TIs as “psychotic”, mental health professionals are wittingly or unwittingly complicitous in the most serious kinds of human rights abuses — in crimes against humanity.

 

Back to Top

The CEP and the Power of the Ethically Guided Minority

The Coalition for Ethical Psychology has served an important and exemplary role within the American Psychological Association.They were formed in 2006 in response to psychologists’ participation at Guantanamo as mentioned above. Their goal is “to expose and oppose psychologist involvement in any state-supported abuse with a national security rationale.” They state,

“We are alarmed that the APA, the world’s largest mental health organization, has overlooked, and even colluded with, subversion of psychology to state power. The ethical commitment of psychology as a profession is to improve human welfare universally.” (See Coalition for Ethical Psychology, About.)

This is a far more subversive goal than the founders may realize, since the entire mental health system is a regime of surveillance and control — of the “mentally ill” — and a servant of State power. CEP places APA members between conflicting mandates: On the one hand, is the ancient injunction of the helping professions to “do no harm” and the ethical obligation to serve the universal good, and on the other hand is their perceived obligation to the state to control trouble or troubling individuals. This is a conflict of interests considering the repressive and often punitive nature of the modern state. Another factor compromising their ability to help clients is the professionals’ financial ties to the pharmaceutical industry, which has been enormously lucrative for mental health professionals and leads them to place profits before people. This conflict is most obvious with psychiatrists but it affects everyone working in the “mental health” system.

The mental health system is a social control agency similar to law enforcement and criminal justice, although distinctive in many respects, as shown above. The linchpin of the system is the administration of psychiatric drugs disguised as medicine: Psychiatric patients in the public sector — state mental hospital or group homes and “out-patient treatment” — are often subjected to involuntary psychiatric “out-patient” commitment (most heinously, the involuntary injection of psychotropic drugs). Involuntary treatment has recently itself been declared to be a violation of international law and human rights by the UN Committee on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities. (See Tina Minkowitz, Mad in America, Oct 13 2013, “UN Prohibition of Psychiatric Commitment: Review and Analysis”.)

Dr. Bonnie Burstow writes,

“Take away the medical veneer and what we have here are substances given for non-existent disorders [problems in living], all of which by their nature create chemical imbalances, all of which disable, a number of which are associated with violence, all of which profoundly damage the brain. . . Is damage as treatment the best we can do? Is a society of rampant iatrogenic damage acceptable?” (Bonnie Burstow, Psychiatry and the Business of Madness, 2015, New York, p.200)

An ethical psychology or psychiatry is impossible in an unethical society. As R.D. Laing pointed out, the well-adjusted bomber pilot — dropping bombs on women and children of the “enemy” — serving the interests of the State and of corporations, would be considered “mentally healthy” by mental health professionals although he is committing war crimes that violates elementary moral norms. That is, in an ethically perverse society, conformity and adjustment is sanctified and murder in service of the state assumes a façade of moral legitimacy.

The organizers of Coalition for an Ethical Psychology (CEP) are therapists in private practice (not in the public sector) and thus relatively free of State coercion. They are often unaware that the public mental health system is normally abusive. Abuse is not an aberration. CEP and others dedicated to realizing the ideal of an ethical society seek to expose unethical practices in the helping professions, and pressure professionals to uphold transcendent ethical norms. Every act of exposure and protest — no matter how selective — gives witness to values that transcend the mental health system and the State to which it is customarily subordinate.

I hope I have made it clear that many or most self-identified TIs are victims of no-touch torture and/or non-consensual experimentation. The declaration that all TIs are delusional is based upon premises that do not stand up to historical examination. Thus, the promulgation of the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs by professionals who have failed to investigate the allegations of thousands of self-identified Tis is a failure to take its own ethical mandate — to improve human welfare — seriously. If not an act of deliberate deception, it is an act of bullshitting, to quote Levine. Sheridan and Young’s pseudo-scientific study (see above) claims to have “found” that all TIs are delusional psychotics and thus enables professionals to silence and “treat” them, while avoiding the inner moral conflict that would ordinarily result from condoning and facilitating (no-touch) torture.

Like psychologists’ participation in the torture regime in Guantanamo, treating TIs as psychotic is a blatant, witting or unwitting, subservience to Deep State actions that are violations of human rights as recognized by international law. It is comparable to the Soviet psychiatry “treatment” of dissidents. The fact that a small minority of persons within the American Psychological Association have succeeded on occasion in pushing the group to take the high road and stand up for universal human welfare against the dictates of the State is testimony to the power of the individual inspired by transcendent moral ideals. Had the individuals who formed CEP not had such a strong commitment to the truth, had they not forced APA membership to confront their leaders’ involvement in designing a torture regime, the APA would still permit its members to participate in torture under the guise of “national security.” As Bruce Levine said, it’s easier to continue to bullshit than to face the truth. CEP provides a lesson in leadership, in creative maladjustment, for all of us.

A logical next step for an organization like CEP which opposes “psychologist involvement in any state-supported abuse” is to investigate the allegations of TIs and expose and oppose the a priori “diagnoses” of all TIs as psychotics. This focus may seem arbitrary or misleading since as stated, state-supported abuse is the norm in the mental health professions, but it has its own logic. Robert Whitaker and dissident professionals who have written for Mad in America oppose involuntary psychiatric drugging — another state-assisted abuse — but they would undoubtedly have no success in getting any professional body to publicly oppose involuntary drugging. Tina Minkowitz Esq., lawyer and psychiatric survivor, did however succeed in persuading the UN Committee on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities to assert forced treatment as a human rights abuse. (However UN bodies have little effect in the United States.) The CEP agenda must be guided by what is possible, and practical — and by the orientation of their own organization.

While treatment with brain-damaging drugs is the norm in the mental health system, overt torture is still regarded by most APA members with disdain — after all, it has no medical rationalization. Therefore it is possible that CEP could persuade members of the APA to oppose the routine labeling of TIs — without any investigation — as “psychotic.” (As I have shown, this diagnosis is “justified” by invalid studies.) An APA resolution of this kind would be publicized by the mainstream media, and would undermine the psychiatric metanarrative. Short of this, The New York Times and the mainstream media will continue to defer to Psychiatry and describe all TIs as non-compliant psychotics. Furthermore, while the corporate Press will continue to propagate the psychiatric metanarrative, it is time for journalists who have opposed US torture at Guantanamo and elsewhere, to expose no-touch torture on TIs and the complicity of mental health professionals in covering up these human rights abuses.

The therapeutic state fueled now by pharmaceutical industry grows without constraints while the Deep State operates without Congressional or public oversight. The development of a totalitarian regime — nominally a constitutional republic — in which human rights and the constitutional right to liberty are routinely trampled upon is today an ominous prospect in America. The prevention of such a development is now dependent upon the willingness of small minorities of individuals who are inspired by transcendental ethical ideals to mobilize larger groups to oppose the human rights abuses that are committed by the Deep State and by the mental health system and disguised and justified as “medical” treatments for an ever increasing number of covert “psychotics.”

 

Back to Top

***

This article may be re-published or re-posted in full or part, with attribution and linkback, by granted permission of the author. Please share widely.

Not long ago, in June 2016, The New York Times published a piece by Mike McPhate, titled “United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers,” purporting to offer an unbiased journalistic exploration of the subject of “Targeted Individuals.” This piece garnered quite some attention and consternation from among the ranks of those actually being targeted, surveiled, and assaulted today with EMF/sonic/scalar weapons–as well as those educated, informed Americans who are well-aware that such high-tech surveillance, targeting, and assault is indeed occurring–and was covered here earlier, in response, as well as here, in reportage of a key interviewee, Dr. Robert Duncan’s response.

Now Dr. Seth Farber, a deeply insightful psychologist, psychotherapist, scholar, and author steps forward to address the glaring omissions, elisions, deceptions, and inadequacies of Mr. McPhate’s article, pointing up the hollowness of its claim to objectivity, and offering a comprehensive discursive response that considers the diverse aspects of contemporary psychiatry, contemporary surveillance, historic non-consensual human experimentation, historic covert Intelligence operations, whistleblower testimony, classified military research, neuroweaponry, and the increasingly-evident hand of the “Deep State” which bear on this issue. I am pleased to publish this tremendous tour de force by Dr. Farber, honored that my words are included in it, and highly recommend that every single psychiatrist, psychologist, medical professional, and journalist in the USA and worldwide read it, closely and completely, to fully understand the extreme nature of Targeting in our midst today, as well as the unethical, colluding role played by psychiatrists and co-opted Media, in protecting it.

ayt-problems-with-psychiatristsaIn Dr. Farber’s words: The development of a totalitarian regime—nominally a constitutional republic—in which human rights and the constitutional right to liberty are routinely trampled upon is today an ominous prospect in America.” The prevention of such a development,” he emphasizes, is now dependent upon the willingness of small minorities of individuals who are inspired by transcendental ethical ideals to mobilize larger groups to oppose the human rights abuses that are committed by the Deep State and by the mental health system… I hope with all my heart that this article will be the harbinger of such profoundly-needed change. — Ramola D, December 2016

***

Dr. Seth Farber, Ph.D, is an author, psychotherapist, and an editor of The Journal of Mind and Behavior –he completed his doctorate in psychology at California Institute of Integral Studies in 1984. His work has been influenced by such renowned dissident psychiatrists as the late Thomas Szasz, M.D. who wrote the Foreword to Farber’s first book, Madness, Heresy and the Rumor of Angels: The Revolt against the Mental Health System (1993). See his books and email address at http://www.sethHfarber.com.

The Psychiatric Metanarrative, Targeted Individuals, and the Deep State: A Response to The New York Times

by Seth H. Farber, Ph.D

Introduction
The Corporate Media and Psychiatry: Veiling the Human Rights Violations of the Deep State
Advancing the Psychiatric Metanarrative, Neutralizing Deep State Critics
The Psychiatric Fantasy System and the Battle Against Non-Conformity
The Psychiatric Pharmaceutical Industrial Complex
The Deep State on Trial
The CIA Assassination of Its Own Agent — Protecting Whose Security?
Whistleblowers Post 9/11
TIs and No-Touch Torture
Neuroweaponry and Classified Military Research
Discussion of the New York Times Article About TIs Based on the Psychiatric Metanarrative
The CEP and the Power of the Ethically Guided Minority

Introduction

As a dissident psychologist-therapist and critic of the mental health system, I hope the Mike McPhate article in The New York Times will open the eyes of targeted individuals (“TIs”) and other supporters of constitutional rights, to the fraudulent nature of the mental health professions (“United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers,” June 11, 2016). Most TIs already know that if they are mentioned at all by the mainstream (i.e., corporate) press, it is to be ridiculed as “conspiracy theorists,” or dismissed as plain psychotics. The term “TI” refers to an individual who is a victim of organized group stalking and non-consensual harassment or experimentation with the use of advanced neuro-biological weaponry–these activities are believed to be initiated by Intelligence organizations. Ramola D (Dharmaraj), an award winning fiction-writer and poet, former English professor and social activist who became a TI in 2013, now an independent journalist, writes that the source of the targeting is “joint Military/Intel/Justice/Academic institutions.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Human Rights, Accessed July 2016). Mental health professionals with rare exceptions believe TIs are paranoid psychotics who are not “targeted” by anyone.

Back to Top

The Corporate Media and Psychiatry: Veiling the Human Rights Violations of the Deep State

McPhate’s article exemplifies the collusion of the mainstream (corporate) media with Psychiatry, thus veiling (unwittingly, at this locus near the bottom of the hierarchy of power) the operations of the Deep State. I use “Psychiatry” as a synecdoche to denote the mental health system with its panoply of psychologists, social workers and various mental health professionals and workers. I use it also to denote the entire psychiatric-pharmaceutical industrial complex since the mental health system is oriented toward pushing toxic drugs (‘prescribing medications”)– and is financed largely by the multi-billion dollar pharmaceutical industry.

McPhate’s article in The New York Times is a chilling example of journalists’ willingness to abdicate their power of critical thought and leave the determination of what is “reality” in the hands of the secular priesthood which reigns today in the name of psychiatry –– although it is almost certain that had McPhate seriously discussed the Deep State, his article, as mentioned, would not have been printed. In McPhate’s article the pretense of journalistic “balance” is virtually abandoned. Instead we hear only one authoritative voice –- that of the psychiatrist, the mental health professional. (A month later The New York Times published another article that also deferred to the psychiatric metanarrative, “The Baton Rouge Gunman and ‘Targeted Individuals,’” July 19, 2016, accessed October, 2016.) Although journalists defer habitually (i.e., without deliberation) to the “expertise” of psychiatrists, the editorial board and publishers of the corporate newspapers like The New York Times have obviously deliberately decided not to print articles that discuss the operations or even the existence of targeting by “the Deep State.” Thus it is not surprising that McPhate wrote an article that would not have threatened any of the vested interests discussed below.

Peter Dale Scott, Professor Emeritus at the University of California, is most often associated with the esoteric and little known but increasingly publicized concept of the Deep State. It is the explicit or implicit root metaphor that is at the basis of the TI metanarrative, as well as the metanarrative of “9/11 Truthers,” critics of the official government account of the attacks on 9/11. The TI metanarrative is complex and has given rise to too many variations among its users. Hopefully the discussion here will provide enough background to give readers a rudimentary sense of the TI metanarrative and its understanding of the growing encroachment of the Deep State into the lives of ordinary Americans.

Scott describes the Deep State as

“a parallel secret government, organized by the intelligence and security apparatus, financed by drugs [and other sources], and engaging in illicit violence, to protect the status and interests of the military against threats from intellectuals, religious groups, and occasionally the constitutional government.” (Voltaire Network interview with Scott, April 6, 2011, accessed 2016.)

I would add that it protects not just military interests but corporate and law enforcement interests as well, and that it is largely unaffected by public opinion or elections and operates autonomously beyond the reach of the law, behind the structure of the legislative, judicial, and executive branches of government, influencing the operations of these branches and maintaining social control in societies that are nominally democratic. Ironically, although targeting maintains social control by creating an atmosphere of fear, it also, presumably inadvertently, transforms many of those targeted individuals who are not political activists (the majority of TIs) into political activists and critics of the Deep State and its anti-democratic functions.

Ramola D, an eloquent spokesperson for the TI narrative, tersely and succinctly conveys in a few words the extent of targeting today:

“All over the US today, and indeed the world, people are being nonconsensually rolled into covert programs of 24/7 physical assault, torture, and slow-kill assassination by EMR microwave/radio/sonic neuroweapons, also called Directed Energy Weapons or Non Lethal Weapons; 24/7 remote access, manipulation, and assault of their brains and central nervous systems; and 24/7 “full spectrum surveillance” involving overt community surveillance, concealed electronic monitoring, and public/community stalking, accompanied by discrediting and social ostracism by defamation and slander campaigns, and in-community harassment and PsyOps projects (more on all this below & in succeeding posts).” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, 2015: “Targeted Individuals” are Non-Consensual Subjects in Criminal, Clandestine, Classified “Top Secret” MKULTRA-Extended Mind & Behavior Control/Torture Experimentation by Joint Military/Intel/Justice/Academic Institutions, as well as Targets of COINTELPRO and Electronic Warfare.)

But despite its prevalence, targeting amazingly remains largely “in the dark” to those who are not participants or victims. Wikispooks notes,

“In contrast to overtly authoritarian rule, deep states must operate more or less secretly, like terrorist groups, so preserving secrecy is a high priority. Control of the commercially-controlled media is essential to the effective preservation of secrecy needed for the deep state to work effectively.” (Accessed 2016 at Wikispooks/Deep State)

Psychiatry also plays a critical role in maintaining secrecy — in veiling the operations of the Deep State — although I will argue here that it does this even though the majority of mental health professionals are completely unaware of the existence of the Deep State. It is able to play this function unwittingly because the profoundly conformist nature of Psychiatry leads it to define any deviation from the norm as pathology — including any belief in the existence of a shadow government or Deep State (such a belief is disparaged as “conspiracy theory”), let alone being a victim of this entity (which is deemed “delusional”).

This is not to deny that a small but influential group of leading figures and institutions in Psychiatry have, from the establishment of the CIA to date, consciously (and secretively) collaborated with non-consensual and thus illegal experiments carried out by the CIA and other intelligence agencies, and psychologists with the sanction of the American Psychological Association: APA psychologists recently played a role in designing torture of Guantanamo detainees. (In fact leaders of both APAs have long had a close relationship with the CIA.)

This led to a backlash by membership of the American Psychological Association—organized by a few principled psychologists—which voted in 2008 to prohibit psychologists from working in national security settings, against the opposition of the APA leadership (Roy Eidelson, 2013, “APA Fiddles While Psychology Burns,“ in Psychology Today, August 5, 2013, accessed November, 2016).

(The activities of the infamous psychiatrist Ewan Cameron who reduced hundreds of patients to a vegetable-like state through intensive electroshock, funded by the CIA and the Canadian government, set a precedent followed by other mental health professionals who collaborated with the Deep State in designing and implementing programs of torture, used for various purposes. (See Colin Ross, 2006, The CIA Doctors, Richardson, Texas: Manitou).

But the attitude of mental health professionals to “mental patients” has been losing its soft edge of seemingly benign paternalism, and becoming increasingly punitive, although still wrapped in terminology of medical care. Psychiatry has undergone radical changes since the early 1960s when the state mental hospitals began to be emptied and the project of “deinstitutionalization” was announced. The state hospital population shrunk nationwide from over half a million in the late 1950s to 40,000 today. The ideal, if not the reality, was progressive–to reintegrate the “mentally ill” into the community. What took place was “transinstitutionalization” (see Thomas Szasz, 1998, Cruel Compassion, NY: Syracuse University Press): Patients were placed into small scale group homes and (originally) cheap hotels where they were given stupefying “anti-psychotic medication” and isolated from the community. Yet there were legal safeguards that were designed to protect arbitrary confinement and forced drugging of patients.

But the merger of psychiatry with the pharmaceutical industry created a new imperative — to confine ever more patients, to induct ever more persons into the mental health system, and to force psychiatric drugs on an ever increasing number of the “mentally ill.” Furthermore, as society has morphed into a national security state, so the mental health system has become more repressive and the legal safeguards of patients’ right to liberty have been razed. In the 1990s, states enacted involuntary outpatient commitment laws — the main purpose of these laws was to force “non-compliant” former mental patients to take neuro-toxic “anti-psychotic” drugs on an outpatient basis (see below). (The drugs in a “depot” form were injected into the patient’s body where it would be released gradually over the month.) In the psychiatric metanarrative, non-compliance is treated both as pathology and as misbehavior, as a sign that the patient is both mad and bad.

Recently, although the Murphy Bill (HR 2646, which passed the House in 2015) met resistance in the Senate, some of its worst provisions were incorporated into HR 34, the 21st Century Cures Act – a boondoggle for the pharmaceutical industry which lowers FDA safety standards (see Dr. Mercola, July 13, 2016, 21st-Century Cures or Corruption?) — which passed overwhelmingly in the Senate on December 7, 2016. This revised bill incorporates many of the worst provisions of the Murphy bill, including the one at the top of Psychiatry’s wish-list: The ability to force psychiatric treatment (psychiatric drugs) on anyone psychiatrists deem too mentally ill to realize drugs are “good” for them. In other words, a history of violence is no longer a criterion for forcing toxic drugs on “non-compliant” patients. Psychiatry will no doubt continue to push for those provisions not included in the new bill.

Patients’ rights activist Lauren Tenney, Ph.D. stated about the bill,

“It is urgent that people realize that no child will grow up without psychiatric evaluation. All people will become, in a generation or two, acclimated to being psychiatrized; psychiatry and its arms of drugs and institutions will become even more standard [than it is now] in our society.” (Mad in America, Nov 29, 2016, “Warning: A Psychiatric tsuNAMI is Upon U.S.”/From Katherine Hine–Warning, the US govt is trying to legalize forced psych drugging!)

Today in states across the country new hospitals “are being built in droves,” as Janet Phelan puts it. (See “Still Crazy After All These Years: Psychiatric Lockdown Returns to the US” in Activist Post, Oct 5, 2016, accessed November, 2016.) Sharon Cretsinger, social worker and director of Kent Empowerment Center, noted, about the Murphy Bill, that “the most frightening parts of [the Murphy Bill] are the severe limitations placed on PAIMI advocates (Protection and Advocacy for Individuals with Mental Illness) who are specifically prohibited from discussing with “individuals who lack insight into their condition” their right to refuse medication or act “against the wishes of their caregivers.” (Ibid)

PAIMI, an agency “which was specifically set up to address the needs and questions of individuals in treatment,” is prevented from advocating for patients, except in cases of “abuse and neglect.” The limits placed on advocates, Cretsinger says, “shows clearly that Murphy’s bill does not (want) anyone refusing treatment [‘medication’], or even talking about refusing treatment.” The Bill increases funding for involuntary out-patient commitment and for Assertive Community Treatment. Phelan describes ACT, “This enables teams of mental health workers to troll the streets, looking for homeless or other individuals to ‘treat’ in situ.” Of course typically ACT leads to involuntary treatment.

The bill also authorizes grants for “programs for infants and children at significant risk of developing, showing early signs of, or having been diagnosed with mental illness including serious emotional disturbance.” Those eligible for these services are defined as “a child from birth to not more than 5 years of age.”

This is an obvious effort to “funnel” babies into treatment with powerful psychotropic drugs–and create life-long (albeit a shortened life) customers for the pharmaceutical industry. Already there are 8 million children on psychotropic drugs. But, heavily lobbied by the drug industry, our representatives have decided to get more children hooked on drugs–decided to sacrifice babies on the altar of Mammon.

This is the stream of history into which TIs have entered, one which has seen a political battle against psychiatric coercion by patients themselves, beginning in the 1970s with the formation of the first “mental patients’ liberation” organizations. (For a history from 1960 to 2012, see Farber, 2012, The Spiritual Gift of Madness:The Failure of Psychiatry and the Rise of the Mad Pride Movement, Rochester, Vermont: Inner Traditions.) By 2016, the website Mad in America was booming-–with tens of thousands of readers every week, including many psychiatric survivors–– readers participate in discussions beneath the articles. But as dissent has flourished on the Internet, the movement against psychiatric coercion has shriveled in the “real” world. Patients were making progress but the tide began to reverse in the 1990s, and thereafter. The Murphy Bill, a product of post-9/11 America, represents a new, more pernicious, more repressive phase in the social control of mental patients. It mirrors the militarization of the police. (See Randy Balko, author of The Rise of the Warrior Cop , quoted at US Police Have Killed Over 5000 Civilians Since 9/11, MintPress News, accessed October, 2016.)

To what degree it will lead to deliberate collaboration of psychiatry with the military, law enforcement, and/or various agencies of the Deep State is unpredictable, although going full speed ahead on such a course risks the danger of polarization among mental health professionals who for the most part see themselves as “medical specialists” on a par with cardiologists and do not like to think of themselves as dirty cops. The backlash of APA membership’s against its leadership’s participation in scarcely veiled torture is indicative. (See James Risen, 2015, The New York Times, August 7, 2015, “Psychologists Approve Ban on Role in National Security Interrogations“.) At the top of the hierarchy of professionals we can infer that status-conscious professionals will be pleased, as always, to collaborate secretly with high status officials in Deep State agencies. The promulgation of the new psychiatric metanarrative will enable the majority of mental health professionals to tacitly co-operate with the Deep State with more extensive and more punitive modes of social control–while preserving their identity as medical helpers by defining TIs as just another category of “non-compliant psychotics”–-and with more punitive measures as a necessary response to the growing epidemic of mental illness and the emergence of more “troubling” (to use McPhate’s word), more “treatment-resistant” (a common professional term) manifestations of “psychosis.”

 

Back to Top

Advancing the Psychiatric Metanarrative, Neutralizing Deep State Critics

In fact McPhate’s article — strategically placed in The New York Times, the renowned bastion of (corporate) liberal journalism — helps to craft and popularize the emerging psychiatric metanarrative about TIs, which we will analyze below. (A metanarrative is a grand narrative, or theory that tries to give a coherent totalizing account to a variety of historical events and a multitude of human experiences.) As opposed to the psychiatric metanarrative, a TI metanarrative is also emerging and being used as a tool by TIs. While the narrative has a number of variations depending on the perspective of the individual theorist (whether a TI or not), it has a basic skeletal structure which has been shaped by the experiences and theories of many TIs and by the experiences and political theories of an increasing number of technical experts and whistle-blowers -– former employees of the CIA, NSA, and other Intelligence or military organizations.

These former employees are almost always highly educated and among the most intelligent strata of society, and include computer experts, highly sophisticated scientists (from electrical engineers to physicists) and spies. Intelligence agencies recruit the best and the brightest -– and increasing numbers of these persons are possessed by a keen conscience. Thus they find themselves morally unable to perform the tasks they are assigned or to sanction what they know is being done in the name of protecting national security.

If they are asked why they left the CIA or NSA, they invariably give the same answer. From William Binney who worked for the NSA for over 30 years before he resigned in 2001 to Edward Snowden, these persons will tell you with patriotic fervor that they took an oath, not to uphold the government or the NSA but to uphold the US Constitution. In other words these whistle-blowers argue that our actual government today as influenced by the agencies of the Deep State is in conflict with constitutional democracy as conceived by our founding fathers. Edward Snowden has given words and a face to today’s political dissident/whistle-blower in the US, persecuted or in exile ostensibly for giving information to the enemy, but in reality for exposing operations of the State to American citizens. (Chelsea or Bradley Manning did not receive equivalent public exposure -– primarily because she was imprisoned and silenced before she could speak to the Press.)

If McPhate even read any of the accounts by critics of the Deep State (he demonstrates no familiarity with their disclosures), he must have disregarded them, because the psychiatric metanarrative is presented in his article as the truth and the TI metanarrative is viewed through the prism of the psychiatric metanarrative as nothing more than a delusional symptom of the paranoid schizophrenic’s diseased mind. When McPhate describes TIs as unequivocally psychotic, he is ignoring or discounting the accounts of some of the smartest former employees of Intelligence, including those who designed the technology used for surveillance and control, and including those experts he interviewed. Robert Duncan, a whistle-blower and former CIA employee who helped to develop the cybernetic weapons that to his dismay are being used on innocent Americans, was interviewed and then virtually ignored (see below) by McPhate.

McPhate’s article is based uncritically on the psychiatric metanarrative that journalists for the corporate press are trying to make the official metanarrative: All TIs are mentally ill persons–they are not individuals who are victims of group-stalking and various forms of non-consensual experimentation with neuro-weaponry. (McPhate implies that not all Tis are mentally ill but seems to consider that fact irrelevant to his discussion.) They are psychotics who come together with other psychotics and reinforce each other’s delusions — thus they phobically avoid consulting mental health professionals to get the professional help they need.

The psychiatrist is the socially sanctioned arbiter of what is real (for most persons in secular society), and the TI’s metanarrative with its references to historical events and accounts by contemporary whistle-blowers and its claims about the power of the (secretive) Deep State is not even recounted except very briefly and elliptically by the journalist — ostensibly because the psychiatric authority has determined it provides no cues to reality and it will only mislead readers. Psychiatry’s business is the construction and reproduction of “reality” — psychiatry provides the stamp of authority for the official reality and works with journalists to propagate the new metanarrative about TIs. By failing to interrogate power, journalists are betraying their vocation as the 4th estate, which historically held private and government institutions accountable to democratic ideals and exposed potential totalitarian and plutocratic threats to democracy. (Today such journalism can be found in books and in Internet magazines, but only rarely in the mainstream Press.)

Most persons including TIs assume that the psychiatric diagnostic system is legitimate. This is why TIs often claim they were “misdiagnosed.” They assume that there are correct diagnoses, free of bias, just as in other fields of medicine. Many TIs think if they find an honest psychiatrist they will be cleared, legitimized, given a “correct” diagnosis, not realizing that the psychodiagnostic system itself is a fantasy, a delusion! They don’t understand that every mental health diagnosis is a misdiagnosis, that the system of psychodiagnosis is nothing but a collective fantasy -– in psychiatric terms, it is a consensually validated (financially remunerative) delusional system.

For example, TIs who have gone to the mental health system have typically been diagnosed as “schizophrenic,” “paranoid,” and with “delusional disorder.” All of these diagnoses imply the TI is hearing voices that do not exist, or imagining people are stalking her or manipulating her brain with neuro-weaponry/or attacking her body with remote-influencing technologies. In the psychiatric metanarrative on TIs’, the TI is so overwhelmed by a paranoid distrust of people in general that she fantasizes the government or the CIA or other malevolent forces are persecuting her.

Yet many TIs optimistically and/or naively think they can change their psychiatrist’s mind by presenting documentary evidence of the existence of these Deep State operations. What they do not understand is psychiatrists and other mental health professionals are indoctrinated to regard any behavior or allegations that deviate from the social norm as pathological. This is not surprising considering the historical function of Psychiatry was the control of deviants, of poor people, of mad people, the preservation of the status quo. (Since the 1980s, its function has also been to market drugs for its pharmaceutical partners.) The purpose of institutional “mental health” was not to rehabilitate people, to help them heal from their wounds or to promote progressive social change. (Some people were helped in unusual instances by mental health professionals -– this happened far more frequently in the private sector.) But the allegation that the government -– the CIA, the Military — is secretly using bizarre neuro-weaponry (or directed-energy weaponry) against Americans and subjecting them to gang stalking is not something the mental health professional wants to even consider. It is no surprise that in the emerging Psychiatric metanarrative, allegations of Deep State covert operations are construed as symptoms of paranoid delusions.

 

Back to Top

The Psychiatric Fantasy System and the Battle Against Non-Conformity

This is nothing new. Psychiatrists typically react to proponents of radical change by seeking to pathologize them. Braginsky and Braginsky did a series of studies in the early 1970s published in their book Mainstream Psychology:A Critique (see discussion in Sarbin, T. And Mancuso, J., Medical Diagnosis or Moral Verdict, 1980, NY; Pergamon Press). Psychiatrists watched an interview between a doctor and a pseudo-patient. In the first segment, the patients reported irritability, poor sleep, etc. In the second and third segment segments, they expressed either middle of the road or New Left views. In the fourth segment, both groups criticized mental health professionals.

Sarbin and Mancuso summarize: “As the New Left radical’s complaints shift from statement about self to statements about society, the patient is regarded as increasingly psychologically disturbed.” The moderate patient’s degree of psychopathology remains stable as he or she expresses anti-New Left sentiments. The judgments of the severity of the pathology of both groups “dramatically increase when they criticize mental health professionals” (Sarbin and Mancuso, 1980, pp.94-5). Even the politically moderate patient who was perceived as only moderately disturbed (despite being presented as a hospitalized mental patient) is diagnosed as very “psychotic” after his attack on the mental health profession.

The experiment was repeated with a different group of psychiatrists with one change: In the 4th segment, both groups make flattering statements about the mental health professionals, e.g. “helpful,” kind,” and “very special” people. The result for Segments 1-3 were the same but after watching Segment 4, the psychiatrists decided the patients were cured (p.95). This is an extreme reaction and one that likely reflected the fact that the psychiatrists did not know the patients’ diagnosis upon admission – the patient unlike in the study below did not feign psychotic symptoms — and (the fact) that the study was conducted during a more tolerant phase of the mental health system in the early 1970s as compared to today.

One would expect that today the patients upon praising mental health professionals would be deemed to be psychotics in remission, as was the case with Rosenhan’s experiment -– conducted during the same period but with patients identified as “schizophrenic.” Athough Rosenhan’s experiment was conducted at the same time, and the patients were cooperative, they did not go so far as to flatter the doctors. Furthermore psychiatrists in the Braginsky and Braginnsky experiment were not told the pseudo-patients’ original diagnosis was “schizophrenia”––since they did not complain of voices or delusions, they could as easily have been hospitalized for depression. Today psychiatry is more aggressive than in the early 1970s and even “normal” patients are regarded as mentally ill.

Surprisingly few people, even mental health professionals, know about the classic Rosenhan experiment; it created an explosion of controversy within the mental health field at the time,it appeared, although it never entered the public imagination. Rosenhan, a psychologist, and 7 mentally healthy associates–all went to emergency rooms of local hospitals and feigned they were having auditory hallucinations. The pseudo-patients included a psychology graduate student in his twenties, three psychologists, a pediatrician, a psychiatrist, a painter, and a housewife. Once admitted they acted completely normally-–but none of the staff suspected they were sane. Significantly, quite a few patients made comments to the pseudo-patients like, “You’re not really crazy.”

They were interviewed by psychiatrists or psychologists who wrote evaluations of the patients and interpreted all their present behavior as evidence of their schizophrenia, and claimed to discover the roots of their alleged schizophrenia in their early childhood experiences. (At the time of this experiment Psychiatry was still based on the psychoanalytic dogma that pathology was caused by incidents in early childhood). Rosenhan noted, “Once a person is designated abnormal all his other behaviors and characteristics are colored by that label. Indeed that label is so powerful that many of the pseudo-patients’ normal behaviors were overlooked entirely or profoundly misinterpreted.” (Accessed 2016 at isites.Harvard.edu: On Being Sane in Insane Places, by David L. Rosenhan (pdf))

It took most of the pseudo-patients weeks to obtain release–in order to do so, all had to agree to take psychiatric drugs (which they later flushed down the toilet–no longer possible) and agree with the psychiatrists that they were mentally ill. All were finally released in times ranging from 7 to 52 days with the diagnosis of “schizophrenia in remission.” Rosenhan noted in an interview many years later, “I told friends, I told my family: ‘I can get out when I can get out. That’s all. I’ll be there for a couple of days and I’ll get out.’ Nobody knew I’d be there for two months … The only way out was to point out that they’re [the psychiatrists] correct. They had said I was insane, [I told them] ‘I am insane; but I am getting better.’ That was an affirmation of their view of me.” (Accessed 2016 at Wikipedia/Rosenhan Experiment.) In other words, to get the psychiatrist’s approval, the patient must affirm the psychiatrist’s view of the patient. For the TI today, this would mean feigning acknowledgment of the truth of the psychiatric metanarrative about Tis-–that they were delusional.

The reason professionals could not tell the clients had not really had “psychotic” breaks (were not “insane”) is because “mental illness” is a projection of the psychiatrist– the projection is triggered by a few cues that do not necessarily include the symptoms of “schizophrenia.” Knowing the patient has the diagnosis itself is enough to trigger the projection — which is a major reason (in addition to the debilitating effects of the “meds”) — why “schizophrenia” (an emotional crisis) becomes chronic once the patient becomes inducted into the mental health system: She is regarded as incurably ill and these expectations become a self-fulfilling prophecy. As holistic physician Gary Kohls put it, “The truth is that people diagnosed as ‘mentally ill’ for life are often simply those unfortunates who have found themselves in acute or chronic states of potentially reversible crises or temporary ‘overwhelm’ due to any number of preventable, treatable, and even curable situations.” (“Kris Kristofferson’s Dramatic Cure of his “Incurable” Alzheimer’s Disease/Another Iatrogenic Illness Unveiled” by Dr. Gary G. Kohls, on GlobalResearch.ca, accessed September, 2016.)­

Since psychiatry is an agency of surveillance and control, it views with apprehension any patient who resists, or critiques its power. In the Braginsky and Braginsky experiment, a radical critique of society was viewed as a sign of pathology. Mental health professionals regard anyone who comes for help as mentally ill to some degree. If the patients imply that there is something wrong with the world then the psychiatrist qua social control agent is likely to regard them as paranoid — in the psychiatrists’ world view, society is “natural,” normative, even if it needs a little patching up, and “maladjustment” is a symptom of “pathology.”

Radical psychiatrist R. D. Laing saw it very differently: This reification of an insane world was itself a symptom of insanity, and “schizophrenics” were invalidated because they were beginning to wake up from the social fantasy. Laing had reversed the premise of the psychiatric metanarrative by defining adjustment as pathological, “Social adjustment to a dysfunctional society may be very dangerous. The perfectly adjusted bomber pilot may be a greater threat to species survival than the hospitalized schizophrenic deluded that the Bomb is inside him.” (R. D. Laing, 1967, The Politics of Experience, New York: Pantheon Books, p120). This was written during the height of the nuclear weapons race — and Laing saw in the “delusions” of the mad, a metaphorical critique of society and a sign of a resistance to a conformity that threatened the survival of the species. In accord with Laing’s critique, but before Laing had developed it, Martin Luther King Jr. stated, “The world will be saved by the creatively maladjusted.” Today many of the creatively maladjusted come from the ranks of those most directly attacked by the Deep State. And they too, like the mad, are perceived as a threat to the psychiatric guardians of the status quo.

But this kind of threat is easily deflected by redefining it as a medical problem, as pathology. TIs are hardly the first to be pathologized. The medicalization of dissidence and deviance is the real specialization of the psychiatric profession, as the late Thomas Szasz, dissident psychiatrist, argued in book after book. Mental illness is a “myth,” as Szasz said, a misleading trope––the entire system is based on a spurious metanarrative that has deceived the American public for well over a century. Mental health professions are comprised of pretend doctors treating non-existent illnesses. There are of course therapists who help people but they are the minority — almost all in the private sector — and for the most part inaccessible to those without money. Subsuming anyone’s life under a pseudo- medical “diagnosis” obscures their abilities, simplifies their life story, and leads the professional to prescribe a “medical” solution (e.g., stupefying psychiatric drugs) for a non-medical problem, for what Szasz aptly called “problems in living.”

Each person’s unique life story can only be understood when she is grasped in her full individuality including both her strengths and her weaknesses, her virtues and her bad habits. Only a psychotherapist who understands this can be helpful. A therapist who fails to see a client’s strengths will underestimate her ability to recover from trauma. The therapist who seeks to promote conformity will not be able to help the troubled oddball become a creatively maladjusted social change agent. But this hardly matters if the goal of the mental health system is not to help people but to maintain social control.

It is revealing that before 1973 homosexuality was viewed as a mental disorder but as a result of agitation and lobbying by homosexual psychiatrists the APA decided by a close vote that homosexuality was no longer a disorder. Taking into account the conformist orientation of the mental health system — as illustrated in the last few paragraphs — we realize that the diagnoses are based upon values that can always be contested. They are not based on biological facts like real medical diagnoses. In the first place “mental illness” is not an objective biological fact–there are no biological referents to which the construct corresponds. This is why psychiatrists, in order to maintain their facade of legitimacy substitute reliability for validity.

“Reliability” is a scientific term that refers to agreement — in the above case, the agreement among mental health professionals, almost always with financial ties to the pharmaceutical industry — who invent the psychiatric diagnoses, whereas validity refers to a correspondence to reality. (Postmodernists may quibble, but for now I will leave such ontological qualifications for another time.) This is a blatant epistemological error. Because a hundred psychiatrists agree someone is “seriously ill,” and delusional does not mean that person is delusional. The witch prickers would usually agree which suspects were witches — but women do not make pacts or have sexual relations with the Devil (the definition of a witch), so in actuality there were no witches. These highly educated clergymen, the intellectual elite of their era, were wrong. The term “witch” was reliable but invalid, it did not correspond to any social reality other than the shared fantasy of the witch-prickers. Today the term “psychotic” tells us little about the person so described and a lot — as we see — about the shared fantasies of psychiatrists..

Cardiologists do not determine diseases by voting. Mental health professionals, as seen, have a tendency to rate those persons who resist or reject or criticize their own authority as mentally ill. They are also wary of those who make trenchant criticisms of society. It is therefore not surprising that psychiatrists regard TIs as delusional, as psychotic, just as in the 1960s, they tended to view New Leftists as mentally ill. Without even examining the Deep State literature, psychiatrists have promulgated a metanarrative that views them all as delusional, as schizophrenics — as non-compliant psychotics who refuse to take their ‘meds” or accept that they are mentally ill. Mental health professionals have been in conflict with “non-compliant” patients since psychotropic drugs were first used in the mid-1950s. This conflict took on a political dimension when the “mental patients’ liberation movement” (now the psychiatric survivors’ movement) originated in the early 1970s.

But what evidence do they present that TIs are all delusional? In McPhate’s article he extensively quotes from psychologist Lorraine Sheridan. She conducted an experiment with psychiatrist David James and coauthored an article titled “Complaints of group stalking (‘gang stalking’): an exploratory study of their nature and impact on complainants” published in The Journal of Forensic Psychiatry and Psychology Vol 26, No 5, 2015. The journal is read “throughout the world” by “psychiatrists, psychologists, criminologists, lawyers, sociologists, nurses, social workers and other legal and medical professionals” who use this journal as “their major forum for penetrating, informed global debate on the latest developments and disputes affecting the practice of forensic psychiatry.” Sheridan and James write, “All cases of reported group-stalking were found likely to be delusional, compared with 3.9% of individually stalked cases.” But they found no such thing. By their own definition, a delusion is “a false belief based on incorrect inference about external reality.” In order to know the belief is likely to be delusional, they have to know about the external reality.

100% of the 128 allegedly group-stalked individuals were determined to be deluded. How? Two clinicians read extensive questionnaires filled out by the subjects and both agreed all of the time that each subject was deluded. But reliability is not validity. It cannot tell us about the external world. Mental health professionals have no “expertise” in determining what is real, although credulous people — like New York Times journalists — think their credentials give them the ability to know if a patient is delusional. But, to know that, one has to know what is real. The claim of Sheridan and James that group stalking does not take place is an un-validated theory about the nature of (social) “reality.” They have made no effort to confirm its validity by examining the reality. .

Sheridan and James claim that all 128 self-identified TIs had 1 or more of three kinds of delusions. The first was of group stalking. They write these are “cases where the resources or elaborate organization required to carry them out made the alleged activities highly improbable.” But probability is not a scientific or quantifiable concept as they use it. Upon what do they base this determination? Upon nothing–it has no force beyond a decree. The subject’s claims that they were subjected to neuro-weaponry, such as “voice to skull” fell, according to the authors, into the category of a delusion based on “impossibility” or “bizarre impossibility.” What about quantum physics, about “spooky action at a distance” (Einstein), entanglement, Bell’s theorem? All impossible according to the scientific paradigm that had reigned for centuries, just like the technology that Sheridan and James dismiss as impossible. These “scientists” are ignoramuses who have learned nothing from the history of science. (Below is evidence that this impossible technology exists.)

If 2 million clinicians instead of 2 agreed that 128 subjects were delusional, it would still prove only that clinicians tend to agree about TIs and about reality. All of the professionals who examined Rosenhan and his compatriots agreed they were insane. But they were not. Their diagnoses were all invalid. The witch-prickers agreed which suspects were witches, but we know now there were no witches — women do not have sex with the Devil. Their diagnoses were wrong. If Sheridan and James really wanted to determine if TIs were delusional, not just write propaganda, they could have hired a private investigator — short of this they could have at least familiarized themselves with the TI metanarrative about group stalking. They could have examined the historical literature on Stasi in former East Germany and the ACLU book (cited below), The Surveillance Industrial Complex.

I do not think the Sheridan and James article is a work of deliberate deception. Rather it is “bullshit.”As Bruce Levine notes, the liar, unlike the bullshitter, knows what the truth is and endeavors to conceal it. “The vast majority of psychiatrists are bullshitters, uncommitted to either facts or fiction…It is not in the bullshitters’ interest to know what is true and what is false, as that knowledge of what is a fact and what is fiction hinders the capacity to use any and all powerful persuasion” — that is, to persuade people their psychiatric theories reflect reality. (See Levine, “Psychiatry’s Current Greatest Controversy: Fraud, Bullsh*t or What? at Mad in America, accessed September, 2016.) That is why these psychiatrists undertake no investigation––not even reading the literature on the Deep State by scholars and whistle-blowers, let alone by TIs. It’s not that they know that TIs are telling the truth, and endeavor to conceal it. As Levine puts it (about a different psychiatric myth), “ Most simply don’t know the truth because they have put little effort in discerning it.” The fact is they don’t really want to know if TIs’ allegations are correct. 

Their purpose is to not to discover the truth –- but to serve the mental health system. To quote Levine again, “The goal of bullshitters is not necessarily to lie about the truth but to persuade their audience of a specific impression so as to advance their agenda.” In this case the agenda — fostering the growth of the mental health system and maintaining social control — is advanced in two ways. First,by pathologizing TIs, mental health professionals are able to induct more clients into the mental health system, and thus to contribute to the growth of the psychiatric-pharmaceutical industrial complex. Second, by defining dissident or subversive ideas as “delusions,” as symptoms of “mental disorders,” they are able to neutralize or invalidate these ideas, suppress their expression and thus maintain social control — enforce the dominant social norms,

These redefinitions serve social control in a very specific way. They allow professionals to define exploitative practices as legitimate medical treatments — from drugging babies to silencing victims of no- touch torture — while maintaining their self-image as doctors, or medical helpers. Thus professionals can bullshit their way through life — by diagnosing babies and TIs as covert psychotics. Psychiatrists have no need to investigate whether TIs’ claims are valid because Sheridan and James and The New York Times have told them that all TIs are delusional. The substitution of reliability for validity, of bullshit for investigation-findings, is a sleight of hand performed in the most prestigious academic journals and newspapers, and propagated in the psychiatric metanarrative.

(This also serves psychiatrists’ own emotional needs by warding off ideas that threaten to disturb their comfortable mainstream views about the world in which we live — thus what is strange and frightening is reduced to the banal, the familiar. )

All the instruments of psychiatry are brought to bear to pressure, to persuade, to force the deviant to conform. In this manner, Psychiatry also unwittingly, and in some prominent cases, deliberately, serves to preserve the invisibility of the operations of the Deep State. That is to say, the Deep State is enabled to hide evidence of its crimes because Psychiatry destroys the credibility of its victims/critics by certifying them as insane. Thus relegated to the lowest social caste, they are now civilly dead. Bearing the stigmata of their diagnoses, their friends, family, and associates no longer attend to the meaning of their words. Their words are treated as “semantic exudates,” as Szasz once said, of their mental illness. They may speak the truth, but no one is listening.

The Psychiatric Pharmaceutical Industrial Complex

The nature of “mental illness” underwent another change starting in the 1980s. The change was not based on discoveries about the patient’s mind or brain. As usual the changes took place in Psychiatry and were projected onto the clients. As a result of Psychiatry’s alliance with the pharmaceutical industry, it redefined mental illness. The psychoanalytic theory that pathology resulted from traumas in early childhood — prevalent for most of the 20th century in the university and the clinic — was replaced by the dogma that it was a brain disorder.

Although Psychiatry could find no evidence of a brain disorder, it claimed if it kept searching eventually it would find the evidence.

Dr Peter Breggin, a psychiatrist and former student of Szasz became a spokesperson for the dissident position from the 1980s to the present. Breggin chronicles that Psychiatry began to undergo a financial crisis in the 1980s when due to rising popularity of psychotherapy starting in the 1960s, clients sought out less expensive therapists without medical degrees. To recover their hegemony and financial advantages, the American Psychiatric Association decided in 1980 to renounce a century-old practice banning, soliciting, or even accepting contributions from the pharmaceutical industry. This was a watershed––the medical model in biological form experienced a resurgence and the Psychiatric-Pharmaceutical-Industrial complex was born. As Peter Breggin wrote,“The floodgates were opened and would grow wider each year…Whatever function APA had ever fulfilled as a professional organization was now superseded by its function as a political advocate for the advancement of psychiatric and pharmaceutical interests.” (Toxic Psychiatry, 1991, New York: St Martin’s Press, p 355.)

Once again Psychiatry proved its understanding of problems in living was based on its own subjective fantasies, defined as reality by the authorities. Although Psychiatry claimed they had suddenly become more scientific and realized mental illnesses were really brain disorders, this transformation of the view of pathology, just like the transformation in 1973 of the view of homosexuality, was caused by changes within Psychiatry — its merger with the pharmaceutical industry — that led to a change in its collective cultural fantasy which it has the power to present to the public as reality.

Let me be clear, I am not denying that there is a relationship between the mind and the body. I am aware that physical stress contributes to emotional problems, and I am aware that emotional problems are reflected in the individual’s body and brain. But none of this justifies importing medical categories, medical “diagnoses” into the realm of human psychology and interpersonal relationships. Physical illnesses are based on biological facts whereas “mental illnesses” are based almost entirely upon psychiatric fantasies about patients. Psychodiagnosis works as social control but not as medicine or therapy. Because psychiatric diagnoses are derogatory evaluations about clients’ minds, they undermine clients’ self-confidence and thus become self-fulfilling prophecies. .

Even the leading establishment figures in Psychiatry now admit that psychiatric diagnoses are purely subjective, admit there is no evidence of any “chemical imbalance” — even as they try to hold on to “the medical model” — what I call medicalism — even as they continue the centuries’ long search for “defects” in the brains of the “mentally ill.” Thus Thomas Insel, the Director of the National Institute of Mental Health wrote in 2013 on the eve of the publication of the long-awaited 5th edition of the psychiatric Bible, The Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders (the first edition was published in 1952, the DSM-IV was published in 1994, and the revised edition of DSM-IV was published in 2000) that the weakness of the manual was “ its lack of validity.” “Unlike our definitions of ischemic heart disease, lymphoma, or AIDS, the DSM diagnoses are based on a consensus about clusters of clinical symptoms, not any objective laboratory measure.” (See “The NIMH Withdraws Support for DSM-5Psychology Today, May, 2013. Accessed 2016.)

Even the Chairman of the Committee, Allen Frances, which composed the 4th edition of the DSM, had a change of heart and became a critic of the DSM — he admitted diagnoses were subjective. “There are no objective tests in psychiatry that say definitively that someone does or does not have a mental disorder.” (Mental Disorders: The Facts Behind the Marketing Campaign/CCHR, Accessed 2013.) His book Saving Normal argues that the DSM-5 classifies all kinds of normal behaviors as mental illnesses. (As indicated by the title, Frances wanted to restrict the application of the medical model in the helping professions, not to eliminate it.) For example, mourning the death of a parent or spouse or one’s partner for more than 2 weeks is interpreted by the DSM-5 (the DSM-IV required more than 2 months of grieving for the person to be deemed mentally ill) as a symptom of a “clinical depression,” not as a natural response to loss. The change reflects the increased symbiosis of psychiatric and drug companies. Defining mourning as a clinical depression enables the drug companies to significantly increase their markets, “If, for two weeks after losing the love of your life, you have sadness, loss of interest, trouble sleeping and eating and less energy, the DSM-5 now allows a drug salesman to teach the doctor that this is major depressive disorder and requires a pill,” Frances said. (Julie Deardorff, “Defining the Subtleties of Grief,” Chicago Tribune, March 5, 2014.)

The prototypical act of defiance of the psychiatric-pharmaceutical complex is refusing to take one’s “meds.” I began graduate school in the late 1970s. Since that time the canard has become received wisdom in society: patients who don’t take their “meds” have a resistance to getting well. This canard overlooks the sickening “side effects” of psychiatric drugs. It is a myth that these drugs are designed to cure or correct the “chemical imbalances” of mental disorders. The drugs have a sedating effect on all persons (as well as numerous unpleasant side effects) — well-suited for managing “mental patients” in a state hospital (where they were all warehoused until “deinstitutionalization” in the 1960s). Those who take these drugs for more than 2 years tend to develop brain damage that often mimics the symptoms of “psychosis” and makes a full recovery from “psychosis” almost impossible.

Author and award-winning medical journalist Robert Whitaker writes, “I think science is telling us that antipsychotics, on the whole, worsen long-term outcomes, even when prescribed for ‘clear cut psychiatric disorders,’ and thus, if psychiatry wants to develop evidence-based protocols, it needs to figure out how to minimize their long-term use. And that is a belief that directly challenges the conventional wisdom…” (See for example Robert Whitaker’s “evidence based” discussion of his investigation in his reply to psychiatrist Allen Frances at PeteEarley.com, “Robert Whitaker Explains His Research After Being Pigeonholed as Anti-Medication,” see also Whitaker, Anatomy of an Epidemic.)

Those who resist Psychiatry’s drugs (or ministrations) are “non-compliant” or “treatment resistant” patients — they arouse the anger and contempt of mental health professionals. The fact that psychiatric treatment is unsuccessful with “schizophrenics” — and causes severe health problems does not prompt a reevaluation of their treatments because the goal of the public mental health system is maintaining social control, and selling psychiatric drugs. The fusion of mental health with the pharmaceutical industry makes change virtually impossible — there is too much to lose.

Thomas Szasz believed that pseudo-medical explanations of problems in living had no objective referent, that “mental illness” was a myth, that the medical procedures of Psychiatry were mere ceremonies intended to make psychiatrists look like real doctors — and there is a plethora of ceremonies and narrative designed to mystify clients and the public. Thus he wrote in Insanity: The Idea and Its Consequences, “Explanations [of mental illness] in 20th century have run into the 100s if not thousands. Methods are equally numerous. Seeing through the riddle of mental illness is not so much like seeing the emperor is naked but rather more like realizing that the emperor’s wardrobe is rich and dazzling beyond the dreams even of emperors but that there is no emperor.” (Szasz, 1997, NY: Syracuse University Press.)

 

Back to Top

The Deep State on Trial

Let us first imagine we are putting the Deep State on trial, as a thought-experiment. The criminal, the defendant, is the Deep State — I do this in an effort to establish the validity of the TI metanarrative. If the Deep State exists and commits the crimes alleged by TIs, this does not prove every self-identified TI is a TI. But it proves some are — and the possibility must be weighed by every mental health professional that people claiming to be undergoing the kinds of experiences and tortures described in the TI meta-narrative may be genuine TIs. If the TI metanarrative is false, than every TI is really “psychotic.” The lawyer for the prosecution would want to exclude certain kinds of people from the jury because they could not decide fairly whether the Deep State was guilty — e.g., people in the employ of the Deep State, very pro-establishment people who think our government can do no wrong. For example, McPhate, following the psychiatric narrative claims, or at least implies, not that some TIs are psychotic but that almost all self- identified TIs are psychotic. (He does not discuss those who are not psychotics–he merely qualifies his assertions.) Someone with an a priori commitment to that viewpoint would not be able to objectively judge.

Let us consider first the obstacles faced by the prosecutor of the Deep State. The lawyer for the prosecution would have a number of obstacles to overcome. Several come to mind.

1) First, the average person has read nothing in the newspapers about TIs–except perhaps articles claiming they are psychotic. We tend to assume that what we have not heard of does not exist.

2) It is hard for most people to believe that the US government would subject its own citizens to torture. It is hard to believe that the government would violate the very Constitution upon which it rests.

3) Few people have heard of the advanced technology which the TI metanarrative claims to be in use. This is not reported in the Press and it sounds like “science fiction.”

4) Most people think only TIs or only psychotics are making these kind of claims. But it is not only TIs — covert psychotics from the psychiatric perspective — who make these claims. They are also made by highly accomplished former employees of the Deep State, the CIA, NSA, etc. These expert witnesses make the same kind of claims made by the TIs. In McPhate’s article, they are virtually ignored — he interviewed some of them but then failed to quote them or misrepresented them. People know Edward Snowden — no one has accused him of psychosis — but Snowden discussed only the prevalence of surveillance, not the existence of neuro-surveillance, “mind control,” no-touch torture, non-consensual experimentation on people with directed energy neuro-weaponry.

5) Another element in the TI’s metanarrative is group stalking — the mental health professionals claim credibly that it is very unlikely that such tremendous resources would be mobilized against one person. To the average person group stalking indeed seems odd and unreasonable. And there is no rationale for such alleged activities. (It is revealing that FOIA documents have shown that CIA assets in the media in the 1960s were instructed to emphasize how improbable a large operation would be, and impossible to keep secret; Alex Constantine, 1997, p 42, Virtual Government: CIA Operations, Los Angeles: Feral House).

6) The very formidable obstacle I tried to debunk above — belief in the validity of the mental­ health system in general, and in particular in the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs itself, which claims that virtually all TIs are delusional, are psychotics, and thus everything they claim about Deep State operations are just symptoms of their pathology.

Let me briefly touch on each of these points. We do not have to rely on TIs or victims to ascertain that the CIA and the military has subjected Americans to harmful experiments to further the various goals of the CIA and later the NSA, although anyone seriously investigating the issue would take victims’ accounts into consideration. The Church Committee was formed in the late 1970s to investigate CIA covert experiments. During the same period President Ford appointed the Rockefeller Commission. On the Senate floor, Senator Ted Kennedy summarized the results of the Church Committee investigations:

The Deputy Director of the CIA revealed that over thirty universities and institutions were involved in an ‘extensive testing and experimentation’ program which included covert drug tests on unwitting citizens ‘at all social levels, high and low, native Americans and foreign.’ Several of these tests involved the administration of LSD to ‘unwitting subjects in social situations.’ At least one death [Frank Olson’s], resulted from these activities.” (WikiSpooks/Project MKUltra)

But that was an understatement. The Church and Rockefeller Committees found this program consisted of 149 projects at 80 universities and other institutions involving drug testing and a variety of other studies on unwitting human subjects, including numerous studies using electromagnetic technologies. (Byron Belitsos, “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control, accessed July, 2016.)

The Church Committee investigation was hampered by the fact that CIA director, Richard Helms destroyed the files on MK-Ultra in 1973 when he feared there would be an investigation. The Committee relied upon participants in the program for evidence -– they admitted secretively administering LSD (e.g., slipping it into subjects’ drinks at a party) to unwitting subjects. A memo in 1952 indicated the purpose of the program: “Can we get control of an individual to the point where he will do our bidding against his will and even against fundamental laws of nature, such as self-preservation?” (See WikiSpooks/Project ARTICHOKE accessed July, 2016, cited in Gordon Thomas, G., Journey into Madness. The Secret Story of Secret CIA Mind Control and Medical Abuse.) New York: Bantam, 1990). One can think of many military applications of such powers, whether directed against foreigners or Americans.

The US General Accounting Office issued a report in 1994 that summarized the findings of previous commissions, making clear that the program was conducted jointly by the CIA and the Department of Defense and casting doubt on the volunteer status of US soldiers who were among the subjects in these experiments. The report stated “Working with the CIA, the Department of Defense gave hallucinogenic drugs to thousands of ‘volunteer’ soldiers in the 1950s and 1960s. In addition to LSD, the Army also tested quinuclidinyl benzilate, a hallucinogen code-named BZ. Many of these tests were conducted under the so-called MKULTRA program, established to counter perceived Soviet and Chinese advances in brainwashing techniques.” (WikiSpooks/Project MKUltra, accessed July, 2016.) Although there was only one documented death (Helms had destroyed the files), one need not have an overly vivid imagination to envision the adverse effects of unknowingly ingesting LSD.

On January 15, 1994, President Bill Clinton formed the Advisory Committee on Human Radiation Experiments (ACHRE), chaired by Ruth Faden, Ph.D., MPH of the Johns Hopkins Berman Institute of Bioethics. ACHRE made clear that since the 1940s the Atomic Energy Commission had been sponsoring tests on the effects of radiation on the human body. American citizens who had checked into hospitals for a variety of ailments were secretly injected with varying amounts of plutonium and other radioactive materials without their knowledge. These experiments included other populations such as orphans given irradiated milk, children injected with radioactive materials, prisoners in Washington and Oregon state prisons. In other words, the Military and Intelligence was carrying out Dr Mengele experiments upon American citizens. Much of the experimentation was carried out in order to determine how the human body metabolizes radioactive materials, information that could be used by the Departments of Energy and Defense in Cold War in war planning. (Wikipedia/Human Radiation Experiments.)

Numerous human radiation experiments have been performed in the United States, many of which were funded by various U.S. government agencies such as the United States Department of Defense and the United States Atomic Energy Commission. Researchers had a pattern of choosing the most vulnerable people, but soldiers were also a group heavily exposed to experimentation.

Experiments included, but were not limited to:

feeding radioactive material to mentally disabled children [4]

exposing U.S. soldiers and prisoners to high levels of radiation [4]

irradiating the testicles of prisoners, which caused severe birth defects [4]

(U.S. House of Representatives, Committee on Energy and Commerce, Subcommittee on Energy Conservation and Power. American Nuclear Guinea Pigs: Three Decades of Radiation Experiments on US. Citizens. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Government Printing Office. Cited in Wikipedia/Human Radiation Experimentsaccessed July, 2016.)

The Washington Times summarized in 1994 the findings of ACHRE: “At least 500,000 people were used as subjects in Cold War era radiation, biological and chemical experiments sponsored by the federal government, a congressional agency said yesterday…the tests conducted ranged from radiation to biological and chemical agents like mustard gas and LSD.” (See p. 46, Nick Begich, 2006, Controlling the Human Mind, Anchorage, Alaska, Earthpulse Press.)

Byron Belitsos notes, “By 1963, 1,200 nuclear weapons tests conducted at the Nevada test site had exposed every person in the U.S. to deadly radioactive fallout, causing millions of fetal deaths, spontaneous abortions, stillbirths, and birth defects. The U.S. government also conducted over 4,000 radiation experiments on individual human test subjects without their informed consent. The delayed effects of decades of radiation exposure from weapons testing are today demonstrated by a U.S. population plagued with epidemic cancer and heart disease, neurological disorders, low fertility, chronic fatigue, obesity (thyroid involvement), immune system dysfunction and learning disabilities.” (Byron Belitsos, “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control, accessed July, 2016.)

Anyone familiar with these experiments, documented by the U.S. government, should know that neither the military nor the CIA has any compunction about harming American citizens — thus familiarity with this history removes one of the major obstacles to accepting the TI meta-narrative. Nor can we dismiss these acts as something that happened in the past, and would not happen in our ostensibly more enlightened era. It is true that covert non-consensual experiments were officially banned by US Congress after the Church Committee findings. But no one was held accountable, no one went to prison, no one paid any fines, no one lost a job — this fact was not lost upon later whistle-blowers post-9/11 who were prosecuted for revealing criminal activities by the Deep State.

In the history of exposure of Deep State malfeasance, only the whistle-blowers themselves are punished. In the light of this lack of accountability, is it feasible to assume experiments on humans ceased? Did Deep State violations of the Constitution of which the public is aware cease after Bush? Obama of course refused to hold anyone accountable, and in office he carried out the same policy as Bush of shielding the state from scrutiny or litigation. It is significant that McPhate wrote, ironically, “The military establishment, the theory goes, never gave up on the ambitions of MK Ultra, the C.I.A.’s infamous program to control the mind in the 1950s and ’60s.” Without any evidence that he has studied the history of the CIA, he makes a patronizing tongue-in-cheek comment about TIs, as if the belief that the military continued its efforts to gain power over the human mind was such a far-fetched idea. “Hear no evil, see no evil, speak no evil” seems to be McPhate’s guiding principle.

Whistle-blowers since the origins of the CIA have made profound and searing criticisms of their former employers. The most scathing indictment of the Deep State has originally come from former agents, not from its victims (the victims, increasingly including prodigious scholars, are now catching up with former spies, journalists and scholars, in the production of analyses, exposures and histories) — although any agent who criticizes the Deep State becomes a potential victim. Many former employees have argued that the Deep State is totalitarian, and that America today is no longer a democratic republic — some have claimed it is guilty of crimes similar to the Nazi regime. (I will not discuss here Operation Paperclip — under which Nazi scientists were brought to the US to work for the military and US intelligence.) Those who became critics were among the most highly intelligent, patriotic, and morally principled people in the country. Their testimony and experiences vitiate the widespread public belief that the agencies of the Deep State protect the national security and freedom of Americans. It is because of this assumption that many Americans do not object to being placed under surveillance. And because of this they do not believe the TI metanarrative which posits that the protection of American citizens is not one of the primary goals of the Deep State — although law and order may be, or at least order — and that agencies of the Deep State have been willing to harm or put at risk the safety of American citizens in pursuit of other goals.

 

Back to Top

The CIA Assassination of its Own Agent––Protecting Whose Security?

We learn about the Deep State both from what whistle-blowers reveal and from what we see the Deep State is willing to do to silence whistle-blowers, to preserve its own secrecy, its own autonomy and lack of accountability to organs of the American people––to the Congress, to the Senate. Of course increasingly the Legislature defaults on its oversight responsibility, increasingly the Executive shields the Deep State from scrutiny–-thus shattering the foundation of Constitutional government. The belief that the government would never harm American citizens is shattered, thousands if not hundreds of thousands of its victims have been Americans. The Deep State goes to great lengths to preserve the secrecy of its programs, which is why so few people are aware of them.

Frank Olson might have become the first CIA whistle-blower but he died before he had a chance to reveal any secrets. But Frank Olson’s death was not self-inflicted as his son Eric Olson discovered– and many mainstream journalists and writers agreed. Olson is a psychologist who was determined to unravel the mystery of his father’s death and ultimately to be the voice for his father’s own moral doubts about the CIA. Michael Ignatieff, a friend of Eric Olson, writing in The New York Times Magazine reviews the findings of Olson, and it leads almost inexorably to the conclusion that the CIA assassinated his father (“CIA; What Did the CIA Do To His  Father?”). When the Olson family was issued a formal apology by President Ford and CIA Director William Colby in 1975, they were told their father was a military officer who was given LSD unknowingly as a part of MK-Ultra — this ostensibly led Olson to become deeply depressed and commit suicide. The family was given $750,000 by an act of Congress, and the matter was finished. But it wasn’t. The story was a cover story — and Colby and Ford had lied. And the CIA lied to the Press.

His son writes, “In 1952 Frank Olson [a leading biochemist] was acting chief of the Special Operations Division at Detrick; at the time of his death in 1953 he was SOD’s director of planning and evaluations. The Special Operations Divison at Detrick was the government’s most secret biological weapons laboratory.” Frank Olson knew — that despite vehement denials by the American government at the time — the United States was using biological weapons, including anthrax, in the Korean War. Considering that Olson had decided to resign from the CIA, this fact made Eric suspicious of the CIA account of his father’s alleged suicide.

He had his father’s body exhumed, and a forensic team, led by James Starrs of George Washington University, discovered “a blow to Olson’s temple which caused a fist-size bleed under the skin.” They concluded that someone had hit/knocked Olson out with a blow to the head and then dropped him out the window. Armed with this evidence, Eric persuaded Manhattan District Attorney Robert Morgenau in April, 1996, to subpoena a grand jury to examine the evidence for commission of homicide. During the course of this investigation (which found insufficient evidence to go to trial — perhaps because of the sudden death of a prospective witness, former CIA director Colby), Eric also learned that Olson’s death is taught as a case study of “the perfect murder” at the Mossad Training School outside Tel Aviv — this has been confirmed by two former Mossad agents, Ari Ben-Menashe and Victor Ostrovsky. (Family Statement on the Murder of Frank Olson.) 

A letter by the DA was sent to former CIA director William Colby, asking for an interview about Olson. There is evidence that Colby at this point himself felt moral qualms and was ready to spill the beans (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.) But a few days after receiving the letter Colby died in an alleged canoeing accident in the river near his Maryland home. According to newspaper accounts, much of which his wife contested — she was out of town at the time of Colby’s death — Colby went canoeing at night time (something he had never done before, according to his wife) without wearing his life vest. His computer was on and his dinner half eaten. Colby’s death helped kill the investigation.

It was around this time that Eric Olson had an epiphany, “In 1997, after the C.I.A. inadvertently declassified an assassination manual dating from late 1953, Eric Olson was able to read the following: ‘The most efficient accident, in simple assassination, is a fall of 75 feet or more onto a hard surface. Elevator shafts, stairwells, unscreened windows and bridges will serve. . .’ The manual went on to recommend a blow to the temple to stun the subject first: ‘In chase cases it will usually be necessary to stun or drug the subject before dropping him.’ Reading this passage at the kitchen table in Frederick, Eric realized that “dropped” was the right word.” (Ignatieff, NY Times, op.cit.)

Norman Cournoyer, one of Frank Olson’s oldest friends, called Eric in 2001 after reading the article in the Times. Frank Olson began work on interrogations methods for the CIA in the late 1940s. These were designed to extract information from even the most uncooperative subjects with the help of drugs and torture. Olson confided in Cournoyer (who also had top security clearance) that in 1953 he had been witness to more than one murder by interrogation––largely of Soviet spies. For most of the time, Olson remained in the CIA laboratory in the US.

But in 1950 he traveled to Europe and witnessed the CIA interrogations there — often “terminal”– of “expendables” including double agents, Soviet spies, and Nazi war criminals. Olson asked his friend: “Norm, did you ever see a man die? I did. People being interrogated died.” He told Cournoyer he was getting out of the CIA. He also told Cournoyer that the US was manufacturing biological weapons and he assumed had used it against the Koreans. By this point Eric concluded his father was murdered because the CIA concluded he was a security risk. Cournoyer agreed. “Was there reason for your Dad being killed by the CIA? I believe so,” he told Olson on German TV. (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Author Gordon Thomas spoke to Dr William Sargant, the British psychiatrist who worked on CIA mind control experiments and examined Olson at the request of the CIA after he began to have moral qualms about his work. “Sargant told me he believed Frank Olson had witnessed murder being committed with the various drugs he had prepared. The shock of what he witnessed, Sargant believed, was all the harder to cope with given that Frank Olson was a patriotic man who believed that the United States would never sanction such acts….He decided Frank Olson could pose a security risk.” He conveyed this information to Olson’s superiors at the CIA. When he learned of his death “he came to the immediate conclusion that Olson only could have been murdered,” Thomas wrote to Eric. (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Olson was invited to a meeting at Deep Creek a week before his death. The meeting was attended by future CIA director and head of covert operations, Richard Helms, as well as Sidney Gottlieb (one of the leaders of MK-Ultra). Gottlieb secretly spiked Olson’s cocktail with LSD. The real purpose of the meeting was to determine through using LSD if Olson would reveal the secret he knew upon leaving the CIA. Evidently they determined Olson was a “security risk.” As Steinberg put it, “What is clear and what was also clear to Frank Olson in the final weeks of his life is that he became a target of the very torture/interrogation techniques that he had witnessed in Europe. Returning from the LSD interrogation at Deep Creek Lake, he told his wife ‘I made a terrible mistake.’” (Jeffrey Steinberg, “It Did Not Start with Abu Ghraib/Dick Cheney: Vice President for Torture and War“, Executive Intelligence Review, November 11, 2005, Accessed July 2016.)

Eric finally concluded about his father, “He died because of security concerns regarding disavowed programs of terminal interrogation and the use of biological weapons in Korea.”

Eric has finally decades later given his father a voice from beyond the grave. (Family Statement on the Murder of Frank Olson.) 

The question must be asked: Whose security? Certainly not the security of the American people. The US was committing war crimes and violating international law by using biological weapons. These actions were risks to the security of all people. Their disclosure would have embarrassed the US government and would have resulted in the firing and resignation of people in government. It was their own security Olson’s superiors were worried about. Had Olson become a whistle-blower, international law would have been strengthened and the people of the world would have been protected against the risk of an epidemic caused by biological weapons.

The Frank Olson case reveals the CIA’s involvement in the creation and manufacture of illegal and dangerous weapons, its murder of those used as guinea pigs in its testing of interrogation methods, its willingness to assassinate one of its own agents, and its ability to enlist even the US President in a cover-up of the assassination of Frank Olson. Here we see even in its embryonic form the Deep State acting with flagrant disregard for human life, for the Constitution, and for the United Nations and international law. For the Deep State the Enemy is not merely another country — it’s here within. Even the CIA’s own agents are murdered if they try to leave the organization, or if they are deemed to present a “security risk.”

And, revealingly, Eric told Ignatieff he was regarded as mentally disturbed by many of his critics — just as TIs are today. Ignatieff wrote, “Eric knows that to charge the most secretive agency of American government with murder is to incur the suspicion that you have become deranged by anger, grief, paranoia, greed or a combination of all four. ‘Eric is crazy, Eric is obsessed,’he says, mimicking his accusers.” (Ignatieff, “CIA; What Did the CIA Do To His  Father?”)

 

Back to Top

Whistle-Blowers Post-9/11

Thomas Drake knows the power of the National Security Agency all too well. He is a former senior executive of the U.S. National Security Agency (NSA), a decorated United States Air Force and United States Navy veteran, and a whistle-blower. Drake’s crime seems to have been telling a reporter about fraud — specifically about NSA’s purchasing an Internet data collection system that cost billions of dollars more than necessary and that collected so much data that it resulted in Constitutional violations of privacy. This was the famous Trailblazer system — Drake argued like William Binney and several other NSA whistle-blowers that by choosing his tool instead of Thin Thread, the NSA was putting their own influence and power over the public good, over the nation. These men had been attracted to the NSA precisely because of their patriotism and desire to be of service to the nation. When they found there was a conflict they chose loyalty to nation — at great personal sacrifice.

Drake went to the press only after following prescribed channels of redress for Constitutional wrongs, only after failing to get NSA inspectors or Congress to take remedial action. The Justice Department in 2010 raided his house and charged him under the 1917 Espionage Act with violations that carried a penalty of up to 35 years in prison. But they dropped the charges when no evidence linked him to spying or a foreign power. The judge in the case called the prosecution “unconscionable.” Drake is the 2011 recipient of the Ridenhour Prize for Truth-Telling and co-recipient of the Sam Adams Associates for Integrity in Intelligence (SAAII) award. The government also took away his security clearance. He now works as a clerk in an Apple computer store…(Vocativ, September 19, 2013, “Should the NSA Be Dismantled?”, accessed July, 2016 ).

In excerpts from Thomas Drake’s SAAII award acceptance speech, he clearly formulates the nature of the conflict between the NSA and the republic.

With all the unitary executive privilege, all the secrecy and exigent conditions used as the excuse to torture, deny due process, and engage in off-the-books electronic surveillance, Jesselyn Raddick [his lawyer, and a whistle-blower herself, when working for Department of Justice] and I followed all the rules as whistle-blowers until it fundamentally conflicted with our oath to uphold the Constitution. Then we both made a fateful choice to exercise our First Amendment rights. We went to the press with patently unclassified information, about which the public had a right to know.

However rather than address its own corruption, ineptitude, and illegality, the government made us targets of federal criminal leak investigations, part of a vicious campaign against whistle-blowers that started under Bush and has now come to full fruition under Obama …We were transmogrified from public servants trying to improve our government, into traitors and enemies of the state. The government subjected us to severe retaliation that started with forcing us from our jobs as career public servants, rendering us unemployed and unemployable, while swinging a wrecking ball into the conditions of our jobs, in my case a security clearance, and in Jesselyn’s case, state bar licensure. We were blacklisted and no longer had a stream of income, while simultaneously incurring attorneys’ fees and necessitating second mortgages on our respective homes. But that was nothing compared to the overkill reprisal to come, placement on the no-fly list for Jesselyn and prosecution under the Espionage Act for me.

What we experienced sends unequivocally a chilling message, an unequivocally chilling message about what the government can and will do when one speaks truth to power: a direct form of political repression and censorship. If sharing issues of significant and even grave public concern which do not in any way compromise our national security is now considered a criminal act, we have strayed far from what our founding fathers envisioned. When exercising First Amendment rights is now considered espionage, this is anathema to a free, open, and democratic government….

Before the war on terrorism, our country well recognized the importance of free speech, privacy, legal counsel, and the right to be free from cruel and unusual punishment.. These are the hallmarks of tyranny and despotism, not democracy, and are…alien to the Constitution and our American way of life.

We did not take an oath to see secrecy and subterfuge used as cover for subverting the Constitution and violating the law. Our oath to the Constitution took primacy.

And today we have a frightening lack of responsibility and accountability within the national security complex, and it poses — I will mince no words here — it poses a direct threat to all our personal freedoms, as well as a clear and present danger to our constitutional republic….Our government has profoundly lost its constitutional compass and it’s been tainted to its core. And yet it is our enshrined liberties, it is our enshrined liberties that are our national security. What country do we want to keep?…

Jesselyn and I took an oath to support and defend the Constitution, not an oath of loyalty to the organization…We blew the whistle because we saw grave injustice and wrongdoing occurring within our respective organizations.

In my recently successfully concluded case that ended decisively in my favor, the government wanted to put me away in prison for many, many years in fact, at one point they threatened me with 35 years in prison — for simply telling the truth as a whistle-blower and exposing government wrongdoing and illegalities. The government found out everything they could about…me over many years, before I was even indicted. Having this secret ability…to collect and analyze data with few if any substantial constraints…is seductively powerful, and when …done in secret, it is the ultimate form of control over another...

Modern governments today increasingly perform mass surveillance of their citizens — explaining that they believe that it’s necessary to protect them from dangerous groups such as terrorists, criminals, or politically subversive dissenters — in order to track the citizenry and maintain social control. Read the history books. We are fast approaching a genuine surveillance society in the United States, a dark Orwellian future where every move, our every transaction, our every communication, and our every contact is recorded, compiled, and stored away, ready to be examined and used against us by the authorities whenever they want to at any time.

Five centuries ago, Machiavelli explained how to undertake a revolution from above without most people even noticing. On his Discourses on Livy, he wrote that one, quote, “must at least retain the semblance of the old forms; so that it may seem to the people that there has been no change in the institutions, even though in fact they are entirely different from the old ones”, unquote. In other words, keep the old government structures; meanwhile, you make profound changes to the actual system, because the appearances are all that most people notice. So, today, instead of seeing the mere corpse of the republic in which we supposedly live, we only see the clothing. We have had a quiet revolution that has not eliminated our elected representatives; it has simply made them largely irrelevant…

Being a student of history, I consider the immediate aftermath of World War II as a real turning point, when the American dream began to go south, at the very moment when the U.S. sat astride the world at the pinnacle of power. And…this is when the American republic began its transformation to a national security state and then exponentially accelerated as a result of 9/11 into a top-secret America…

With such a massively expanded ability by the government to spy on your personal life, we might as well bid adieu to the Fourth Amendment, the foundation of a citizen’s integrity as an individual person…as well as your ability to speak and associate freely with others under the Fourth Amendment.

Consider the conviction, as I summarized now for you, held by this country’s founding fathers, that a functioning constitutional republic and democracy requires what? An informed citizenry. So what happens in the case of an uninformed citizenry? The experiment in government by the people is doomed to failure and would inevitably transform into what we increasingly see today.

Do we want to continue to have a burgeoning military-industrial-congressional- intelligence-surveillance-cybersecurity-media complex? For whom does it benefit? Do we want to concede the eroding of basic human rights? Why?..

So I leave you with this as I channel Frederick Douglass. On August 3, 1857, Frederick Douglass delivered a West India Emancipation speech. At Canandaigua, New York, on the 23rd anniversary of the event, he said, quote, “..Those who profess to favor freedom and yet deprecate agitation are men who want crops without plowing up the ground; they want rain without thunder and lightning. They want the ocean without the awful roar of its many waters.” “Power and those in control concede nothing without a demand. They never have and they never will.” Let me translate into today’s language. Every one of us, every one of us in this room and beyond this room, each and every one of us must keep demanding, must keep fighting, must keep thundering, must keep plowing, must keep on keeping things struggling, must speak out, and must speak up until justice is served, because where there is no justice there can be no peace.” (Real News Network, Nov 4, 2012, “Whistleblower Threatened with 35 Years of Tyranny, Warns of Impending Tyranny“) 

Drake was not aware of the torture of TIs. But would he have been shocked by it? Does it conflict with his understanding of what the Deep State is able and willing to do? Obviously not.

William Binney learned the same lesson. He worked for the NSA for 30 years, and resigned in 2001. Binney was a Russia specialist who started work in NSA as an analyst and became successively a Technical Director, and then a geopolitical world Technical Director. In the 1990s, he co-founded a unit on automating signals Intelligence. His career culminated as Technical Leader for Intelligence in 2001. Having expertise in intelligence analysis, traffic analysis, systems analysis, knowledge management, and mathematics (including set theory, number theory, and probability), Binney has been described as one of the best analysts in the NSA’s history. Binney complained to the Department of Defense in 2002 that NSA had wasted taxpayer money by buying a data collection system — Trailblazer — that collected 20 trillion communication transactions of American citizens. Binney was particularly angry because he believed the surfeit of information prevented them from detecting 9/11.

Binney’s outspoken criticism of the agency subjected him to reprisals. On July 2007, after The New York Times reported on the government’s warrantless wiretapping, the FBI broke into his house with guns drawn and confiscated his computers and business records. Although he was cleared of wrong-doing the NSA revoked his security clearance forcing him to close his business at a cost of $300,000 a year. (See Wikipedia/William Binney/U.S. Intelligence Official.)

Binney described his arrest:

“The first I knew the FBI was in my house was the guy pointing a gun at me when I was coming out of the shower. That’s the first I knew. My son let them in, and they pushed him out of the way at gunpoint, and then they came up into my bedroom and pointed guns at my wife and me, so that’s the first I knew they were there. And it surprised me. I said: “Well, what are you doing here? I’ve been cooperating with you, telling you everything I know about this, everybody involved in this program, so why are you doing this?” Basically they wanted me to tell them something that would implicate someone in a crime, OK? The point was they were after Diane Roark because they didn’t like her, and also Tom Drake…Then they told me they thought I was lying to them,…So then I started to get mad. I said: “OK, you want to know what the crime is? Bush, Cheney, Hayden, and Tenet were the central conspirators to subvert the Constitution and the laws of the United States, and here is how they did it. The raid took about seven hours — they were there from 9:00 in the morning to the middle of the afternoon, and they took my computer, all the electronic hardware, discs and things that go with that…” (PBS Frontline/United States of Secrets/William Binney.)

On May 31, 2016, Binney told Loud & Clear host Brian Becker on Radio Sputnik, “They [the NSA] don’t care what they do, they feel that they have the right to do anything that they feel necessary, and they will cover up crimes and procedures and violations of regulations that they’ve done to achieve whatever their ends are.” This is a man who worked for NSA for decades, and became increasingly disillusioned with policies after he became a whistle-blower. “The president can declare anyone a terrorist threat and have the military take them off the street, anywhere, and incarcerate them indefinitely without any due process. Those are violations of fundamental rights of the Constitution,” he explained. “That’s exactly what Special Order 48 issued by the Nazis in 1933 did, right after the Reichstag fire. It says almost exactly the same thing.” (Sputnik News, May 31, 2016, “NSA Surveillance Takes a Page from Nazi Germany“, accessed July, 2016). 

In early October, 2016, William Binney and Kurt Wiebe, another whistle-blower who used to be an analyst for the NSA, in an interview with Ella Felder, told her and the several hundred TIs who were listening in on a mass telephone conference call that they had made a commitment to expose the plight of TIs. Wiebe explained that he did not know about TIs when he was at the NSA:

“We understand the predicament you are in, we have been in similar situations but don’t give up the faith — just because we haven’t seen it at NSA or CIA doesn’t mean a doggone thing…NSA and CIA work in compartmented areas, or on a Need to Know basis. We do know government has a history of experimentation against people, and the DOD has authorization to conduct experiments on people, sometimes with consent, some without consent. We know government has the power to deliver all kinds of aggressive measures against people.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, October 16, 2016, NSA Whistleblower Powerhouses Stand Up to Support “Targeted Individuals” Worldwide”)

Binney said they were planning on doing research and compiling reports from TIs,

“And then finally, we’ll try to put together recommendations on how people should proceed, to try and prove what is happening with them specifically with compiled evidence — in such a way that you can bring the evidence into a court of law. We’re trying to use the discipline that we use for our data analysis, that would be demonstrable in a court of law.”

Binney, Drake and others escaped the most punitive arm of the Deep State. The two most famous whistle-blowers were not so fortunate. Bradley/Chelsea Manning was the most unfortunate of the whistleblowers. For his service to humanity in exposing US war crimes, this young man/now woman received a formal sentence of 35 years. Political dissidents from Noam Chomsky to Daniel Ellsberg hailed him as a national hero, while politicians called him a traitor. Edward Snowden, who exposed the surveillance Panopticon, is more fortunate than Manning—he is forced to live in exile in Russia.

 

Back to Top

TIs and No-Touch Torture

TIs are plagued by basically two categories of what they experience as torture or harassment: 1) group stalking and 2) subjugation to experimentation with neuro-weaponry, and directed energy weapons. The first class of experiences is deemed highly improbable by Sheridan and James, and thus those who experience them are “delusional.” The second class is supposedly impossible.

Sheridan and James write concerning allegations of group stalking: “the resources or elaborate organization required to carry them out made the alleged activities highly improbable.” They give several examples: “hostile operatives being inserted in victim’s workplace and their children’s schools; 24-hour electronic surveillance involving teams of men in black vans; surveillance by cameras placed throughout the city; staff of shops and libraries being amongst the group stalkers; everyone in the street being ‘plants’ acting out roles towards the victim; ‘more than a thousand’ people being involved; traffic lights being manipulated always to go red on approach… collaboration between diverse agencies, such as the Automobile Association, a building society, a website, and neighbors.”

Below is a description of an example of group-stalking by Ramola D. She describes two changes in her life; first, the relocation of her family to a suburban neighborhood in Massachusetts, and then the transition that occurs when she becomes a TI. The rich prose and the very thick detailed descriptions give the account a sense of realism that one would not typically find in descriptions by “psychotics.”

Over the last couple years, after we moved up to the Boston area from Washington DC in the summer of 2011, I have been working mostly from home on various writing projects, editing a literary journal, and running creativity workshops and summer camps in art, science, and writing for children, as well as working at local academic institutions nearby. I’ve had a real taste this way of the quiet, lazy feel of the South Shore; I’ve enjoyed the ambience of living in a “settled” hundred-year old neighborhood in Quincy filled with stately, long-lasting oaks and maples, gentle and genteel neighbors, mostly older, with the occasional friendly young family with kids…the usual scurry of backyard bird life woken by the occasional inland-straying seagull, and above all, daytime quiet. Quiet, sleepy, placid, slow, laid-back, relaxed, easygoing are words I might have used to describe both the South Shore and its residents back then…

This unfortunately is no longer the case. Over the past year, things have changed dramatically in Quincy.

Now police sirens scream night and day down the once-quiet streets, including the main streets Newport Avenue and Hancock and, in my neighborhood, the close-by Harvard Street–and I mean, quite frequently, as if a thousand criminals were driving hellfire down the South Shore with trusty Quincy cops in high pursuit–and fire engines also shriek fairly often as they clang and roll by, often on quiet walks down winding sidestreets where no hint of burning houses can be seen, to add to which EMS trucks and vans also clog sidestreets and main streets, using sirens and trundling urgently by, as if the number of accidents or emergency medical calls had somehow increased overnight. Daytime quiet therefore no longer exists–there has been a dramatic escalation in the use of sirens, and it continues. This absurdity–especially absurd in its contrast to previously-peaceful Quincy–is clearly contrived. The local police have been incentivized to act like crazed patrollers of a criminal town. To add, if anyone’s noticed–all across the country, police cars and sirens have changed–they are outfitted with dozens of lines of blue lights now, their siren whoops and hollers now, rather than emitting a single round call, and the whole vehicle buzzes and shakes and whoops and dazzles as it flies by–bizarre? You bet.

Traffic also has changed. The roads of Quincy are now clogged with gigantic SUVs, Hummers, large pick-up trucks, and military-style pick-ups with menacing metal frames over the truckbed, large trucks of every kind, and frequent clogging of roads with roadwork trucks, even when there is no roadwork in sight. Starting in Fall 2013, traffic lights suddenly increased in duration. This has not abated. Traffic lights are noticeably longer, which means the long lines of cars with engines chugging, releasing masses of dirty exhaust into the atmosphere at lights are longer, and drivers–the usual Bostonian highway bellicosity notwithstanding–are markedly more belligerent, frequently tailgating, cutting off directly in front of cars, and crowding like swarming bees on highways.” (The Everyday Concerned CitizenWhy I Started This Blog)

It sounds crazy but the author seems sane! The author is an accomplished professional, a former professor, with a husband and child, with no history of “psychiatric” problems. The writing style itself reflects the mind of a writer fully in control of her craft, and of herself. If Ramola D appeared before a jury, undoubtedly the jurors would find her a credible witness––not dismiss her as delusional. To back up her story, there would be other targets with similar stories. The second change had taken place after Ramola had begun writing to her representatives asking about the chemtrails she saw in the sky. She also complained in her child’s school about the ethics of a childcare operation. At a trial against the American Deep State, historians would be called as expert witnesses to demonstrate that very similar tactics were used by Stasi — the secret police — in East Germany, or by Russian Intelligence. This establishes a pattern of such activities by Deep States.

It is impossible to fully explain in rational terms these programs since they are based on institutionalized paranoia, on collective insanity. The psychologists who say that such operations are highly unlikely fail to understand the mindset of those who designed these programs. Ramola D credibly argues that the purpose of such programs is to get the target labeled insane, so that the Deep State’s victimization of American citizens will remain invisible. But such a goal in itself makes no sense, is insane; it also indicates that the Deep State does not regard mental health professionals as very canny. She writes that these tactics seem “a desperate attempt to get the individual diagnosed professionally (by either an unsuspecting or complicit psychiatrist) as a “paranoid schizophrenic”, the moment he or she begins talking about covert harassment…being stalked by helicopters, being covertly implanted, being “gangstalked” on the roadways, or being surrounded by people wearing his favorite colors or talking about him or saying things in his presence straight out of his [own] head.” (The Everyday Concerned Citizen, 2015: “Targeted Individuals” are Non-Consensual Subjects in Criminal, Clandestine, Classified “Top Secret” MKULTRA-Extended Mind & Behavior Control/Torture Experimentation by Joint Military/Intel/Justice/Academic Institutions, as well as Targets of COINTELPRO and Electronic Warfare)

According to the Department of Defense in 2002, operations such as these are designed to be used against citizens of the enemy country (not against or upon citizens of its own host country) — the goal is to break the political will of the enemy. (Rich, 2011, New World War, Morrisville, NJ: Lulu Enterprises, p. 295.)

The evidence for the existence of group stalking is not just TIs’ and historians’ testimony but government documents (the books on Stasi are based on archives that became available with the demise of the Soviet Union) revealing similar programs in totalitarian societies and in the US in other periods. (Of course the programs have become more sophisticated over the years.)

For example, COINTELPRO was a program implemented by the FBI in the 1960s and 1970s designed to disrupt anti-war organizations and groups that were thought to be communist or socialist. J. Edgar Hoover announced the directives “to expose, disrupt, misdirect, discredit or otherwise neutralize” persons in these groups. (Mark Rich, 2011, New World War, p.87.) The Church Committee stated that under COINTELPRO, “the arsenal of techniques used against foreign espionage agents is transferred to domestic enemies.” (Ibid.) COINTELPRO included using undercover agents posing as activists in order to carry out surveillance or to act as provocateurs (in many cases that meant becoming the intimate partner of the activist––a heinous kind of subterfuge), and fomenting hostility between different factions of the left. Human Rights Watch notes,“The CIA then began monitoring student activists and infiltrating anti-war organizations by working with local police departments to pull-off burglaries, illegal entries (black bag jobs), interrogations and electronic surveillance. After President Nixon came to office in 1969, all of these domestic surveillance activities were consolidated into Operation CHAOS.” (Project Freedom, Echelon, “The NSA’s Global Spying Network,” accessed July, 2016.)

In 2002, we learned from the mainstream media that the Bush Administration planned to recruit millions of United States citizens as domestic informants in a program “likely to alarm civil liberties groups.” The Terrorism Information and Prevention System, or TIPS, meant the US would have a higher percentage of citizen informants than the former East Germany did. The program would use a minimum of 4 per cent of Americans to report “suspicious activity.” The scope of the surveillance network was broad: TIPS volunteers would be recruited primarily from among those whose work provides access to homes, businesses or transport systems. Letter carriers, utility employees, truck drivers and train conductors are among those named as targeted recruits. (The Sunday Morning Herald, July 15, 2002, “US Planning to Recruit 1/24 Americans as Spies”)

The program would involve a joint effort by local police, DOJ, state and local businesses. Even though the program was rejected by Congress, that does not mean it was not implemented–it merely went “dark” as the CIA calls it. That makes it all the more effective with Congress unaware of its existence and the media convinced it therefore did not exist. Mark Rich reports, “the American Civil Liberty Union contends that it and similar programs are being used aggressively across the nation.” ( Rich, The Hidden Evil, 2008, Morrisville, NC: Lulu Enterprises, pp.100-6, Informants, The Hidden Evil (online), accessed July 2016). According to Nick Turse, Bush had initiated similar programs under the auspices of Citizen Corps coordinated by the Department of Homeland Security. (See Turse, 2009, The Complex: How the Military Invades our Everyday Lives, NY; Metropolitan Books, excerpt at Google Books, accessed November, 2016.)

Rich describes a typical pattern of group stalking reported by TIs:

“City vehicles, postal vehicles, fire trucks, school buses, and taxis are reportedly stalking people. Construction projects encircle a targeted person’s home and also spring up at frequently visited places. Utility companies interrupt service. Local businesses provide poor service, appear incompetent or clumsy and work with civilian informants to harass targeted people in their stores.” (Ibid).

Note how this matches the report above of Ramola D, as well as activities reported by the “delusional” subjects of Sheridan and James. There is no evidence that those who constructed the psychiatric metanarrative read about TIPs, read the ACLU report (“The Surveillance Industrial Complex,” 2004, Jay Stanley, New York ACLU), or read about remarkably similar practices engaged in by secret police in East Germany, and elsewhere.

Only two websites and no books on this topic are mentioned in the bibliography of the article by James and Sheridan. And although these websites are excellent, it is obvious that James and Sheridan dismissed the reports on these websites without reading the material let alone grappling with the challenge it posed to their arrogant claim that all 120 of the TIs whose accounts they read were delusional!

In East Germany, the citizen-informants included doctors, lawyers, journalists, sports-figures, writers, actors, high officials in religious organizations, pastors, waiters, hotel personnel, and other workers. “Schools, universities, and hospitals were infiltrated from top to bottom,” wrote John Koehler, author of Stasi: The Untold Story of the East German Secret Police. Markus Wolf, a former Stasi officer, said that, in Germany, TIs were gangstalked by citizen agents who “literally encircled their everyday movements.” (See Rich, 2008, op.cit.) The homes of these persons were “put under siege.” (Rich, p.105.) TIs (the term was not used in East Germany) were typically stalked wherever they went. A report authored by Ray Cline, former Associate Director of the CIA, said that Stasi’s network of informers reached into “every crevice of society.” Although the goal here and in the Soviet Union was ostensibly “national security,” Cline noted that the surveillance system was really used to terrorize the population and inhibit them from “speaking out.”

It appears that no one has admitted to being citizen-spies in these programs, Rich wrote in 2008. According to a former Soviet citizen-informant, they were told “secrecy” was essential and they had to sign a contract to not reveal their work for the Deep State. They were told the public often did not realize “the danger these people represent to our society.” (Cited in Rich, 2008, op. cit., online edition.) In the US, one can only guess the citizen informers are told that the TIs they are stalking are threats to national security. “The behavior exhibited by these [ordinary] citizens indicates that they are absolutely convinced that this policy is legitimate and necessary.”

In almost all cases, the families of TIs believe they are mentally ill, and many of them end up (at least briefly) in a psychiatric hospital — most trust the doctors and unwisely confide in them — where the label they are given (“paranoid schizophrenic” is typical) discredits them permanently, particularly among their families. Even those who have spouses who are critics of the national security state find their spouses seem to have a need to deny such covert harassment including the use of neuro-weaponry is happening so close to home. Many TIs think therapists must be c­onsciously collaborating but, as I argued above, most professionals are deeply conformist political centrists (usually social liberals) and unaware of the existence of Deep State operations. This is a distinctive kind of totalitarian system that relies in general on a precarious balance of stealth/invisibility and complicitous cooperation.

Thus occurrences such as those reported by Ramola D and others are deemed “highly unlikely” by Sheridan and James, and thus neophytes who might take TIs’ allegations seriously are set straight by those professionals familiar with the psychiatric metanarrative. Besides group stalking, the other most common disturbance reported by TIs is voices in their head, what is known as Voice to Skull technology. Sheridan and James say that such technology is impossible. They don’t merely claim that there is no evidence such technology exists, they claim it is impossible for it to exist! This is laughable. This is the era of quantum physics––of quantum effects, and paradoxes that by all previous standards were impossible, and that has thus taught genuine scientists to be more humble. I never cease to be amazed by the hubris and idiocy of mental health professionals — nor do I think these authors are deliberately propagating disinformation.

Dr. Robert Duncan’s testimony has been ignored by the mainstream media although he has multiple graduate degrees from Harvard and Dartmouth. He has worked for the Department of Defense and the CIA on AI (Artificial Intelligence) and neuroscience projects which seek to stimulate and rewire the human brain (see below). He has testified that he worked on the development of this technology used to make a variety of neuro-weapons. In his book, Project Soul Catcher: Secrets of Cyber and Cybernetic Warfare Revealed (2010, Boise, Idaho: Higher Order Thinkers Publishing), he discusses weaponry that can cause virtually all of the effects reported by TIs — from “synthetic telepathy” to “Voice to Skull” voices. He became a whistle-blower when he discovered this technology was being used in non-consensual experiments on American citizens (or to punish persons who had angered the wrong people), just as LSD had been used in non-consensual experiments by the CIA in a previous era in MK Ultra, as documented by the US Congress’ Church Committee. He writes “I apologize to the human race for any contribution to these 4th generation weapons that I may have worked on that are more horrific than the nuclear bomb and whose cover-up is more pervasive than the Manhattan Project” (See www.drrobertduncan.com — not Duncan’s own website).

Dr. Barrie Trower is a former Royal Navy Microwave Weapons Expert and former Cold-War captured spy debriefer for the UK Intelligence Services with advanced degrees in physics. He states:

“During the 1950s and 1960s during the Cold War, it was realized…that microwaves could be used as stealth weapons. The Russians beamed the American embassy during the Cold War and it gave everybody working in the embassy cancer, breast cancers, leukemias, whatever, and it was realized then that low level microwaves were the perfect stealth weapon to be used on dissident groups around the world, because you could make dissident groups sick, give them cancer, change their mental outlook on life without them even knowing they were being radiated, and one of my particular tasks…I spent eleven years questioning captured spies…one of my particular tasks was to learn the particular frequencies of microwaves that they used on which particular victims, if I may use that word, and what the outcome was, and I built up a dossier…I’m probably the only person in the world with the complete list…I built up a dossier of what pulse frequencies of microwaves will cause what psychological or physiological damage to a person.” (See Institute for Geopathology/Barrie Trower.)

Trower’s testimony makes clear that — contrary to psychiatric claims — that not only are Voice to Skull weapons possible but the military already possesses them:

“So the military can now put voices into people’s heads to do whatever deed they wish it to achieve, and the super stores have also realized that rather than say ‘put that down, you’re going to steal it’, if you’re indecisive and you’re shopping, they can say ‘you really do want to buy this’, and after nine months, and I got the figure from one of your calls, somebody took one of your super stores to court for beaming them. And they made a phenomenal profit in just nine months, phenomenal profit. But because your Federal Communications Committee says that microwaves were safe, the case fell. (Barrie Trower, The Cooking of Humanity.)

Gloria Naylor tells of her own victimization by neuro-weaponry in her “novel,” 1996. In the Appendix she describes the experience of herself and others: 

Sleep deprivation is common and dreams are manipulated. Victims say, “They [whoever is targeting them] can see through my eyes, what I see.” Sometimes victims describe seeing the images of projected holograms. Thoughts can be read. Most victims describe a phenomenon they call “street theater.”

For example, people around the victim have repeated verbatim, the victim’s immediate thoughts, or harassive and personalized statements are repeated by strangers wherever the victim may go.

Emotions can be manipulated. Microwave hearing, known to be an unclassified military capability of creating voices in the head, is regularly reported. Implanted thoughts and visions are common, with repetitive themes that can include pedophilia, homophobia, and degradation. Victims say it is like having a radio or TV in your head. Less frequently, remote and abusive sexual manipulation is reported. Almost all victims say repetitive behavior control techniques are used and include negative, stimulus-response, or feedback loops. (Cited in Cheryl Welsh, 2008,In Contravention of Conventional Wisdom: CIA No touch torture makes sense of mind control allegations”, accessed November 2016.)

I have now been told of experiences just like these by several dozen TIs — all have the same pattern — the voices that respond maliciously to their own thoughts, the manipulation of dreams, (some describe unwanted sexual feelings or orgasms — “electronic rape”), many say the torturers can see through their eyes, etc — these experiences often reported by people in the age range 40 through 60s with no history of “psychosis.” (The experience of psychosis usually happens in early adulthood.)

Welsh finds that these mind control techniques are similar to the new kind of “no touch” torture used by the CIA in Guantanamo and elsewhere, which is discussed in the article. She writes, “The mind control techniques seem to be psychological techniques to disorient the victim and cause him to feel completely controlled, dependent, and at the mercy of his torturers.” The victim is estranged from his everyday world — like the “psychotic” — and trapped in a theater of the mind. Unlike the psychotic’s experience, this mind theater is engineered by the torturers. The goal is to break down the personality of the subject to gain complete control over him/her. I want to mention that although the new type of torture is based on a paradigm developed by the CIA and military, it is useless for extracting accurate information from subjects. In fact, when used upon TIs, it does not even have the intended results, because TIs increasingly resist isolation by joining — often over the Internet and by phone — other groups of TIs — and they usually become social activists against the Deep State.

Quoting from Alfred McCoy’s book, A Question of Torture, CIA Interrogation, from the Cold War to the War on Terror, Welsh states, “Thus, much of the pain from all forms of torture is psychological, not physical, based upon denying victims any power over their lives. In sum, the torturer strives ‘through insult and disqualification, by means of threats…to break all the victim’s possible existential platforms.”

Welsh insightfully writes,

“Alhough TIs go to extremes in trying to escape the physical targeting, they are unsuccessful. The psychological trauma is inflicted by the sense of causing one’s own pain. [In Guantanamo, causing one’s own pain was achieved by making prisoners stand for hours.] Many TIs report that the targeting causes TIs to become isolated from friends, families, and in many cases TIs are unable to work. This common reaction to targeting seems to be a type of self-inflicted psychological pain.”

What Welsh does not mention is that the rise of weekly or twice- weekly TI telephone conference calls sometimes with hundreds of TIs participating, has greatly diminished the psychological impact upon the victim — not that it ceases to be torture, but it does overcome largely the harrowing sense of isolation, and makes life tolerable for many. This is one reason the psychiatric metanarrative, which seeks to force TIs back into isolation and dependency on an expert who regards her as insane, is so harmful — and TIs would be well advised to avoid (and certainly not to argue with) all professionals who accept this metanarrative.

Welsh’s article makes the use of neuroweaponry less mysterious — although one cannot help but be puzzled by the sensibility of those who designed these tortures, which I repeat are not effective means of obtaining information. Drawing upon the work of students of CIA torture, Welsh highlights the psychological theory and distinctive goals of CIA torture — to break down the personality, not through direct psychical torture and injury but through the creation of physical distress and acute psychological trauma. In Guantanamo and elsewhere, the effect is achieved through a combination of making prisoners adopt stress positions (e.g., standing for hours), and subjecting them to isolation and control of the environment through sensory deprivation, constant noise, and discordant music. Welsh notes, “It seems logical to surmise that the successful techniques of no touch torture would cross over to more technically based remote, advanced mind control programs.”

Medical doctor John Hall writes in Guinea Pigs, Technologies of Control“Fast forward to today, we have over 300,000 people in the United States voicing complaints of electronic harassment….We have known for some time that several technologies exist that are capable of putting voices in one’s head to subliminally harass or control them.” (Guinea Pigs, Technologies of Control, 2014, Houston: Strategic Book Publishing). Why are so few people aware of this technology?

As Ramola D succinctly puts it, ”Neuroscientists in particular know that we stand today on the lip of a massive revolution in human affairs with the new knowledge of remote influencing technologies [remote from the target, often by satellite] capable of manipulating the human body and human brain. So do the Military and Intelligence agencies.” (Washington’s Blog, The American Public Informs President Obama’s Commission for the Study of Bioethical Issues About Ongoing Non-Consensual Human Experimentation in the USA Today, accessed July 2016.) By dismissing or ridiculing the complaints of the victims of these new technologies, psychiatrists, psychologists, and others in the helping professions, as well as journalists who unquestioningly propagate the psychiatric metanarrative, betray their own vocational mandates.

 

Back to Top

Neuroweaponry and Classified Military Research

In McPhate’s article, he implies that the tortures carried out on unwitting prisoners in the CIA’s /Deep State’s quest to gain absolute power over the human mind was an aberration that came to an end in the 1960s. “The military establishment, the theory goes, never gave up on the ambitions of MK Ultra, the C.I.A.’s infamous program to control the mind in the 1950s and ’60s,” he states.

He apparently has not read the numerous books documenting that the Deep State including CIA, NSA, and the military never gave up its research on influencing or controlling the mind. This has always been the purpose on their unclassified research. “The major areas of unclassified neuroscience research, molecular biology, cognitive neuroscience and brain imaging research, which had their beginnings in the 1950s, remain the dominant areas of research in neuroscience today,” writes Cheryl Welsh, a lawyer, TI and founder of Mind Justice. (Mind JusticeResearch Possibilities, Reliable Newspaper and Magazine Sources, Document Proof of Mind Control Technology.) Bioelectrical experiments on the brain were off limits to those who did not agree to put their talent to the service of the Deep State.

One might add that this arrangement — whereby the most potent tools for influencing the brain remained classified — was also in the interests of the pharmaceutical industry, a multi-billion dollar industry that would be financially threatened and diminished by the discoveries of bioelectric research. The psychiatric-pharmaceutical complex mushroomed in the 1980s and 1990s —  psychiatrists invented bogus explanations for life problems that required chemical fixes, e.g. the theory of “biochemical imbalances,” now discredited. But, as Welsh notes, there is evidence that research on the bioelectricity of the brain, the basis of the neuro-weaponry and mind control instruments used on TIs — has remained classified in CIA mind control programs that began in the 1950s and in DARPA programs to develop technologies for remote access to the brain. ”In the 1960s and 1970s, the electromagnetic aspect of neuroscience research was well funded and classified by the US government.” (Cheryl Welsh, Misled and betrayed: How US cover stories are keeping a Cold War weapon and illegal human testing secret, accessed July 2016.)

At the same time a cover story was propagated in the press that neuroweapons are “science fiction.” “As a result of both secrecy and prevailing scientific thought, however, bioelectromagnetic research has remained underfunded and disregarded by the mainstream scientific community.”(Cheryl Welsh, Misled and betrayed: How US cover stories are keeping a Cold War weapon and illegal human testing secret, accessed July 2016.) In other words the public knows little about mind control weapons because the military and Intelligence made sure the research was kept secret, and those few unclassified scientists who showed an interest in bio-electricity and would not submit to government control were steered away from researching the technology that held the most promise for mind control.

But actually there is more evidence for the existence of neuroweaponry despite efforts to keep it secret and despite the press secrecy and ridicule as exemplified in The New York Times article. Nick Begich, Ph.D., author and public speaker in his book, Controlling the Human Mind:The Technologies of Political Control and Tools for Peak Performance (Begich, 2006, Anchorage, Alaska: Earthpulse Press) unearths information that corroborates Welsh’s claim and that shows even in the unclassified sector there is evidence of the existence of the kind of advanced bio-electrical technology that is now used in non-consensual experiments on Americans. (See also Paul Baird, “Patented Technologies” at Surveillance Issues/Advanced Surveillance and Harassment Technologies, accessed November, 2016.) Actually the motive is not always obvious. Some believe the main purpose is no longer experimentation but primarily the torture of political enemies, or to create an environment of fear that stifles dissent.

Begich agrees the research that was soon classified began in the 1950s or 60s. While the research using LSD was publicized by the Church Committee, the CIA also had other projects. For example, MK-ULTRA Subproject 119 involved a critical view of the literature and scientific “bioelectric signals from the human organism, and activation of human behavior by remote [electronic] means” (Begich, Controlling the Human Mind:The Technologies of Political Control and Tools for Peak Performance, p.60). This description was written in 1960, thus corroborating Welsh’s argument.

In 1996, the US Air Force published a document called The Information Revolution and the Future Airforce by Colonel John Warden III, that laid out their plans for the future. It is worth quoting at length –it belies the psychiatric claim that the possession of advanced neuroweaponry is “impossible.”

“Prior to the mid-21st century, there will be a virtual explosion of knowledge in the field of neuroscience. We will have achieved a clear understanding of how the human brain works, how it really controls the various functions of the body, and how it can be manipulated (both positively and negatively). One can envision the development of electromagnetic energy sources, the output of which can be pulsed, shaped, and focused, that can couple with the human body in a fashion that will allow one to prevent voluntary muscular movements, control emotions (and thus actions), produce sleep, transmit suggestions, interfere with both short-term and long-term memory, produce an experience set, and delete an experience set [emphasis added]. This will open the door for the development of some novel capabilities that can be used in armed conflict, in terrorist/hostage situations, and in training….” (Begich, p.110).

The above descriptions are consistent with exactly the kind of problems that TIs claim they have as a result of what they believe to be targeting by neuro-weaponry! Psychiatrists do not read these documents (unless they work for the CIA), but by their standards the author of this document is delusional––because according to the psychiatric metanarrative, technology with these capacities could not possibly exist!

Furthermore, as early as 1980, John B. Alexander of the U.S. Army said,

“Mind-altering techniques designed to impact opponents are well-advanced. The procedures employed include manipulation of human behavior through the use of psychological weapons affecting sight, sound, smell, temperature, electromagnetic energy or sensory deprivation.” (Begich, p.100.)

Colonel Warden’s report goes on specifically to mention the creation of voices, referred to as Voice to Skull by TIs,

“It would also appear to be possible to create high fidelity speech in the human body, raising the possibility of covert suggestion and psychological direction… Thus, it may be possible to ‘talk’ to selected adversaries in a fashion that would be most disturbing to them.” (Begich, p.110, also at Earthpulse/Mind Control, accessed July 2016.)

Not only is this kind of impossible technology forecast in this report but Begich found that quite a few patents (unclassified) proving this technology — called Voice to Skull by TIs — existed.

In the early research, Begich comments it was reported that “clear sound signals” had been sent and received — this is reported in the non-classified sector. Dr Robert Becker, a physician known for his work on bio-electricity, wrote in 1995 about a current Voice to Skull device, that “such a device has obvious applications in covert operations designed to drive a subject crazy with voices, or to deliver undetectable instructions to a potential assassin.” (Begich, p.124.)

Begich in 2006 notes, about the Air Force report, confirming Welsh’s contention made years after the report, that the technology goes back to the 1950s: “The above report was a forecast for the year 2020. However, the reality is that these technologies already exist and there are a number of patents in the open literature which clearly show the possibilities. This research is not new but goes back to the 1950s.” (p.112.) The work done in the classified sector was far more advanced than someone without knowledge of this area could discern in 1995. Begich says that “what was known from experience” is that the government withheld patents under the advisement of the military. When inventors’ intellectual property is seized, “the inventors are given a choice — work for the government or you cannot continue your research on or even talk about the invention under a national security order. Those who do not cooperate have their work…shut down.” (Ibid, p.125.)

While the research in the 1990s was not new, what was new was the idea of openly using these weapons upon the civilian populations of “the enemy” and also as we will see upon US citizens. In 1995, the EPA wrote, “A new class of weapons, based on electromagnetic fields, has been added to the muscles of the military organism. The C3I [Command, Control, Communications and Intelligence] doctrine is still growing and expanding. It would appear that the military may yet be able to completely control the minds of the civilian population.” (p.112.)

The non-covert targeting of civilian populations by the military is a significant departure from its history. Clearly manipulation was used in the past but it was not openly espoused. But with such advanced technology evidently the military did not want to be confined to covert operations. Begich’s statement that in the past “the military used persuasion through real information…to win populations over” needs to emended. The military equally or more often used false information as well as false flag operations (e.g., attacks covertly committed by the military and attributed to Communists or terrorists) on civilians in enemy countries. But what is unprecedented was the ability and intention of the military to use “mind manipulation” —  through directed energy interventions on the brain itself — to gain support, or perhaps more likely not to garner support but to quell the resistance of civilian populations to US military interventions. (Ibid, also at Earthpulse/Mind Control, accessed July, 2016).

These kinds of weapons — those discussed above and others, euphemistically termed “non-lethal weapons” — are to be used not only against citizens of the “enemy” or against stateless terrorists but against Americans — and not only for the purpose of non-consensual experimentation which we have seen has been standard practice for decades, but also to control domestic “adversaries”! As Dr. Nick Begich notes, “On July 21, 1994, Dr. Christopher Lamb, Director of Policy Planning, issued a draft Department of Defense directive which would establish a policy for non-lethal weapons.” The policy connected the military’s weapons’ research to civilian law enforcement agencies. (Begich, p.156, also at The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Is the US Department of Justice Secretly Permitting Local Law Enforcement and the Military to Assault American Citizens Using Covert Directed-Energy “Non-Lethal” Weapons?, accessed July, 2016.)

According to this directive, non-lethal weapons are to be used on the government’s domestic “adversaries”. The definition of “adversary” now appears to include any American whose activities are disapproved of by the military or by law enforcement. The directive states (emphasis added): “The term ‘adversary’ is used above in its broadest sense, including those who are not declared enemies but who are engaged in activities we wish to stop. This policy does not preclude legally authorized domestic use of the nonlethal weapons by United States military forces in support of law enforcement.” (Ibid, p.157,  The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Is the US Department of Justice Secretly Permitting Local Law Enforcement and the Military to Assault American Citizens Using Covert Directed-Energy “Non-Lethal” Weapons?, accessed July, 2016.)

Begich aptly notes, “This allows the use of the military against the citizens of the country that they are supposed to protect…” It belies McPhate’s contention below that the goals of MK-ULTRA were abandoned in the 1970s. This describes a police state in which “non-lethal” weapons may be used upon anyone engaged in “activities” the military or police “wish to stop” — a police state in which the first Amendment has been completely vitiated, and the military, police, and Intelligence agencies are sovereign rulers invading not just persons’ homes (without warrants) but the sacred sanctuary of their brains, and in which even freedom of thought is monitored, proscribed, punished, manipulated. Or in other words 1984 on steroids! This of course by the standards of Psychiatry is both highly improbable and impossible. Tell that to the Military!

Furthermore, this plan is not merely a daydream of the Department of Defense. In 1995, the Pentagon received from the government $50 million to be used conjointly with the Department of Justice to develop these weapons —  and significant funding has been available every year since then. (Begich, p.158.) Begich aptly notes, “Not since the Civil War…has the military machine been turned against American citizens.” (Ibid, p.159.) Ramola D notes that “we are being publicly told that the Department of Defense long ago, in 1994, struck a deal with the Department of Justice to permit the military to use non-lethal weapons on American civilians, inside America, in support of law enforcement.”(The Everyday Concerned Citizen, Is the US Department of Justice Secretly Permitting Local Law Enforcement and the Military to Assault American Citizens Using Covert Directed-Energy “Non-Lethal” Weapons?, accessed July, 2016.)

According to military analyst and Washington Post journalist William Arkin, Department of Defense spending on electro-magnetic weapons had reached a billion dollars a year in 2008. (Belitsos, op.cit. “The Covert Use of Energy Weapons for Political Control, accessed July, 2016.) Air Force Secretary Michael Wynne stated in 2007 that nonlethal weapons should be tested on U.S. civilians in crowd control situations before being used on the battlefield. Domestic use would make it easier to avoid bad press in the international community: “Because if I hit someone with a non-lethal weapon and they claimed that it injured them, I think I would be vilified in the world press.” (The Seattle Times, September 13, 2006, “Test Non-Lethal Weapons in the US, See also Associated Press article at “US to Use Microwave Weapons on American Citizens“, accessed July 2006.) So in order to avoid unfavorable international publicity, it is better to test these experimental weapons on domestic political dissidents!

I have now presented, to the jury of readers, a summary of the case against the Deep State—based on a demonstration that Deep State operations, as described in the TI metanarrative, do in fact exist. Above I listed the obstacles, 1) to 6) , to fairly assessing the testimony of the targeted individual. There is lack of familiarity with TIs, 1), and with accounts of group stalking, 5), and of advanced neuro-weaponry, 3), which I have tried to remedy.

I have attempted here to overcome a formidable but egregious mistaken objection to the TI metanarrative which is based on 2), people’s difficulty believing the US government would subject American citizens to harm. I have shown above that this is not merely a “conspiracy theory” meme but has been corroborated by legislative as well as Presidential commissions and reports by US representatives: Over and over American citizens have been subjected by US intelligence and military to dangerous, harmful, and often lethal experiments — for the ostensible sake of national security. The use of cybernetic weaponry for political control has been openly advocated by top officials in the military in documents produced by the military. To think that experimentation and this kind of application of weaponry came to an abrupt end in the late 1970s when the Church Committee convinced Congress to make it illegal would be naïve (see Jon Rappoport, Jan 9, 2015, CIA Mind Control Program: Did it Really End?, accessed November 2016), considering the historical record — as noted — of the CIA, and considering that no one was ever held accountable for these crimes against humanity — no one paid a fine, no one went to prison, no one lost his job. Not even Helms who, as mentioned above, had destroyed the MK ULTRA files.

I have attempted to address 4), the belief that only TIs are making these kind of “paranoid” claims about Deep State (including the CIA) operations. I have examined testimony by whistle-blowers, former employees of US intelligence — not only is there no oversight to protect the public but the Deep State is able to manipulate State power to deter whistle-blowers from speaking up.

I have addressed 5), the difficulty believing that such resource-intensive activities as group stalking take place, by showing that activities like group stalking have existed before in totalitarian countries — and that there is evidence, presented in mainstream press and ACLU reports, to suggest that a massive program, using citizen-spies, of surveillance and harassment was implemented post-9/11. Furthermore, it is obvious from cursory research that advanced technology which psychiatrists claim could not exist, 5), does in fact exist.

Above all, I tried to show that, contrary to 6), public faith in psychiatric “expertise, that psychiatric authority is not based on the access to and application of a legitimate body of knowledge but is based on pretense and the enactment of a variety of ceremonies that create the illusion in the public mind that mental health professionals are scientists, are doctors of medicine (often they are MDs but their medical expertise is irrelevant to what they do as psychiatrists) when in actuality their categories of “mental illnesses” have no more validity than a collectively shared fantasy and their methods of “treating” mental illness are nothing more than methods of social control. Those therapists who are helpful to clients are effective simply because they are compassionate, intelligent, and humane — the adoption of a “medical model” would undermine the efficacy of any therapist.

The psychiatric metanarrative about TIs is yet another example of the mental health professions’ historical subordination of the quest for truth to financial exigencies, and to their own social mandate to control and correct those who deviate from dominant social norms, to domicile, tranquilize, contain and mute troubled or troubling persons, persons who are disturbing to their own families and kinship groups. The casualty has been the truth and the erstwhile losers have been those individuals who are battling to assert and recover those constitutional rights and liberties on which this country was founded — albeit imperfectly.

Below is a discussion of the article in The New York Times about TIs which was based on the psychiatric metanarrative.

 

Back to Top

Discussion of the New York Times Article About TIs Based on the Psychiatric Metanarrative

United States of Paranoia: They See Gangs of Stalkers

MIKE McPHATE  | JUNE 10, 2016 | The New York Times

Nobody believed him. His family told him to get help. But Timothy Trespas, an out-of-work recording engineer in his early 40s, was sure he was being stalked, and not by just one person, but dozens of them.

He would see the operatives, he said, disguised as ordinary people, lurking around his Midtown Manhattan neighborhood. Sometimes they bumped into him and whispered nonsense into his ear, he said.

“Now you see how it works,”they would say.

At first, Mr. Trespas wondered if it was all in his head. Then he encountered a large community of like-minded people on the internet who call themselves “targeted individuals,” or T.I.s, who described going through precisely the same thing.

The group was organized around the conviction that its members are victims of a sprawling conspiracy to harass thousands of everyday Americans with mind-control weapons and armies of so-called gang stalkers. The goal, as one gang-stalking website put it, is “to destroy every aspect of a targeted individual’s life.”

McPhate picks a poor example of a TI—or the best example if his goal was to persuade readers TIs are really psychotics.

Trepas’ confusion is made clear by the end of the article when Trepas himself wonders if TIs really exist. He could have picked Ramola D, winner of Grace Paley award for short stories; or Karen Stewart who worked for NSA for 28 years; or Gloria Naylor, best-selling novelist; or numerous other people I could name who were very accomplished before they became TIs. But then New York Times readers would be less inclined to dismiss TIs as psychotic. Mr. Trepas is not representative of the majority of TIs with whom I have spoken.

The author has set up his narrative. Mr. Trepas is a troubled person. He sees what he thinks are spies “disguised” as ordinary persons. (A knowledgeable TI would know that “ordinary persons” are recruited into the surveillance program.) At first McPhate tells us Trepas wonders if he is delusional, if “it was all in his head.” But then he encounters a large community of “like-minded people” who were organized around the conviction that there is a “sprawling conspiracy” to harass thousands of Americans.

Trepas begins to view his “delusional thoughts” as a legitimate interpretation of his experience, this is where the problem is defined. McPhate tells readers repeatedly throughout the article that the problem is the psychotic does not recognize he is mentally ill. This is the essential plot of the narrative — the basis of the conflict that propels the action in the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs. The problem is created or aggrandized when the pseudo-TI, or the covert psychotic, encounters a group of “non-compliant psychotics”– the psychiatric term for patients who are unwilling to take the medications psychiatrists say they need, and/or deny they are mentally ill. They are the unwitting villains in the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs.

The article continues:

A growing tribe of troubled minds

Mental health professionals say the narrative has taken hold among a group of people experiencing psychotic symptoms that have troubled the human mind since time immemorial. Except now victims are connecting on the internet, organizing and defying medical explanations for what’s happening to them.

From McPhate’s viewpoint and that of many if not most Americans, mental health professionals are the experts on reality. The “medical” experts say that the TIs’ interpretation of their experience should be discounted–and therefore the journalist will discount it. The TI is a psychotic in a new guise and her interpretations should not be taken seriously but viewed only as symptoms of her troubled mind. Psychotics have existed “since time immemorial.”

But now “victims” of “psychosis” are connecting with other covert psychotics on the Internet and “defying” “medical” explanations of their experience. This spells trouble. Only the psychiatric, the medical, explanation is real. In the psychiatric metanarrative, the TI is a non-compliant psychotic, and the behavior and beliefs of non-compliant psychotics are taken out of their social context — in which they make sense — and construed as unintelligible symptoms of an illness. The TI is treated by mental professionals as a non-compliant mental patient, and there is nothing she can say to change that diagnosis except by deciding to be a compliant mental patient.

The community, conservatively estimated to exceed 10,000 members, has proliferated since 9/11, cradled by the internet and fed by genuine concerns over government surveillance. A large number appear to have delusional disorder or schizophrenia, psychiatrists say.

Again it is repeated that there is a large and growing number of these troubled minds. Their growth is attributed to 9/11 and the Internet, and they are “fed” by “genuine concerns” over government surveillance. The journalist obviously must acknowledge the genuineness of this concern because, after all, readers know about Edward Snowden’s disclosures — but he wastes no time in getting back to his topic. A large number of these persons are schizophrenic or afflicted with delusional disorder — psychiatrists say so. The term “schizophrenic” is introduced, a term that has taken on the most ominous connotations, as opposed to the more mild term “delusional disorder.”

In the psychiatric metanarrative, schizophrenics are afflicted with the worst mental illness and thus constitute the lowest caste in the psychiatric status hierarchy of the mentally afflicted. They are the untouchables who for centuries were sequestered in state institutions and are now in our midst but restrained — often by force of law — by the fetters of toxic sedating “anti-psychotic” drugs. Thomas Szasz called schizophrenia “the sacred symbol” of psychiatry and argued that its evocation of chaos and unreason gave psychiatry its identity as the epitome and protector of order and reason (even to Freud who wrote contemptuously of schizophrenics), guarding us from these barbarians who had arisen inexplicably from the midst of Western civilization itself.

So “a large number” — psychiatrists say — of TIs are schizophrenics or otherwise afflicted. What about those who are not psychotic? Will the journalist give them a voice, allow them to express their concerns, and to comment on the psychiatric narrative? Or will they remain voiceless? In fact by the end of the article they have disappeared altogether, since McPhate does not interview one TI or one whistle-blower — with the possible exception of Dr John Hall — whom he presents as credible.

Yet, the phenomenon remains virtually unresearched.

The phenomenon has been defined by McPhate: Psychotic persons who defy psychiatric explanations and thus, do not get the help they need. But research is required on this medical problem.

For the few specialists who have looked closely, these individuals represent an alarming development in the history of mental illness: thousands of sick people, banded together and demanding recognition on the basis of shared paranoias.

Specialists in what? Psychobabble? The journalist defines the “alarming development” in the history of psychiatry: Thousands of sick paranoid people “banded together” — a “growing tribe of troubled minds.”

They are banded together like criminals — “a tribe of troubled minds” — and “demanding recognition.” The problem is a medical problem — and thus a social problem because we have now a tribe of psychotics who refuse to accept that they are mentally ill and thus will not get the psychiatric help they need. Psychiatry’s narrative, dramatized by the journalist, seems designed to evoke the public’s deepest fears about this “alarming development.” The words themselves suggest something sinister. These paranoid persons “defy” and “demand” (from society). The journalist thus takes the psychiatric narrative and gives it a journalistic and dramatic form — he is documenting a serious new medical-social problem. The TI’s metanarrative, insofar as it is alluded to — that the TI is a victim of surveillance, groupstalking, mind manipulation — is depoliticized, emptied of substantive content, and redefined as psychotic symptomotology. The journalist and the psychiatrist can make the TI’s narrative disappear — they can banish from the public imagination any genuine concerns the TIs’ metanarrative may evoke about surveillance and other pernicious operations of the Deep State.

But of what do they “demand” recognition? The question is elided by the phrasing: “on the basis.” The journalist implies they demand not just recognition but acceptance of their collective “paranoias.” This is in fact true, however carelessly phrased. TIs do not want to be classified and dismissed as psychotics, as paranoid. They want the TI metanarrative as expressed by their most articulate spokespersons to be taken seriously and reckoned with by other members of civil society — including mental health professionals whose responsibility is to help the distressed, and journalists whose responsibility is to search for the truth.

The journalist does not investigate what the TI defines as an alarming development: The growth of an apparatus of surveillance, control, and torture which victimizes American citizens, and is outside accountability. All indications suggest he has not even read the books given him by TIs he consulted -– and he has certainly not seriously considered the testimony by scientists and former agents who confirm the TIs’ “delusions.”

They raise money, hold awareness campaigns, host international conferences and fight for their causes in courts and legislatures.

These psychotics are busy and effective activists for their cause.

Perhaps their biggest victory came last year, when believers in Richmond, Calif., persuaded the City Council to pass a resolution banning space-based weapons that they believe could be used for mind control. A similar lobbying effort is underway in Tucson.

They deceived the people of Richmond, California.

An “echo chamber” of paranoia

Dr. Lorraine Sheridan, who is co-author of perhaps the only study of gang-stalking, said the community poses a danger that sets it apart from other groups promoting troubling ideas, such as anorexia or suicide. On those topics, the internet abounds with medical information and treatment options.

This tribe, this community of psychotics poses a real and distinctive danger to themselves and to the public because of the Internet — according to the expert on group stalking whose “investigation” “found” group-stalking did not exist. As mentioned above, this study was flawed and showed lack of rudimentary knowledge about experimental methodology.

An internet search for“gang-stalking,”however, turns up page after page of results that regard it as fact. “What’s scary for me is that there are no counter sites that try and convince targeted individuals that they are delusional,”Dr. Sheridan said.

According to the mental health professional, a psychologist and “expert” on gang-stalking, these delusional persons go to the Internet and find copious websites with “information” that confirm the reality of their sense that they are being stalked. The expert finds it frightening that there are no “counter” websites to tell them they are “delusional.” Of course she accepts the psychiatric metanarrative. Not because she is intentionally complicit — although past history suggests some of the most prominent psychiatrists and psychologists worked for the CIA. But because (see discussion above), like most mental health professionals, she is angered and disturbed by non-compliant patients — patients who won’t take their “medication,” and who will not accept the psychiatrists’ evaluation of them as “mentally ill.”

They end up in a closed ideology echo chamber,” she said.

We are told by the expert on reality how the psychotic delusion is anchored in the sick mind. It never occurs to her that she may be in a closed ideology echo chamber…

“In instructional tracts online, veterans of the movement explain the ropes to rookies:

Do not engage with the voices in your head.

If your relatives tell you you’re imagining things, they could be in on it.

Do not visit a psychiatrist.”

Here we see the basis of the psychiatrist’s own fear. These “psychotics” are violating the sacred psychiatric injunction: When troubled, consult a mental health professional.

This violation threatens to undermine psychiatric authority, or more precisely the authority of the mental health system with its hierarchy of professionals, including psychologists, social workers, and other allied disciplines.

TIs should take note. If they randomly consult a psychiatrist or any mental health professional, the odds are they will be treated as non-compliant psychotics. The psychiatric metanarrative denies that the State in America has the ability and the will to subject persons to sophisticated forms of tortures — and refuses to look seriously at the copious evidence that it has done so in the past and is doing so now.

Note that the journalist uses again the term “tribe,” with its menacing connotations — earlier the reference was to a tribe of troubled minds. Don’t be fooled, the experts warns: This new breed of psychotics comes from all classes and even includes professionals in higher socio-economic echelons, highly educated people, people the average person would not suspect were really psychotics, even schizophrenics, passing as normal.

In Facebook forums and call-in support groups, they commiserate over the skepticism of their loved ones and share stories of black vans that circle the block or co-workers conscripted into the campaign.

They are unhappy that their loved ones don’t believe them and they share stories the journalist depicts as bizarre. This emerging psychiatric meta-narrative dramatized by the journalist makes the TIs appear very paranoid, and it seeks to drive a wedge between the TI and her loved ones who will increasingly find the psychiatric metanarrative recounted in the Press — even in the prestigious New York Times.

A T.I. subgenre has blossomed on Amazon. Left, the cover of John Hall’s “Guinea Pigs: Technologies of Control,” and Robert Duncan’s “How to Tame a Demon.”

They have self-published dozens of e-books, with titles like “Tortured in America”and“My Life Changed Forever.”In hundreds of YouTube videos they offer testimonials and try to document evidence of their stalking, even confronting unsuspecting strangers.

All this evidence the expert warns is part of a planned effort — a conspiracy comes to mind, although the psychiatric expert would never call it a conspiracy — to “try to document” evidence that they are not psychotics but victims.

They don’t “try to” document evidence–they do document this. And McPhate chose to ignore it, despite McPhate’s correspondence with TIs and whistle-blowers — as TIs have noted. (See Human Rights Watch3 Blog, The Questionable Reporting of The New York times, accessed August, 2016.) He also does not mention that some of the people documenting the group stalking and the use of neuroweaponry are whistle-blowers or other experts (journalists for alternative blogs) with credentials and backgrounds that help establish their credibility.

Ramola D provides a list of authorities at The Everyday Concerned Citizen/Robert DuncanRamola herself is a prolific writer and TI (since late 2013) who won a Washington Writers’ Publishing House award in 1998 for her poetry collection Invisible Season, and the 2008 AWP Grace Paley Prize in Short Fiction for her collection Temporary Lives & Other Stories — she was for years a professor at George Washington University and is the recipient of a 2005 National Endowment for the Arts Fellowship in Poetry.

Of course, by omitting these credentials, it is easier to convince readers these whistle-blowers are delusional. Dr. Robert Duncan, for example, has multiple graduate degrees from Harvard and Dartmouth. He has worked for the Department of Defense and the CIA on AI and neuroscience projects which seek to stimulate and rewire the human brain. He became a whistle-blower when he discovered this technology was being used in torturous non-consensual experiments on American citizens, just as LSD had been used in non-consensual experiments by the CIA in a previous era in MK ULTRA, as documented by the US Congress’ Church Committee.

Although McPhate corresponded with Duncan, he left all of Duncan’s comments out of the article. McPhate’s manipulation of his readers is further illustrated by the fact that he selects one of Duncan’s relatively unimportant books to mention (“How to Tame a Demon”) — a book with a title (in the context McPhate has established) that makes it appear to the reader that Duncan is a psychotic who is obsessed by (literal) demons.

He could have mentioned Duncan’s seminal book, Project Soul Catcher: Secrets of Cyber and Cybernetic Warfare Revealed — but that title would not have been as likely to make Duncan look paranoid. Just mentioning a few of Duncan’s accomplishments would have undermined the psychiatric metanarrative McPhate promulgates. For example, Duncan writes, “My projects have included algorithms for Echelon and CIA natural-language parsing and classification of document content, IRS formula for red-flagging audits, writing the artificial intelligence code to automate tracking of the Soviet Nuclear Submarine Fleet and all water vessels, work integrating HAARP with SIGINT, SIGCOM, and SPAWAR…” — that is just the beginning of a long list. (See Dr. Robert Duncan.com, not Duncan’s website, accessed 2016.)

Again note that the TIs are presented as a threat: “Unsuspecting strangers” (emphasis added) -– that is, strangers who do not realize that TIs are really psychotics — are alerted they may be “confronted” by these disguised non-compliant psychotics. I have spoken to dozens of TIs. I don’t know any who “confronted” strangers. Many sought to tell their story to mental health professionals — invariably with adverse effects.

“They wanted to basically destroy me, and they did,” a young mother in Phoenix says in one video, choking back tears. She lost custody of her daughter and was sent to a behavioral health hospital, says the woman, whose name is being withheld to protect her privacy. “But I am going to fight back for the rest of my life.”

She adds, “And guess what, I’m not crazy.”

Here is the leitmotif, formulated in different ways, but always the denial of one’s insanity —  woven throughout the narrative. The journalist is trying to persuade the readers that the psychiatric metanarrative with its trope of the (mad and bad) non-compliant patients — here in the guise of the TI — is the truth, beyond doubt. The real problem, he tells us, echoing the psychiatrist, is that the covert psychotic will not admit, or does not realize — as a victim of the delusions of other TIs — that she is psychotic.

The journalist shows no sympathy for this bereaved woman who lost custody of her daughter. Or if he has any sympathy it is because she is, in his mind, a non-compliant psychotic who resists getting psychiatric help. He quotes her remark that she’s not crazy, but if there is any doubt that his intent is to convey that she is crazy, it is dispelled in the succeeding sentence about Dr. Sheridan’s study which found that all of the people who claimed to be victims of group stalking were delusional!

The woman quoted above lost custody of her daughter — probably because she went to an authority and volunteered information. The desire for the recognition for one’s identity, one’s sanity as a human being who is a subject, an equal, a person whose experiences and perspective are regarded as meaningful, leads many TIs — who cannot confide in family and friends — to seek out psychiatrists or therapists under the illusion that they will be understanding.

McPhate’s discussion with several mental health professionals is indicative: they do not hide their disdain for “patients” who refuse to accept they are ill. Although this is not discussed by McPhate, psychiatrists and other mental health professionals are particularly irked by the unwillingness of many patients to take psychiatric drugs. Ever since “psychotics” were released from state mental hospitals, they have been battling with mental health professionals for the right to liberty — a major site of contestation is the bodies of mental patients.

Many patients are reluctant to take “anti-psychotics” (above all other “meds”) because of the extremely discomforting or painful “side effects” typical of the neuro-toxic (see above) brain-damaging “anti-psychotics,” and/or because they are increasingly aware of adverse effects on their health. (See Seth Farber, 2012, The Spiritual Gift of Madness: The Failure of Psychiatry and the Mad Pride Movement, Rochester, Vermont: Inner Traditions.) Yet professionals insist that patients’ unwillingness is based on an irrational refusal to get well. (Yet we saw above that in the long run, these drugs actually impede the recovery process, although professionals are “in denial” about this fact.) Subconsciously, the psychiatrist sees the refusal to “accept one’s illness” as a threat to her authority, her legitimacy, her professional identity. (See Rosenhan experiment discussed above.) It is also a challenge to her socio-economic status, since an exodus of patients from the system would result in a loss of jobs and markets. It should be noted studies have shown mental patients were not significantly more violent than “normal” people.

Dr. Sheridan’s study, written with Dr. David James, a forensic psychiatrist, examined 128 cases of reported gang-stalking. It found all the subjects were most likely delusional.

I discussed this study above. This representation of the study is inaccurate. It did not “find” the subjects were delusional. It found that 2 mental health professionals, a psychiatrist and a psychologist, independently reached the conclusion that 128 subjects had to be delusional because what they reported in their written accounts was either highly unlikely or impossible. But on what basis can one call an event “highly unlikely”? Sheridan and James give examples of such events including hostile operatives being inserted in victim’s workplace and their children’s schools, 24-hour electronic surveillance involving teams of men in black vans, etc.

Scientific studies of the sort published in this journal generally calculate the probability statistically. There is no way for Sheridan and James, or anyone, to measure the likelihood of 24-hour surveillance. The TI reports seem highly unlikely to the professionals because it is an event they have never read about in the newspapers and that seems to lack a rationale. But before they come to convict the TI of being delusional — the diagnosis has very negative social consequences — they should examine the TI’s evidence.

Sheridan and James are like a jury which heard only the argument of the prosecution, and plugged up their ears when the expert witnesses for the defense — for the TI — took the stand.

In the light of this evidence, these allegations are very plausible — Intelligence agencies have behaved this way in the past here and elsewhere. Sheridan and James and McPhate have such strong prejudices that they refuse to examine the evidence — any decent lawyer for TIs would have easily gotten them thrown out of the jury pool. To determine conclusively if a TI is delusional one could hire a private investigator to determine if they are being stalked. (Of course if the perpetrators are canny they would realize an investigator was on the case, and temporarily stop the stalking.) Or one could examine the kind of documentary evidence for the operations of the Deep State I present above. Sheridan and James are not investigators — they are biased mental health professionals. And McPhate is not an investigative journalist — at least not here.

My own conviction as a psychologist who has not abandoned critical thinking is that most of the TIs I have met are not delusional. (In a few cases I have been unsure and a few I thought were delusional.) Certainly their allegations are very plausible and thus these allegations should not be dismissed as delusional. In most cases I have examined there is a clear difference between the “schizophrenic” and the TI. (I do not accept that “schizophrenia” is an incurable disease — I regard it as a emotional-spiritual crisis; its seeming chronicity a result of the iatrogenic drugs and standard practices of mental health professionals.)

“One has to think of the T.I. phenomenon in terms of people with paranoid symptoms who have hit upon the gang-stalking idea as an explanation of what is happening to them,” Dr. James said.

 A mishmash of conspiracy theories

McPhate uses the pejorative term mishmash as if conflict and diversity is not the norm in virtually every intellectual discipline dealing with complex phenomena. I doubt he would say quantum physics is a mishmash of theories.

Perhaps unsurprisingly, the community is divided over the contours of the conspiracy. Some believe the financial elite is behind it. Others blame aliens, their neighbors, Freemasons or some combination.

The movement’s most prominent voices, however, tend to believe the surveillance is part of a mind-control field test done in preparation for global domination. The military establishment, the theory goes, never gave up on the ambitions of MK Ultra, the C.I.A.’s infamous program to control the mind in the 1950s and ’60s.

What is implied here is that MK ULTRA was an anomalous program that ended in the 1960s.

A leading proponent of that view is an anesthesiologist from San Antonio named John Hall.

McPhate lets Hall talk but at this point in the article the framework is now established — the psychiatric metanarrative. So the unwary reader assumes these are the words of a mentally-afflicted man and they ring hollow.

John Hall, an anesthesiologist in San Antonio, has been a leading voice of those who feel targeted.

In his 2009 book, “A New Breed: Satellite Terrorism in America,”Dr. Hall gave his own account of being targeted. Agents bleached his water, he wrote, and bombarded him with voices making murderous threats.

The book made a splash because of the messenger: a licensed member of the medical establishment who was telling those who feel targeted that psychiatrists were misleading them. A janitor knows as much about the human mind, he wrote.

As we saw above, a janitor often does know more about the human psyche than the psychiatrist who cannot even distinguish the sane from the insane. In Rosenhan’s study it was other mental patients who suspected the pseudo-patients were not insane. None of the professionals guessed. Their training and miseducation prevents them from understanding what goes on in persons’ minds.

Dr. Hall, 51, was invited for an interview on “Coast to Coast AM,” a conspiracy-minded radio show based in California that is said to reach millions of listeners. After that, he said,“I had probably three or 4,000 emails from people saying:‘It’s happening to me in this state.’It’s happening to me in Florida.’It’s happening to me in California.’”

The similarities of the cases spoke to a wide-ranging campaign, he said. “If the psychiatrists want to say that this is schizophrenia or delusional disorder, that’s fine,” he said. “But every one of these victims have the same story.”

Dr. Hall discusses gang stalking, psychiatry and MK Ultra.

While Dr. Hall has faced scrutiny from the Texas Medical Board over his mental fitness, he retains his license. Over time, however, many others who identify as gang-stalking victims end up out of work. They are mocked by colleagues, tolerated by family. Friends and spouses fall away.

McPhate reports this outcome as if it is a result of TIs’ psychosis — their intractable attitude, their refusal to get psychiatric treatment.

A pretext for violence

The despair that results has led some to lash out in violence.

Many in the community, for example, are convinced that Aaron Alexis, who killed 12 people at the Washington Navy Yard in 2013, was a victim. Mr. Alexis, a former sailor, left behind a document accusing the Navy of attacking his brain with “extremely low frequency” electromagnetic waves. On the side of his shotgun were etched the words “my elf weapon.”

It was unclear when Myron May’s mental distress began, but by the fall of 2014, it had become too much. He quit his job as a prosecutor in New Mexico and traveled to Florida. There, he videotaped a testimonial about how gang-stalking had ruined his life.

“As you can see right now,” he says into the camera, “I am totally not crazy.”

Myron May: “I’m what’s called a targeted individual.”

Laying out his case, he describes an episode at a gas station where he believed somebody in dark glasses was mimicking his movements. “It was really creepy,” he said. “Everything I did, he did.”

Later in the video, he prays for forgiveness for his future sins. “Father,” he says, “right now I ask that you look down on all the targeted individuals across the globe. Help them to cope with this madness.”

“On Nov. 20, 2014, Mr. May walked into a library at Florida State University, where he had graduated in 2005, and shot three people, leaving one paralyzed. He dared the police to kill him, then fired in their direction before being fatally shot, officials said. He was 31.

Officers standing over the body of Myron May on Nov. 20, 2014, after the shooting at Florida State University.

The vast majority of people with psychosis never resort to violence. Still, studies suggest that a small number of those experiencing psychotic episodes — especially paranoid thoughts, accompanied by voices making commands — are more likely to act on hostile urges than people without a mental illness.

And what if paranoid thoughts are put in their mind by the CIA? Is the percentage of identified TIs — who McPhate claims are paranoid psychotics —  or real paranoids more likely to act on hostile urges than the angry non-TI, non-psychotic? McPhate presents no evidence to confirm this.

Furthermore several psychiatrists have demonstrated that the commonly prescribed “anti-depressants” (Selective Serotonin Reuptake Inhibitors or SSRI) actually cause some patients to become violent. Dr Peter Breggin writes, “It’s not the patient’s ‘mental illness’ that causes violence, it’s the drugs…[A]ntidepressants can and do cause violence on every level from people who feel more irritable or less loving toward their families to people who commit domestic violence or carry out mass murders.” (See Peter Breggin, July 25, Mad in America, “Violence Caused by Antidepressants”, accessed November, 2016).

Yet the idea that TIs and other “non-compliant psychotics” have a tendency toward violence is an integral part of the psychiatric metanarrative — a justification for forcing so-called patients, including TIs, to take psychiatric drugs, sometimes the very drugs that cause violence!

Many in the T.I. community, as anyone would, have repudiated the shootings by Mr. Alexis and Mr. May. But some also harbor troubling views about their perceived oppressors. They question how people could be so cruel.

Why is this troubling? Don’t most people take the view that their oppressors are cruel? It is troubling because McPhate accepts the psychiatric metanarrative which posits that the TI, the non-compliant psychotic, has a tendency to retaliate against her enemies — and thus requires psychiatric restraint — forced drugging.

Karen Stewart of Tallahassee, Fla., believes large numbers of regular people have been brainwashed by the National Security Agency into thinking that she is a traitor or terrorist. Wherever she goes, she says — to church, to the grocery store, to the doctor’s office — they are there, watching.

McPhate withholds critical information from the readers: Karen Stewart worked for the NSA as an Intelligence analyst from 1982 to 2010 — for 28 years. For 28 years she was never considered a psychotic. The biographical facts that are omitted buttress the TI metanarrative whereas the false depiction of Ms. Stewart strips her of her credentials, her authority, and reduces her to the status of an ordinary non-compliant lunatic. McPhate’s inaccurate depiction serves one purpose however — it strengthens the credibility of the psychiatric metanarrative.

Stewart writes elsewhere that she was “railroaded out” of NSA

“just two years before I could retire because I had dared ask the Inspector General to investigate a matter involving work credit and promotion theft. I moved to Florida in 2011 to get away and wait for the lawsuit (appeal to forbidden retaliatory firing) to be adjudicated by the Judge Lawrence Gallagher at the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC) in Baltimore.” (Washington’s BlogNSA Whistleblower Karen Stewart Speaks Candidly About Illegal and Criminal NSA & FBI Programs of Organized Stalking and Electronic Harassment in the USA & Abroad)

She states,

“Under former President Bush and now continued under President Obama, what apparently started decades ago as illegal and clandestine programs of experiments on human subjects, such as the CIA’s MK ULTRA, has resulted in the proliferation of Defense Contractors such as Lockheed-Martin, Raytheon, General Dynamics, and others, making secret agreements with Federal agencies such as DOD, DIA, NSA, DHS, etc., to allow them and related laboratories and universities to expand inhumane experimentation programs such as illegal experiments for Directed Energy Weapons on unwitting and non-consenting American citizens.”(See The Everyday Concerned Citizen/Karen Stewart, NSA Whistleblower: Synopsis of the Silent Holocaust Taking Place in the United States.

It baffles her, she said. But worse, “It makes me angry to see how many people in this country are sociopaths. They are absolute groupthink drones,” she said. “I don’t even consider them human anymore.”

“A need for meaning’

Susan Clancy, a Harvard-trained psychologist who has researched people who believe they’ve been abducted by aliens, said it could be extremely difficult to dissuade patients who have latched onto beliefs that they think explain their delusions.

“I think it’s a need for meaning and a need to understand your life and the problems you’re having,” she said. “You’re not some meaningless nobody. You’re being followed by the C.I.A.”

McPhate brings in yet another professional — this one from Harvard — to give weight to the psychiatric metanarrative. Yet he made contact with a number of former whistle-blowers, and quotes only one — without even mentioning her career at NSA.

Yet many of the people McPhate interviewed were not “meaningless nobodies.” Stewart was an NSA employee for decades. Robert Duncan, the whistle-blower whom he interviewed, is a former CIA employee and a scientific prodigy with multiple degrees from Ivy League schools. John Hall was a physician. Rosanne Schneider, whom he interviewed (but does not mention), is an author and artist. And furthermore there are numerous highly accomplished TIs. But including them would have undermined the psychiatric metanarrative.

In that way, Dr. Clancy said, the behavior shares a trait with religious belief: To abandon it would be life upending.

Paula Trespas, Mr. Trespas’s mother, said she avoided debating with him.

“It wasn’t something that he was making up,” she said. “He really felt the way he felt and experienced what he experienced. I got to the point where I was just finally saying to him: “I’m very, very sad that you have to go through this. I wish that there was something that I could do.’ ”

The big hope is that society will wake up to what’s happening and put a stop to it, those who feel targeted say. In some cases, they do seek psychiatric help. In others, the delusions subside. For the rest, the prognosis isn’t good, psychiatrists say. Many contemplate suicide.

Mr.Trespas, now 49, says he went so far as to prepare a rope.

Sitting at a coffee shop in Brooklyn last month, he says the stalking has thankfully quieted down. But he says his harassers have also been seeding his body with Morgellons, a painful, insectlike infestation of the skin that many doctors say is psychosomatic.

He is gaunt, with weary, sad eyes. It’s been eight years since it all began, he says. He can’t hold a job. His friends have drifted away.

The TI community includes a wide range of persons — many are accomplished writers or professionals, as McPhate noted above. Yet by choosing one of the loneliest, most confused, and most forlorn TIs, one who is not even sure of the TI metanarrative, he reinforces the credibility of the psychiatric metanarrative. This is a self-identified TI who may or may not be a TI. (Many TIs have reported that they have encountered disinformation agents posing as TIs.)

The online community has been a crucial support, he says. “But we don’t know exactly what’s happening,” he says. “Maybe we’re believing the wrong thing. I don’t know. That’s why I try to keep my mind open about who and what and why and how.”

Trepas is the only TI I’ve heard of who thinks “maybe we’re believing the wrong thing.”

One thing he is certain of though, he says: He’s not crazy.

McPhate ends the story on the cautionary motif of the psychiatric metanarrative: TIs are psychotics who refuse to accept that they have an illness — they are non-compliant psychotics.

It is a sad fact that the mainstream media has followed the lead of the psychiatric “authorities” in dismissing the allegations of TIs and defining them all as non-compliant treatment-resistant psychotics. They thus help to promulgate the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs. Journalists and mental health workers rest their case ultimately on articles like that of Sheridan and James. This article has the appearance of a genuine “investigation,” of a scientific study — but it is all hot air. It substitutes reliability for validity, the agreement or shared fantasy of mental health professionals for correspondence to social reality. In other words the hidden sub-text of pseudo-investigations like Sheridan and James is, “It is so because we the experts say it is so.”

It is my hope that in the future The New York Times will serve its function as the fourth estate. Instead of dismissing TIs and promulgating the psychiatric metanarrative, McPhate or another journalist will seriously investigate TIs’ claims. Instead of interviewing only the most troubled TIs, and thus, wittingly or unwittingly, reinforcing the psychiatric claim that TIs are covert psychotics, this journalist would interview some of the more articulate spokespersons for TIs (some of whom are mentioned above), and seriously consider their allegations.

He or she would not treat psychiatric opinions as revealed truth but would give voice to dissidents who do not subscribe to the psychiatric metanarrative. The journalist would present the testimony of a few of the whistle-blowers who have worked in intelligence — Robert Duncan is today the most prominent and outspoken of former employees of American intelligence who worked on cybernetic weaponry. While not revealing classified information, Duncan has exposed the advanced technologies used against innocent persons. As a whistle-blower he follows in the tradition of men like Edward Snowden and William Binney whose views as a supporter of TIs could also be solicited.

The torture of American citizens described by TIs is a violation of international proscriptions against torture and against non-consensual experiments on subjects. The policy of both APAs prohibit psychiatrists and psychologists from inflicting harm upon anyone. The Coalition for an Ethical Psychology wrote:

“The APA and other health professional organizations have a duty to support the ethical practice of the profession, which includes protecting their members from complicity in human rights abuses and other violations of international law.”(See Coalition for Ethical Psychology, Preserve Do-No-Harm for Military Psychologists: Coalition Responds to Department of Defense Letter to the APA, accessed November, 2016).

By labeling TIs as “psychotic”, mental health professionals are wittingly or unwittingly complicitous in the most serious kinds of human rights abuses — in crimes against humanity.

 

Back to Top

The CEP and the Power of the Ethically Guided Minority

The Coalition for Ethical Psychology has served an important and exemplary role within the American Psychological Association.They were formed in 2006 in response to psychologists’ participation at Guantanamo as mentioned above. Their goal is “to expose and oppose psychologist involvement in any state-supported abuse with a national security rationale.” They state,

“We are alarmed that the APA, the world’s largest mental health organization, has overlooked, and even colluded with, subversion of psychology to state power. The ethical commitment of psychology as a profession is to improve human welfare universally.” (See Coalition for Ethical Psychology, About.)

This is a far more subversive goal than the founders may realize, since the entire mental health system is a regime of surveillance and control — of the “mentally ill” — and a servant of State power. CEP places APA members between conflicting mandates: On the one hand, is the ancient injunction of the helping professions to “do no harm” and the ethical obligation to serve the universal good, and on the other hand is their perceived obligation to the state to control trouble or troubling individuals. This is a conflict of interests considering the repressive and often punitive nature of the modern state. Another factor compromising their ability to help clients is the professionals’ financial ties to the pharmaceutical industry, which has been enormously lucrative for mental health professionals and leads them to place profits before people. This conflict is most obvious with psychiatrists but it affects everyone working in the “mental health” system.

The mental health system is a social control agency similar to law enforcement and criminal justice, although distinctive in many respects, as shown above. The linchpin of the system is the administration of psychiatric drugs disguised as medicine: Psychiatric patients in the public sector — state mental hospital or group homes and “out-patient treatment” — are often subjected to involuntary psychiatric “out-patient” commitment (most heinously, the involuntary injection of psychotropic drugs). Involuntary treatment has recently itself been declared to be a violation of international law and human rights by the UN Committee on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities. (See Tina Minkowitz, Mad in America, Oct 13 2013, “UN Prohibition of Psychiatric Commitment: Review and Analysis”.)

Dr. Bonnie Burstow writes,

“Take away the medical veneer and what we have here are substances given for non-existent disorders [problems in living], all of which by their nature create chemical imbalances, all of which disable, a number of which are associated with violence, all of which profoundly damage the brain. . . Is damage as treatment the best we can do? Is a society of rampant iatrogenic damage acceptable?” (Bonnie Burstow, Psychiatry and the Business of Madness, 2015, New York, p.200)

An ethical psychology or psychiatry is impossible in an unethical society. As R.D. Laing pointed out, the well-adjusted bomber pilot — dropping bombs on women and children of the “enemy” — serving the interests of the State and of corporations, would be considered “mentally healthy” by mental health professionals although he is committing war crimes that violates elementary moral norms. That is, in an ethically perverse society, conformity and adjustment is sanctified and murder in service of the state assumes a façade of moral legitimacy.

The organizers of Coalition for an Ethical Psychology (CEP) are therapists in private practice (not in the public sector) and thus relatively free of State coercion. They are often unaware that the public mental health system is normally abusive. Abuse is not an aberration. CEP and others dedicated to realizing the ideal of an ethical society seek to expose unethical practices in the helping professions, and pressure professionals to uphold transcendent ethical norms. Every act of exposure and protest — no matter how selective — gives witness to values that transcend the mental health system and the State to which it is customarily subordinate.

I hope I have made it clear that many or most self-identified TIs are victims of no-touch torture and/or non-consensual experimentation. The declaration that all TIs are delusional is based upon premises that do not stand up to historical examination. Thus, the promulgation of the psychiatric metanarrative about TIs by professionals who have failed to investigate the allegations of thousands of self-identified Tis is a failure to take its own ethical mandate — to improve human welfare — seriously. If not an act of deliberate deception, it is an act of bullshitting, to quote Levine. Sheridan and Young’s pseudo-scientific study (see above) claims to have “found” that all TIs are delusional psychotics and thus enables professionals to silence and “treat” them, while avoiding the inner moral conflict that would ordinarily result from condoning and facilitating (no-touch) torture.

Like psychologists’ participation in the torture regime in Guantanamo, treating TIs as psychotic is a blatant, witting or unwitting, subservience to Deep State actions that are violations of human rights as recognized by international law. It is comparable to the Soviet psychiatry “treatment” of dissidents. The fact that a small minority of persons within the American Psychological Association have succeeded on occasion in pushing the group to take the high road and stand up for universal human welfare against the dictates of the State is testimony to the power of the individual inspired by transcendent moral ideals. Had the individuals who formed CEP not had such a strong commitment to the truth, had they not forced APA membership to confront their leaders’ involvement in designing a torture regime, the APA would still permit its members to participate in torture under the guise of “national security.” As Bruce Levine said, it’s easier to continue to bullshit than to face the truth. CEP provides a lesson in leadership, in creative maladjustment, for all of us.

A logical next step for an organization like CEP which opposes “psychologist involvement in any state-supported abuse” is to investigate the allegations of TIs and expose and oppose the a priori “diagnoses” of all TIs as psychotics. This focus may seem arbitrary or misleading since as stated, state-supported abuse is the norm in the mental health professions, but it has its own logic. Robert Whitaker and dissident professionals who have written for Mad in America oppose involuntary psychiatric drugging — another state-assisted abuse — but they would undoubtedly have no success in getting any professional body to publicly oppose involuntary drugging. Tina Minkowitz Esq., lawyer and psychiatric survivor, did however succeed in persuading the UN Committee on the Rights of Persons with Disabilities to assert forced treatment as a human rights abuse. (However UN bodies have little effect in the United States.) The CEP agenda must be guided by what is possible, and practical — and by the orientation of their own organization.

While treatment with brain-damaging drugs is the norm in the mental health system, overt torture is still regarded by most APA members with disdain — after all, it has no medical rationalization. Therefore it is possible that CEP could persuade members of the APA to oppose the routine labeling of TIs — without any investigation — as “psychotic.” (As I have shown, this diagnosis is “justified” by invalid studies.) An APA resolution of this kind would be publicized by the mainstream media, and would undermine the psychiatric metanarrative. Short of this, The New York Times and the mainstream media will continue to defer to Psychiatry and describe all TIs as non-compliant psychotics. Furthermore, while the corporate Press will continue to propagate the psychiatric metanarrative, it is time for journalists who have opposed US torture at Guantanamo and elsewhere, to expose no-touch torture on TIs and the complicity of mental health professionals in covering up these human rights abuses.

The therapeutic state fueled now by pharmaceutical industry grows without constraints while the Deep State operates without Congressional or public oversight. The development of a totalitarian regime — nominally a constitutional republic — in which human rights and the constitutional right to liberty are routinely trampled upon is today an ominous prospect in America. The prevention of such a development is now dependent upon the willingness of small minorities of individuals who are inspired by transcendental ethical ideals to mobilize larger groups to oppose the human rights abuses that are committed by the Deep State and by the mental health system and disguised and justified as “medical” treatments for an ever increasing number of covert “psychotics.”

 

Back to Top

***

This article may be re-published or re-posted in full or part, with attribution and linkback, by granted permission of the author. Please share widely.

Open Season on Targets: Blacklisted Individuals, Extreme Abuse in Targeting, Secretive Lab-Rat Exploitation, & Massive Establishment Cover-Up

Ramola D/Posted 12/3/2016 

Updated 2/17/2017

(With thanks to all the writers, whistleblowers, journalists, and human rights activists whose reviews supported the creation of this piece, and whose links, words, and quotes are included here.)

Secret High-Tech Surveillance, Targeting, Assault

The Deadly Reality of Today’s Covert Radiation-Policed and Neuro-Policed State, USA and WorldWide

How Blacklisted Individuals in Today’s Surveillance State, worldwide, in all Five-Eyes Countries (US, UK, Canada, New Zealand, Australia) as well as NSA-contracted countries in Europe, Asia, Africa, Are Targeted 6-Times and Used Like Lab Rats For Running-as-“Legal” yet Essentially Illegal, Wrongful, Criminal Non-Consensual Military/Navy/USAF Directed-Energy Weapons Operation, Testing, & Training as well as Non-Consensual Covert CIA/DIA/DARPA/NSA/DOJ/DHS Neuro-Experimentation in “Behavior Modification”, and Deliberately Disappeared from Public View By 1) Insidious and Strategic Deception Practiced by Colluding Psychiatrists, Colluding Medical Professionals, Colluding Media, Colluding Law Enforcement―Who Agree to Lie, and Call Them Paranoid, Delusional, and Schizophrenic; and 2) In-Community Agency Infiltrators―Who Control from Within.

How the End Result is treasonous Secret Military Subjugation of entire communities, neighborhoods, towns: In US Military jargon, Military Operations Other Than War (MOOTW), Asymmetric Warfare, Stealth Warfare, Information Warfare, Information Operations, Special Operations, Special Warfare, Psychological Warfare.

While this expose focuses on the USA, this exact protocol is being applied worldwide, in United Nations countries, in a long-running program, escalating in recent times, of ramping-up totalitarian and global control. Individual citizens will have to rise to stop it.

Written from the documented awareness, observations, experience, and analysis of those being wrongfully assaulted and exploited by this corrupt program; and necessarily inclusive of speculation, since the methodologies and technologies being used to attack and persecute individuals covertly, yet in plain view, hidden in plain sight, in the false name of National Security, may be largely classified. Information on these technologies is also obtained from public-domain patents, whistleblowers, and scientists who have worked on similar projects.

Please note: The secretive processes of current-day targeting and high-tech surveillance have been covered by many researchers, analysts, and writers in books and websites, many of which inform this article–a speculative op-ed rooted both in fact and experience. Military and Intelligence documents, talks by whistleblowers, lawsuits, published articles and reports highlighting the use of Executive Orders, statutes, and Defense-centric laws such as the NDAA and 5240.1R, information and documents gained on FOIA request, also contribute to this discussion, and are partially linked in-line, as well as listed in Sources & Further Information at the end.

Note also that because we are subject today to lies, deception, and PsyOps online, in Mainstream media, in books, and in the public domain, it’s essential to note, in human rights advocate Paul Baird’s words, “many truths are censored and kept secret…and these things we address, experienced by countless people worldwide, are no less true because proof cannot be extracted from the bowels of the Pentagon.”

The purpose of this article is to present the experience and understanding of those being targeted, assaulted with radiation weapons and neuroweapons, and non-consensually experimented-on,as understood by this writer; to unravel and piece together the means and processes by which people are being targeted–in terms of extant laws, military and Intelligence regulations and directives, Joint Targeting processes, Memoranda of Understanding between the DOD and the DOJ, loopholes in Human Subject Protections; to expose the inhumanity, moral depravity, and obscenity of this targeting and to-death human experimentation; and to offer solutions to address this inhumanity and end this targeting and assault of innocents.

This article builds on the analyses presented earlier at this site in several articles, collected under Human Rights, and explores and seeks to answer the questions: How exactly are people being targeted? How is the Military-Industrial-Intel complex, the DOD and the DOJ getting away with it? What is the extent of the PsyOp being run on the American public–and by extension, the global public? Who is involved? Who is colluding? Why is Media silent? And what can and should be done to stop it? To extend, correct, or comment on any information presented here, please email the writer or leave a comment below.

1. Scarlet Letter: Community Informants Falsely Label the Target as Terrorist/Spy

Targets are first wrongfully and unlawfully named terrorists, spies, or suspects, by paid Fusion Center FBI/DHS informants, operating in communities, weeding out the outspoken, the activists, the morally upright, anyone they take a dislike to: this includes older women and men, minorities, independent thinkers. This includes journalists, writers, whistleblowers, retirees, peace/justice activists, professors, nurses, doctors, attorneys, engineers, ex-Intel agents, veterans, teachers, home-makers, artists, people from every profession.

Secret FISA Letters and Warrants, and National Security Letters are issued wrongfully to “start an investigation” of the innocent American/named a “suspected terrorist or spy,” couched as legal criminal investigation. They are now subjects of Extreme Surveillance. The Patriot Act permits extended and useless surveillance of pretty much everyone, for pretty much any concocted reason. This may be Running-as-“Legal”, but, because it targets innocents, and builds a folder of lies around innocents, it is Illegal, and already a Crime: it is flagrantly Wrongful, and it’s being applied Inaccurately, to Non-Terrorists, Non-Spies. What results is a sustained dragnet targeting of innocents, absolutely without cause or evidence of wrongdoing, hidden by secrecy.

Diane Roark, former Congressional staffer with the Senate Intelligence Committee, explains here in this talk how Executive Order 12333 and the Patriot Act have permitted extreme abuse in targeting in the name of counter-terrorism, how NSA data is “now being used for criminal investigations, not just for counter-terrorism, which was the original purpose”, how NSA gives tips to local Law Enforcement, and “the courts are also corrupted, because they set up a fake evidentiary trail and cannot expose their data as (sourced from) NSA surveillance”, which, she notes, would be unConstitutional, how local Law Enforcement take the FBI’s lead and illegally engage in domestic, sneak-and-peek surveillance, and how the FISA court is involved (the FISA court cannot refuse to issue a warrant). Also see ex-FBI Mike German‘s talks on Youtube on indiscriminate targeting of non-terrorists, non-spies, non-criminals. See William Binney‘s expose here of secret laws, secret surveillance. See why Section 215 of the Patriot Act is detrimental to national security, and the nation at large: Let the Sun Set on PATRIOT- Section 215, Electronic Frontier Foundation

Solution: Repeal/Scrap the Patriot Act and EO 12333, Open the Secret FISA Court, Bring Due Process Back: No-one can or should be investigated as a terrorist or spy without being openly informed and openly charged in an open society. NSLs that are kept-secret should be scrapped.

NSA Whistleblower and retired Intelligence Analyst Karen Stewart, in her interview with Rob McConnell, X Zone, mentions an appeals process that should be instigated: anyone who is watchlisted should have a right to appeal this watchlisting. Due Process must be reinstated; no-one should be denied access to a meaningful defense.

This absolute power of being able to blacklist anyone in absolute secret, that the Intel agencies are currently indulging, has to be completely wrested from them. Absolute Power Corrupts Absolutely. While Secrecy is Permitting Extreme Abuse of Powers. Targeting anyone and everyone without due process, without cause, for reason of personal vendetta, for reason of suppression of free speech, activism, or dissent is not Counter-Terrorism, and is not protective of National Security.

This has to be understood for what it is really is: Secrecy-Protected Crime. Why are Intelligence agencies being permitted to criminally target Anyone without public accountability, transparency, and oversight? Innocents are being targeted in secret and destroyed in secret, this has to stop.

2. Modern Enslavement/Radiation & Neuro Policing: Innocent Targets are Put by DOJ Under Secretive 24/7 “FISA-Court-Ordered” Electronic Surveillance & Lab-Rat Physical/Biometric Surveillance

Targets (unlawfully targeted as above) are unlawfully subjected to a new and secretive Department of Justice program of 24/7 (FISA-Court-ordered) Electronic Surveillance, which involves secretive, continuous audio/video recording of the target, bugs and cameras covertly planted at their residences, continuous clandestine location tracking–a Special Operations Command military maneuver reported in 2013 as futuristic, and which secretly permits the continuous use of radiation, radar, sonic, scalar non-Lethal Weapons (possibly hidden in terminology as Biometric Surveillance Devices or Physical Surveillance Devices, on the person of the target, by local Law Enforcement and by Regional Fusion Centers which includes the Military (who are also authorized to support law enforcement agencies by Chapter 18 of Title 10 of the US Code).

This could include undisclosed Pre-Crime/Neuro-Crime/Neuro-Surveillance technologies under new, being-tested and being-rolled-out Neuro-Crime programs run under the aegis of Criminal Justice/21st-Century-Policing and permitted via long-standing classified-technology-sharing using Memoranda of Understanding with the DoD.

giordano0giordano1giordano2giordano3To understand that Neuro-Crime as contemporary facet of Criminal Justice has definitely arrived, see this brief interview with Vanderbilt Law and Biological Sciences professor Owen Jones for the 2013 PBS show Brains on Trial; also see this 2013 talk on Predictive Neuroscience given by Georgetown Neuroscience professor James Giordano(graphics from video, left); watch this collection of videos on Youtube on neuro-criminology and neurotechnology; search on Youtube using keywords Neuro Crime, Neuro Criminology, Neuro Ethics, for more.

To understand that Remote Neural Monitoring technologies, possibly classified (yet reported definitively as being experienced, non-consensually, by numerous targets, in the USA and worldwide), may be in use by DOJ under technology sharing agreements with DOD, see the expansive and detailed information on the capabilities of NSA Signals Intelligence described in ex-NSA employee John St. Clair Akwei’s 1991 lawsuit against the NSA. (While the information in this cornerstone lawsuit is unique, there is a tremendous amount of related information on this subject available on patents and technologies from researchers and whistleblowers, documented in books, videos, websites, and articles, a few listed here in Sources & Further Information.)

emf1a

Excerpt/Akwei vs. NSA

akwei-avast-safezone-2016-11-29-20-17-39

Excerpt/Akwei vs NSA

General Category: Electronic Surveillance (Electronic Surveillance IS Electronic Harassment.)
Physical (Bodily) Surveillance (Classified? Or just being kept-secret by DOJ? See this FOIA request denied by the Massachusetts Fusion Center, refusing transparency on the subject of non-lethal weapons admittedly being used on the streets, and see this FCC spreadsheet listing Ultra Wide Band (UWB) equipment, inclusive of Ground Penetrating Radar and Through The Wall Surveillance (TTWS) radar devices currently in use on the streets, obtained by a Pennsylvania resident on FOIA request.

There is also this Secret Surveillance Catalogue, ostensibly used (by Mil/Intel/local Law) only for cell phone surveillance, published by The Intercept in Dec 2015).

And just in: word of portable sonic devices marketed to Mil/Intel permitting remote bodily assault: Sonic Assault, and Sonic Nausea.

Through The Wall Surveillance (TTWS) Doppler radar devices as subset
RFID Identification chips and tracking as subset/Covertly implanted microchips, nanochips
Human Organ Surveillance as subset/Pulsed radar hits on organs
Remote ElectroMuscular tracking as subset/Remote electric shocks, low amperage
Biometric Surveillance (Classified? Or just being kept-secret by DOJ? Beyond facial recognition, iris, gait is Neuro-Surveillance. Is Brain and Nervous System Surveillance all being rolled into “Biometric” Surveillance?

Remote Functional MRIs, Remote EEGs, and Remote Neural Monitoring are all being reported by targets. )

Neuro-Crime Brain/Neuro Surveillance as subsetRemote MRIs, Remote EEGs, Remote Brain Scans
Remote Neural Monitoring as subsetPrecision targeting of nerves in human body
Radiation Intelligence Monitoring as subset–Picking up unintentionally radiated EMF/scalar brain waves as part of the NSA Signals Intelligence program (See the information on Signals Intelligence in the lawsuit John St. Clair Akwei Vs. NSA)

Remote Brain Experimentation/Neuro-Surveillance: It is entirely possible that targets are both being “surveilled/monitored” by the DOJ/FBI/Local Law Enforcement with physical/biometric surveillance devices, and also being used by the DOJ/FBI as hush-hush lab-rats for Pre-Crime, Neuro-Crime experimentation using remote radiation neuroweaponry such as those running remote fMRIs and remote EEGs, by secretly (and obviously wrongfully) enrolling them in “Countering Violent Extremism” (CVE) and other convenient programs. Supposedly, these CVE programs are being rolled out in Boston, Los Angeles, and Minneapolis; however, this targeting, from victim/Target accounts, is nationwide.

From Target accounts: These weapons, as experienced, include Through-Wall radar, portable Directed-Energy Weapons, covertly-implanted RFIDs and RFID Tracking; weapons also include the more exotic, being-tested Neuro Crime and Neuro Surveillance weapons, permitted to deliver Remote EEGs, Remote Electroshocks, Remote Neural Monitoring―all of which weaponry is possibly black-budget, covert-ops, CIA “sources & methods,” and “classified.”

(Can FOIAs and FOIA lawsuits force DOJ to reveal what classified or non-classified non-lethal weapons are in use by Fusion Centers as surveillance devices, without disclosure, on Americans? Massachusetts Fusion Center refuses to divulge information on these, citing “public safety” behind its withholding―which would suggest an acknowledgment that they (undisclosed non-lethals) are definitely in use, just not being disclosed. A FOIA request to the FCC by a Pennsylvania resident however, yielded a listing of radar-based through-wall surveillance devices as well as ground-penetrating radar possibly in use by local Law Enforcement or/and the Federal Government included in a FCC spreadsheet listing Ultra Wide Band equipment licenses.)

PLEASE NOTE: Classified non-lethal weapons jointly developed by DOJ/DOD for Criminal Justice appear to have been permitted for use on targets by the Department of Justice; no public disclosure or consent has preceded this usage. The usage of the weapons itself is covert―undisclosed; this is Secret Policing, and every American should know about it. When a state Fusion Center refuses to divulge its arsenal of non-lethal weapons currently in operation on its streets―and hidden under categories of surveillance, as surveillance devices–on a Freedom of Information Act request, as the Massachusetts Fusion Center has, to this writer, one has to question what part that attitude of deliberate secrecy has in a democracy. When it comes down to it, that attitude typifies repressive dictatorships―quintessential Banana Republics, not democracies. Is the government of the United States of America in actuality a repressive dictatorship then, and not a democracy?

Solution: The Department of Justice should fully disclose weaponry in use, and programs in use, whether pilot, experimental, or operational; no secret or covert electronic or radiation surveillance of any citizen should be allowed. This is bodily-invasive, intrusive, and extremely harmful radiation, scalar, and sonic technology. There has been no public debate and there is no public consent for this use, of undisclosed weaponry and undisclosed surveillance technology. This weaponry has been reported by all being assaulted with it as barbaric and inhumane; a military investigator has openly stated that certain non-lethal weapons are in actuality lethal; an ex-UK Navy microwave weapons expert has stated that all non-lethal weapons can be used lethally; targets report continuous 24/7 assault with these radiation weapons―that is not non-lethal usage, that is lethal usage.

3. Modern Enslavement/Target Practice: Innocent Targets are Secretly Enrolled into Multi-Million-Dollar Defense Contracts for Terminal Lab-Rat Directed-Energy Weapons Bio-Effects Testing

Targets (unlawfully targeted as above, and made the wrongful subjects of surveillance) are unlawfully entered–human-trafficked–into multi-million-dollar Military/USAF/Navy/Space Weapons experimentation programs, mostly field weapons testing of Directed Energy Weapons (DEWs), exploring Anti-Personnel Effects or Bio-Effects.

usaf-gen-dyn-2013

Excerpt/Thermal and Behavioral Effects of Exposure to Moving Small Diameter, 95-GHz Millimeter Wave Energy Spots, FWR-2012-0147H/Obtained on FOIA Request, Aug 2015

(See this post here for links to RFPs, contracts, and reports. See Dr. Robert Duncan’s note on field testing of weapons. Visit the Non-Lethal Human Effects page on the DOD Joint Non-Lethal Weapons Program website. Research DEW Bio-Behavioral Research or Human Effects.)

From RFP information and target accounts: These are Bio-Behavioral Effects Research programs, testing levels at which deleterious effects of radiation weapons can be detected on the human body, including damage to DNA, tissue, and cell structure, testing specific thermal and bio-electric effects, and testing the diverse capabilities of diverse EMF/RF/ELF sensors (land, space, and air-based, stationary and moving, close and distant, portable and hand-held, all covert) in tracking radio frequencies emitted by corporally-integrated RF microchips, bio-MEMs, and nanotechnology clandestinely implanted in the target’s body, as well as those emitted by individual brain and heart EMFs.

a11-5240-1r1aa11-5240-1who1aa11-5240-1rkeep1aa11-5240-1r01a

Secret Military Experimentation Unto Death: This experimentation is 24/7, and involves the operation of death-dealing Directed-Energy Weapons. The US Department of Defense has dared to characterize these deadly energy weapons acting across distance as “Non-Lethal Weapons” of “Electronic Warfare” — but in permitting, conducting, and promoting the experimental usage of these weapons on American civilians and veterans, as well as citizens worldwide, has openly proved to these Americans how deadly these weapons are, in their ability to very quickly degrade human organs, human brains, human bodies, in their use of radiation, sonics, and scalar technologies to cause chronic health damage, cancers, strokes, heart attacks, and–it must be stressed–death.

To be very clear, this incredibly inhumane US Military experimentation–masterminded by the conscienceless, mad scientists who have set up these testing and experimentation programs (and who pick up padded paychecks for it)–appears to be experimentation unto death. As far as this writer knows (as per information from numerous “Targeted Individuals,” books, and whistleblowers), no target has ever been released from these grotesque and cruel programs of non-consensual human experimentation; many targets, especially in recent times, have died both of illnesses from chronic directed-energy assault and suddenly-induced heart attacks. This includes well-known and beloved activists, public speakers, and writers Dr. Rauni Luukanen-Kilde, MD, author Gloria Naylor, and activists Sean Stinn, and Zakaos Breedlove-Ewing.

This death-industry experimentation ―completely non-consensual–is legally being permitted on the subjects of surveillance under cover of being important for “national security” by such outrageous, citizen-harming, and barbaric laws as the AUMF, NDAA, EO 12333, and the Defense-Industry-centric Military Directive 5240.1 R, an oligarchic imperative which freely permits military experimentation on All US citizens.

Put under surveillance by the NSA/FBI/FISA/DHS; Subjected to experimental non-stop “electronic” (read radiation/neuro) surveillance by DOJ; Experimented on for Intelligence Purposes by EO 12333 and 5240.1R; Indefinitely detained without due process by NDAA; Cleared for Non-Consensual Experimentation by loopholes in the Common Rule and OHRP, HHS (Office of Human Research Protections, Department of Health and Human Services); Experimented on Forever/& Terminally by way of Indefinite Detention, Neverending “Investigations,” Neverending Surveillance; Subjected to PsyOps and Smear Campaigns; Lives, livelihoods, and relationships destroyed: this is the Trail of Tears for targets today.

It should be noted here that in fact, All US citizens are indeed currently being targeted, assaulted, and experimented on, with heavy-metal aerosols (chem trails), nanotechnology, EMF radiation, GMOs, biological weapons (viruses), toxins and fertility-disruptors in vaccinations, ELF transmissions via HAARP, and more, in covert health-degradation programs related to the very real and long-standing United Nations depopulation agenda run globally. Some US citizens however are experimented on several times over, as detailed here, as enslaved targets entered into Electronic Warfare DEW-assault programsand other covert Intelligence experimentation programs, discussed further below.

a12marinesintel-1aa12marinesintel-2aa12marinesintel-4a